THE
"•■ ' " ; : . . ■ ■-.•;; : . ■'' •' ■■ •' ' Sss
DIPLOMATIST'S
FOR
THE LIBRARY
OF
THE UNIVERSITY
OF CALIFORNIA
LOS ANGELES
M
#8 no
THE
DIPLOMATISTS HANDBOOK
FOR
AFRICA
BY
COUNT CHARLES KINSKY.
Semper aliquid novi ex Africa.
WITH A POLITICAL MAP.
LONDON
KRGAN PAUL, TRENCH, TRUBNKR & Co. Lim.
PATERNOSTER HOUSE,
CHARING CROSS ROAD.
1897.
All rights reserved.
I. and K. court-typography Charles Prochaska, Teschen.
3\
l?91
Preface.
Africa, with its wild, virginal hunting fields and its heart
of mystery, that has still to yield up its secrets to the explorer,
has at all times excited a lively interest in me.
Many of my friends and acquaintances have made it the
scene of their travels or the field for their exertions, more than
one to find there, alas an untimely grave.
The various reports having served to strengthen my con-
viction in the ultimate and supreme mission of the dark continent
as the source from which exhausted Europe would draw that
vitality necessary for its future nourishment, the range of my
enquiry naturally became increased, and I missed no opportunity
to collect and note down thoroughly reliable information.
Soon afterwards it became my duty to make myself
acquainted with African affairs, and I also seized this occasion
to enrich my knowledge and complete my notes.
And here I cannot refrain from putting on record my in-
debtedness, first and foremost, to my valued friend, Professor
Dr. Paulitschke, Private Lecturer at the Vienna University. It
is to his clear and comprehensive lectures, based upon concise
and intimate knowledge, as well as to the study of the litera-
ture recommended by him, that I owe an accurate and reliable
insight into the social and political relations prevailing in Africa.
In my opinion, a general survey of the African question
forms the only true basis for any further detailed knowledge.
1927143
IV
1 therefore cherish the hope thai this short compilation of the
chief points of interesl concerning the separate territories of Africa,
as 1 have endeavored to reproduce them in this work, will be
of some practical use at least to those who wish to obtain in-
formation speedily.
This work is intended as a vade mecv/m, which should
partly serve to give a general idea of,
1. Where the different civilised powers " of Europe have
taken a firm footing on African soil;
2. The historical part played by them in the course of
time concerning the different territories from which actual
or presumed rights may possibly be deduced;
3. How and by what treaties and agreements the Powers
concerned have decided upon their mutual frontiers and
spheres of power.
On the other hand, the method followed should serve to
render the work convenient for reference. The work may have
its deficiencies ; but the reader, desiring to collect further details
based upon more circumstantial accounts, will at least have
been set upon the right path.
In the time in which we live events develop themselves
with astonishing rapidity. Nowhere is this more the case than
in the far Orient, as well as in Africa; so much so that the
condition of things prevailing in these remote countries, which
not long ago played a comparatively unimportant role in Euro-
pean politics, is seen to be exerting an ever - increasing and
powerful influence upon the mutual relations of the European
powers.
That the African continent is portioned out amongst Euro-
pean nations is perfectly true, but the precise definition of
these territories, the process of acquisition and securing, the
establishment of title deed, not to mention a world of minor
question are matters by no means finally disposed of and are
destined to continue of eventful and paramount importance to
Africa as well as to Europe for some time to come.
Setting aside everything else, the proper significance of the
terms « Possessed*, « Occupied territory », «Protectorate», « Sphere
of interest », etc., may be said to be still undetermined in some
parts of Africa. We have therefore yet to look forward to much
technical and diplomatic work connected with boundary com-
missions, missions and the conclusion of treaties.
In my opinion there are still 12 distinct points which will
shortly have to be considered, viz.:
1. Egypt (Turkey, England, France, Italy, Abyssinia).
2. The Southern Frontier of Tripolis (France, Turkey or
Egypt).
3. Morocco, East and South (France, Spain).
4. Rio d'Oro (Morocco, France and Spain).
5. The Gold Coast Hinterland (France and Germany).
6. The Togo Hinterland (England, France and Germany).
7. The North- West of the British River Niger possessions.
(England, France and Germany).
8. North Ubangi (England, France and Turkey as well as
Egypt).
9. Barotseland (England and Portugal).
10. Manica Plain (England and Portugal).
11. North of British East-Africa (France, England und Turkey
as well as Egypt).
12. The Southern and Western Frontiers of French Somali-
land (France, Italy and Abyssinia).
In revising my notes before committing them to print, I
have had recourse to the best sources only, keeping the circum-
stance consistently in view that the lion's share of African
possessions falls necessarily to Great Britain, whose historical
data I have accepted to a large extent as authoritative and
final. These I have not failed to mention where they appeared
VI
to be of interest and importance. In making my compilation, I
have largely used such publications as «The Population of the
Earth* by Supan-Wagner; -Handbook to Andree's Handatlas, 2nd
Edition^; «The Statesman's Year-Book» by Scott Keltie; «The
Gotha Diplomatic and Statistical Annual* ; the White, Yellow,
Blue and Green Books; Annual Reports; The Diplomatic and
Consular Reports; Colonial Reports; Foreign-Oflice and Statistical
Gazette; Official Handbooks for South Africa; the various
«Annuaires»; Rapports Generaux; Colonial Reviews and Statistical
Works in all Languages; the numerous works of explorers; and
especially Petermann's Communications from Justus Perthes'
Geographical Institute in Gotha; the publications of the Geo-
graphical and Colonial Societies in London, Paris, Berlin and
Rome, the African daily papers, and others.
To my knowledge, there exists no short and summarized
work concerning the African question. Having felt the want of it
mvself, I sought for it in vain. I wish to give my private notes
to the public for what they are worth, hoping that they will
prove as useful to others as to myself.
I have again to express my thanks to Professor Dr. Paulitschke
for his careful revision of the work and for his supplementary
notes, as well as for his valuable assistance in designing the
General Political Map of Africa, which I trust will prove useful
in completing the information contained in the second Edition
of my book of reference.
Dresden, May, 1897. Ch. K.
INDEX.
Preface Ill to VI
Egypt 1
Madhi's Dominion 5
Tripolis 8
Tunis 10
Algiers 12
Morocco 15
Spanish Presidios, Rio d'Oro ; Canary Islands 18
Madeira, Azores, Cape Yerde Islands 19
Seneganibia 21
French Soudan 24
French Guinea, Ivory Coast 26
Portugese Guinea 28
British West African Possessions 29
British Gambia 30
Sierra Leone 30
Gold Coast 31
Lagos 33
Liberia 34
Togoland 35
Dahomey 36
Niger Coast Protectorate 38
Niger Territories 38
The Independent States of Central Soudan 41
Cameroon 43
Spanish possessions in Gulf of Guinea and on the Gaboon 45
Portugese possession in the Gulf of Guinea 46
French Congo 4 ^
The Congo State &
Portugese possession in Lower Guinea 54
Ascension, Tristan da Cunha, Walfish Bay 56
St. Helena 57
German South West Africa °7
VIII
Pago
I ilony 59
wanaland 63
British Zambesia 65
sh Central Africa 67
sh Central Africa protectorate, Nyassaland 09
Basntoland 70
N .I 70
Znlnland, rongaland 71
Republic 72
i African Republic 73
Port 5l Africa 70
Madagascar ami dependencies 78
Mauritius and dependencies 80
■ion and dependencies 81
The Comores Islands 81
Zanzibar 82
German Easi Africa 84
British East Africa 86
British Possession in Somaliland and Sokotra . 89
—ion in the (iulf of Aden 91
Italian possession in North East Africa 93
Abyssinia 97
graphical Register 101
Key.
atrodaction to tho chapters is by geographical marginal notes:
Official territorial titles of the respective countries.
Frontiers and circumference of same.
Surface in square metres or square miles.
Population (actual and relative).
I »i\ i~i.»n- together with districts). Classification of same.
Possession whether actual possession, protectorate or sphere of influence and
nt of same).
• . 7 History in chronological order.
- treaties and special diplomatic events (Ambassadorial journeys).
Proposed regulation of frontiers and results obtained.
No. i" Government, Administration, Varia.
thai the Byllable is long and accented.
— long unaccented ' a short and accented syllable.
Egypt,
Kemi, Misr, Aegypten, ftgypte, Egitto. Official title.
The Western Frontier is formed by the Bay of Solum on the Frontiers.
Mediterranean Sea, the South-East Frontier by Cape (Ras) Kasar, on
the Red Sea, 18° 2' North Latitude. The South Frontier is formed
by the points Merawi and Debbeh (18 n 30' North Latitude), to
which the Anglo-Egyptian Army has so far confined its line of ad-
vance since the conquest of Dongola in the summer of 1896. The
South-West Frontier, starting from the Bay of Solum, is regarded as
dividing the Libyan Desert in such a manner as to bring the centre
of the Snussija (Jarabiib Oasis) and also the Oases of Farafrah
and Dakhel under Egyptian rule. Owing to the present unsettled
state of affairs in the Soudan, the frontier towards the South-East,
in the Nubian Desert, is undefined.
The Egyptian Soudan embraced formerly the provinces of Nubia,
Sennaar, Taka, Kordofan, Dar Fur and the territories on the right
and left banks of the Nile, as far as the Equatorial Lakes, but
without definitely fixed boundaries (see page 5 "The Mahdi's
Dominion" and page 86 "Imperial British East Africa").
Superficial Area: 935,300 sq. km., to 1,300,000 sq. km. (1881, Area.
2,986,900 sq. km.); usually estimated at 994,300 sq. km.
Cultivated Land: 29,120 sq. km. English official statements
give the superficial area of Egypt to-day in round numbers as
400,000 square miles (1 square mile = 25898945 sq. km. ; 1 sq. km.
= 0-3861161 square mile) of which 12,976 miles were already
cultivated in the year 1896.
Count Kinaky: "The Diplomat] t'l Handbook for Africa".
From :ui official return made at the beginning of May, 1894, Egypt
(Suakim and the Soudan excluded) contained 7,739,000 inhabitants
(110,400 foreigners, including 8,000 British soldiers). The last
census, taken May 3rd, 1882, returned 6,400,000 inhabitants,
of whom 90,886 were foreigners, an average of about 7 persons to
the sq km. Including the inhabitants of the Soudan, the total population
was returned at not less than 16 millions.
Egypt is divided into 2 parts: (a) Misr-el-bahri, which is Lower
Egypt or the Delta; (/>) El Said, or Upper Egypt. These two parts em-
brace five governmental sub-divisions (Mohafzas): 1. Suez Canal (Suez,
Port Said, Ismailia), 2. Cairo, 3. Alexandria, 4. Rosetta and 5. Da-
mietta, and sixteen Provinces or Mudirieh. These are again subdivided
into districts (Markaz, Kism), which are formed out of Nahiehs or Com-
munities. The coast of the Red Sea, with Suakin, Kosseir, El Arish,
and the Sinai Peninsula, is included in the jurisdiction of the
Suez Canal.
The whole country is a tributary state of Turkey. For the
"Sphere of Interest" of Turkey, see page 8.
From 3892-525 B. C. an independent nation.
„ 525-333 B. C. subject to Persia.
„ 333-323 P>. C. subject to Greece (Alexander the Great).
„ 323-30 B. C. period of the Ptolemseans.
„ 30 B. C— 638 A. D. subject to Rome.
„ 638 A. I). — 1517 A. 1). .Mohammedan Dynasties.
1517 A. D. Egypt was conquered by the Turkish Sultan, Selim I,
and turned into a Turkish Pashalic.
The last Egyptian monarch, Mutawakkil, conferred upon Selim I.
the dignity of a Chalifa.
1798, July 1st, Napoleon Buonaparte entered and took posses-
sion of the country. May 1799, Upper Egypt, was conquered by
the French, who held Egypt till September 1801, when they evacuated
it, and the Turks again took possession.
From 1801 to 1811, Egypt was under the actual rule of about
500 Mamaluke princes.
1805, August 3rd, Mohammed Ali in Egypt.
1806, Mohammed Ali established as Governor, and in 1811 as
absolute ruler. 1819 and following years, Mohammed Ali conquers
Nubia and Sennaar (1820—1825) and Kordofan (1821).
By the Hattisherif of February 13th, 1841, Mohammed Ali ac-
quires hereditary succession.
1848, Investiture of Ibrahim Pasha, Mohammed Airs stepson.
1849, August 2nd, Death of Mohammed Ali, who had become
insane.
1849-1853, Abbas Pasha, Khedive.
1854—1863, Said Pasha, Khedive.
1863, January 2nd, Ismail Pasha ascends the Throne.
1866, By the Firman of May 27th, Ismail Pasha receives the
rank and title of Khidewi-Misr, i. e. "Viceroy of Egypt", and
the right of "direct descent from the father to the eldest son", in
consideration of a yearly tribute of 575,000 /. (Egyptian).
1869, November 16th: Opening of the Suez Canal.
1873, The Firman of June 8th, confers upon the Khedive the
right of coinage and of the issue of loans, the right to inde-
pendent administration of Justice, to conclude treaties with Foreign
Powers, and to form an army of 30,000 men. The tribute to be
raised to 669,175 /. (Egyptian).
1874, Conquest of Dar Fur by Siber Pasha.
1 <S 7 5 , The "Tribunaux inixtes" take the place of consular juris-
diction.
1875, Conquest of the Somali Coast and Harar.
1876, April, Introduction of the "Caisse dc la Dette Publique".
1879, June 26th, Ismail Pasha is deposed. (Died March, 12th 1895,
at Constantinople) and is succeeded by his son Taufyk.
1879, November 10th, Egypl b} Khedival Decree put under
the general control o\' France and England (rescinded by Khedival
Decree of January L8th, L883).
1881, February 1st. Rebellion under Colonel Ahmed Arabi Bey
in Cairo.
L881, Summer, The Mahdi's firsi appearance in the Soudan.
1882, May 20th, British and French Squadrons before
Alexandria.
L882, June 8th, A Turkish Special-Envoy sent to Egypt.
1882, duly 11th and 12th, Bombardment of Alexandria, before
the commencement of which the French withdraw.
1882, September 13th, Battle of Tel-el-Kebir : defeat of Arabi
Pasha.
1882, November 5th, Mr. Gladstone's declaration in the House
of Commons that English troops would remain in Egypt to maintain
order. Lord Dufferin had already been sent to Cairo, October 31st,
1882. (British Occupation.)
1883, January 18th, Khedival Decree regarding the nomination
of a British Financial adviser ("without whose concurrence no
financial decision can be taken").
1883, November 3rd, Hicks Pasha*s Army annihilated by the
Mahdi near Kashgil. El Obeid, the Capital of Kordofan, falls into
the hands of the Mahdists.
1884, June, The Mahdi's troops conquer Nubia as far as
Berber, after 1 laker Pasha's defeat by Osman Digna near El Teb
on February 4th, 1884.
1885, January 2(>th. Fallof Khartoum and death of General Gordon.
1885, May 26th, Evacuation of Harar. — December 24th,
Ghasi Mukhtar Pasha sent to Egypt,
1888, December 5th, Emm Pasha leaves the Equatorial Province
with II. M. Stanley.
1892, January 7th, Death of the Khedive Taufyk, who is
succeeded by his son Abbas 11 Hilini.
1894, April, Appointment of Nubar Pasha's Ministry,
1896, May, The expedition against the Mahdi begins with an
advance on and the conquest of Dongola, which is subsequently
divided into two Mudirieh.
Capital: Cairo, 576,400 inhabitants (1896). Varia.
The Mahdi's Dominion.
Known in Europe as the Egyptian Soudan, and in Egypt as Official title.
Beled-es-Sudan or Mahdijja.
The territory occupied by the followers of the Mahdi and his Frontier.
successors (Dervishes) embraces the former "Egyptian Soudan". It
stretches from Merawi on the Nile (18° 30' North Latitude) to about
10° North Latitude, where the British Sphere of Interest begins (see
under heading, "Imperial British East Africa"), and towards the
West almost to 23° East Longitude of Greenwich as far as the
East Side of the independent Sultanate of Wadai. In the East it
extends to the foot of the Abyssinian mountains, without any
clearly defined boundary marks.
The superficial area of the Mahdi's Dominion cannot be exactly Area,
defined ; it may be equal to that of the Egypt of to day, but cer-
tainly does not surpass it. The one million square miles given by
the British authorities as its extent should probably be reduced to
one half, as their figures would include the territories of the
Upper Nile, which now belong to the British Sphere of Interest.
The number of inhabitants in the Egyptian Soudan has Population.
Been formerly estimated — for instance in 1877 — at about
1.1,800,000 inhabitants. These figures have been confirmed by
I M\ i-ihii-
British authorities, but it is now generally acknowledged that three
fifths of the population have since perished under the rule of Ghalifa
Abdullahi. The Mahdi's Dominion therefore contains probably little
more than 8 l / 4 millions, viz: 1 million in Nubia, 4 millions in Dar
Fur, and 300,000 in Konloian. the rest being distributed over the
remaining territories.
Lower Nubia, Upper Nubia, with Senaar (Dschesirah) and Taka,
Kordofan, Takale and Dar Fur. Only a very small part of the Bahr
el-Ghasal, Dar Fertit and Dar Banda districts obey theChalifa, viz: on
the Bahr el-Arab, and on the right bank of the Nile towards Laclo.
The whole of this territory may be considered as actual posses-
sion ; although the district of Bahr el-Ghasal is virtually territory
invaded by the Dervishes.
The Sultan of Turkey still lawfully claims the territory as an
integral part of his dominion.
1881, First appearance of the Nubian, Muhammed Ahmed, from
Dongola as the Mahdi (the prophet promised by Mussulman Tradition
and prophesied by Mohammed to reform and restore the Mussulman
Faith to power after a lapse of 1300 years).
1882, In Sennaar the insurrection was subdued by Abd-el-
Kader, but Dshesirah soon afterwards fell into the hands of the Mahdi.
1883, (January), The Mahdi's followers storm El Obeid, the
( 'apital of Kordofan.
1883, November 3rd, Hicks Pasha defeated by the Mahdi near
Kashgil and his army annihilated.
1884, February, General Graham defeats Osman Digna at Teb
and Tamaneb. — 3rd of June. Treaty by which the Bogo territories
are ceded to Abyssinia.
L884, June, Death of the Mahdi and accession of the Chalifa
Abdullahi. who was to be succeeded by two other Chalifas nominated
by the Mahdi, after which the descendants of Abdullahi were to
have the right to the throne.
1885, January 26th, The Chalifa Abdullah! takes Khartoum,
the Capital of the Egyptian Soudan. The attempted relief of the
town by the British (Battles of Abu Klea and Gubat) fails, the
expedition arriving too late to save Gordon Pasha, who had been
killed in the street fight.
1885, December, Victory of the English and Egyptians at Kobe.
— June 30th, The Sultan of Turkey declares the Soudan to be
Turkish possession.
1888, December, General Greenfell's victory over Osman Digna
near Handub.
1891, February 18th, England reconquers Tokar.
1893, December 21st, General Baratieri's victory at Agordat.
1894, May, Anglo-Egyptian campaign against the Mahdi's
Dominion. Battle of El Teb. Conquest of Dongola.
1894, July 17th, The Italians take Kassala.
The Capital and Residence of the Chalifa is Omdurman on the
White Nile which contains about 40,000 inhabitants. Khartoum is
abandoned. The present ruler over the Mahdi's Dominion, Abdullahi
Chalifet es-Sadik, reigns as Chalifa or Lieutenant Governor of the
Mahdi, and therefore bears the title of Chalifa el-Mahdi.
Tripoli,
TarabtMs. (Ottoman title of the Vilajet) ; Tripoli. Official title.
The Western Frontier begins near Has Tadjer on the coast, 32 km frontiers.
East of the fort and of Cape El Bib an, and extends in a curve open
to the East, through the Erg towards Ghadames, and thence through
the district of the Tuareg Asgar or Asdscher towards Ederi, and
South-West to Ghat. The Oases Ghadames and Glc'it thus belong
to Tripoli and maintain Ottoman garrisons. The South Frontier
extends (including the Oasis Fezzan), from Ghat across the Oasis
Tegeri, excluding the Kufra Oases, when' no Turkish troops arc
yel garrisoned. The East Frontier extends West of the Kufra
group of Oases from the South Northwards to Jarabub, which
belongs to Egypt, and reaches the Mediterranean Sea at the Gulf
of Solum near Has el-kunais.
\i.a. Tin' superficial area of the country known as Tripoli is between
1. on:}. 000 sq. km. and! L,213,400 sq. km. (398,738 square miles
according to British estimates), of which the greater part is unculti-
vated, and belongs properly speaking to the Sahara and Lybian Deserts.
Population: 1,300.000 (according to estimates); giving one
person to the sq. km Of these «S00,000 live in Tripoli itself,
(100,000 in Fezzan, :i00,000 in Barka), and 500,000 in Benghasi.
The number of foreigners (Europeans) lias only been estimated in
the town of Tripoli; in 1896 they numbered 600 Italians, 20
Frenchmen, 20 Englishmen, 2 Germans, 1 Swiss, and numerous
Maltese.
The country is divided into two administrative districts, the Vilajet
Tripolis with the Tripolitan states (the western portion), the Oases
Ghadames, Ghat and Fezzan, together with Sella and Sokna and the
Mutissaferat Benghasi, to which the regions of Barka or Cyrenaika
and the Audshila and Dshalo Oases belong.
The whole state forms the actual and undisputed possession of
Turkey. The Western part of the Lybian Desert and the Eastern
part of the Sahara, with the Taiserbo, Buseima and Kebabo (Kufra)
( >ases. the districts Tibesti or Tu, Wanjanga, Borkn, Bodele, Ennedi,
the Kawar Oasis, the district Kanem and the Sultanate Wadai, to
which the larger part of the former Baghirmi country is
now tributary, are considered as a sort of international Sphere of
Interest of the Ottoman Empire. The southern part of Baghirmi
however is claimed by France as belonging to its Sphere of Interest
in North Ubangi. This Ottoman Sphere of Interest is bounded on
the West by the caravan route from Kuka (Bornu) to Murzuq (Fezzan),
on the South by Tsad-Lake, and about the 12° North Latitude,
on the East by the States belonging to the Mahdfs Empire, Dar
Fur, Kordofan, and West Nubia, as well as by Egypt. The whole of
the trade of this immense territory is chiefly directed towards Tripoli
and Benghasi, and only a very small part to Egypt and the dominion
of the Chalif of Omderman.
Phoenician and Carthaginian Government; a flourishing Greek History.
Government in Cyrenaika also. From 146 B. C. Roman govern-
ment, later that of Byzantium. In the 7th and 8th Centuries A. 1).
conquered by the Arabs. For a short time a dependency of Sicily
and Malta, then of Spain under Charles V.
1551, The Turks conquer the Land.
1714, Ahmed Caramanli Pasha makes Tripoli entirely indepen-
dent of the Porte, establishes the Dynasty of Caramanli, and con-
quers the Fezzan Oasis with the town Murzuq. From 1720, however,
a tribute is paid to Turkey.
1S25, The Sardinian ships "Oominercio", "Tritone", "Maria
Cristina", and "Nereide" bombard the town Tripoli under Captain
Sivori, as Jussuf Pasha, the last Caramanli, had demanded tribute
from Sardinia.
1835, Tripoli once more becomes an exclusivly Turkish possession,
the Turks abolishing native government.
The country is governed direct from (ni/^/an/ii/o/ih 1 . France has
repeatedly demanded that the towns Ghadames and Ghat, where
there are again Ottoman garrisons, should be yielded up to her. The
Porte lias not troubled to take any steps in the matter. — Italian
achievement: — Italian schools have existed in Tripoli since 1884.
They were reformed and enlarged in 1888 by Crispi. (1896:
Coun( Kinsky: "The Diplomat! t'a Handbook f"r Africa". *
10
Children's Institute: 120 children; Girl's school: 200 children; Scuola
tecnico commerciaJe : 35 pupils.)
There arc about ten important Italian commercial houses in
the country.
Capital: Tripoli, 30 to 35,000 inhabitants.
Tunis.
Tunisie (French), Tunisis, AfriMjja (Turkish).
The Western Frontier, beginning at Roux (Cape Roux) situated on
the sea-coast East of La Calle, runs in a Southerly direction towards
Tebessa, and crosses the Shott Ghars. From this point the boundary-
line in the Sahara is taken as running to the South of the Shott
el-dsherid in a South-Easterly direction, till it meets in the Sahara
the boundary-line which proceeds from Ghadames towards the North.
The East frontier reaches the sea-coast 32 km. East of El Biban
(Ras Tadjer). — Tunis thus embraces all the land inside this curve
as far as Cape Bon.
The superficial area comprises between 99,600 sq. km. and
118,000 sq. km at the outside. By British authorities 45,000 square
miles, by Italian 116,000 sq. km. and by French 129,318 sq. km.
are accepted as the Area.
Population. Number of inhabitants: 1,500,000, i. e. about 15 persons
to the sq.km. (446,400 Nomads; 45,000 Jews; 1896: 15,977 French.
Altogether 110,000 Europeans, of which 11,300 men form the army
of occupation).
There are 22 Qaidate, or governmental subdivisions. The South
is called Beled el-dsherid, viz: "Date-Land."
11
History.
Treaties.
French Protectorate since the 22nd April, 1882, under the Possession
rule of a Resident- Minister.
Phoenician, Carthaginian, Roman, Byzantine, Vandal and Arabian
Governments. Conquered by Charles V. National Dynasties.
1575 A. D. The Turks conquer the land.
1691 A. D. The present Dynasty of the Ben Ali Turki succeeds
to the government, which originates from Crete. The Bey's appoint-
ment as Regent is confirmed by the Sultan, whose vassal he continues
to the present day.
1875, Convention between England and Tunis.
1881, May. The French enter the country and conclude with
the Bey Sidi Muhammed es-Sadok the Treaty of Qasr es-Said on
May, 12th 1881, which sanctions their remaining in the land.
1882, April 22nd. Tunis placed under French Protectorate.
1883, June 8th. Treaty with France concerning the position of
Tunis with regard to international law.
1896, September 28th. Conclusion of three conventions with Italy.
1897, January 13th. Recognition by Spain of the present
relation of Tunis to France.
The French "Resident-Minister" governs exclusively, assisted by
two secretaries. The Royal Prerogative belongs to the Bey, who,
according to the Firman of the 25th October 1871, is a vassal of
the Porte, but free from tribute. A "Bureau des affaires Tuni-
siennes" is established in the French Foreign Office. Since 1884
French judges have presided at the Consular Court. The head
of the Christian Religion is the Archbishop of Algiers under the
title of "Primate of Carthaginia".
Capital: Tunis, 153,000 inhabitants.
Varia.
2*
12
Al
osiers.
(Mil. ial nil.
/.' Algirie
Front
Population.
Divisions.
ssion.
The frontier runs in the West from the mouth of the Muluja-
EUver across the Table-land of the Shotts into the Mediterranean,
cuts through the Shott el-Gharbi, and extends almost to the Tuat
Oasis. The South frontier is not exactly fixed, but runs parallel
with the 30° Latitude, as far as the vicinity of Ghadames, where
it joins the Tripolitan and later the Tunisian Frontiers.
The total superficial area is 477,913 sq. km., of which, however,
only 318,334 sq. km. come under the administration of France,
189,187 sq. km. belonging to the Sahara area. The nomads roving
about this vast tract number 50,000. The area of the French
Sahara is calculated as covering 2,600,000 sq. km., taking into
consideration the French Sphere of Interest towards the Soudan.
4.429,421 Inhabitants (1896), 8 persons to the sq. km. (Algiers:
1,400,000, Oram 900,000, Constantine: 1,700,000). There are
259,729 Frenchmen in the whole country, including the military
power, 44,000 Italians and 8,700,000 Mohammedans.
Algiers consists of 3 provinces: Algiers, Oran, and Constantine,
and of the Oases, Wargla and El-Golea.
The country is looked upon as an integral part of France and
in no sense as a colony. The method of government, therefore, is
totally different to that prevailing in the Colonies. — The country,
as far as 30° Latitude, is in the immediate and actual possession of
France. Above this point the military authorities, under the com-
mander of the 19th Army Corps, rule a narrow stretch of the Sahara
which has a roving population.
The recognised Sphere of Interest of France (Franco-British
Treaty of the 5th August 1890) South of Algiers and Tunis embraces
13
the whole Western Sahara between Morocco and Tripoli, together
with the Oases Gurara, Tuat (Insalah) and Tidikelt, as well as the
district between the caravan route of Fezzan on the Tsad Lake,
and about the 12° Longitude West of Greenwich on the one side,
and the land stretching from the Eastern frontier of the Spanish Protecto-
rate of Rio d'Oro to the Niger River, and along the course of the same,
as far as the Town Say, on the other. According to the treaty in
question between France and England of the 5th August, 1890, this
territory is further bordered towards the East by a line which runs
from the Town Say on the Niger in a northerly curve in the Sahara
to the Town Sinder, 15° North Latitude, and thence directly East over
Guro to the West shore of the Tshad Lake near to the 14° North
Latitude, so that the whole country of the Tuareg, Tuat, Tidikelt,
also the Damerghu Territory and the North -West border of the
Tshad Lake belong to the French Sphere of Interest. (1 million
square miles superficial area.)
Carthaginian, Numidian, Roman, Byzantine, and Vandal govern- History,
ment. Conquered by the Arabs in the 8th century. Arabian and
Moorish Sovereigns. Since 1492 A. D. Moorish pirate state; from
the second half of the 16th century under the nominal suzerainty
of Turkey, but in reality independent. The pirates were held in
check by Louis IX of France, Charles V, and Louis XIV.
1708, Spain finally withdrew the garrison which had been
maintained in Oran since 1492 A. D. At the head of the military
republic stood the Deys, proclaimed by the Janissary, the last of
whom, Hussein, surrendered to the French arms on the 5th July.
1830, and was held prisoner by the French at Alessandria in
Italy till his death.
L831 1842, February. War with Ah.l el-Kader.
1834, July 22nd. Royal ordinance, according to which the
conquered district is to he called "Possessions franchises dans le
nord de I'Afrique".
14
18 II. French war against Morocco, whither Abd el- Kader fled.
1847, December 24th Capture of Abd el-Kader.
1852 — 1858, Taking ofLaghuat. The Bent M'zab come under
French protection.
L853— 1854, The Oases of Tuggurl and Wadi Suf, as well as
Wargla captured.
L858- L860, Algiers placed under a Ministry "lor Algiers and
the Colonies."
1862, Treat \ of Ghadames with Tuareg.
L881, Revolt of Bu Amena.
1882, November 17th, Incorporation of the Beni M'zab district.
1896, December olst, Reorganisation of the administration.
The French Chamber has the sole right of legislature in Algiers.
— France protects the Moroccan Sherif of Wesan.
Capital : Algiers, 82,585 inhabitants.
Morocco.
Maghrib el aqsd (i. e. "Extreme West"), el Gharh (i. e. "the
West").
The Moroccan district begins on the coast of the Mediterranean
Sea by the mouth of the Muluja-River*), and extends to the South
as far as of Cape Juby (28° North Latitude). A commercial settlement
was founded on this important point as early as 1764, reestablished
in 1876 by the British North -West Africa Company, and having
been repeatedly destroyed, was purchased by Morocco in 1895.
The Spanish Protectorate of Rio d'Oro begins South of Cape Juby.
— ■ The East and South Frontiers are not yet defined ; their
*) Except the Spanish Presidios (see p. 17j and Ifni, near Cape Nun.
15
course in the Sahara, East of Cape Juby, is such that the Nomads
on the banks of the River Watlis, which discharges itself into the sea
between this Cape and Cape Nun, are subject to the Sultan. The
line then follows the upper course of the Wadi Draa towards the
North East, and in the East in the direction of the Tafilet Oasis,
which belongs to Morocco. Tuat with Ain Salah (Tnsalah) belongs al-
ready to the French Sphere of Interest. To the East of the Figig Oasis
the boundary-line inclines towards the mouth of the River Muluja.
The accounts of authorities concerning the area of the Sultan's
Kingdom are, to say the least, conflicting. Whereas formerly
800,000 sq. km. were the recognised figures — which would still be
correct if Tuat were included (a view apparently untenable) —
one may very well put down the area, Tuat and the parts of the
desert excluded, at 450,000 sq. km. (according to English estimates
219,000 square miles). Of these 439,240 sq. km. belong to the old
territory and about 10,000 sq. km. to the new possession in the
~ vicinity of Cape Juby (El Gada).
The estimated number of inhabitants in Morocco has varied Population.
since the land was first explored by Europeans between 2,500,000
and 9,400,000. The population is generally estimated at from 5
to 8 millions. 8 millions appear to be the most correct figures (about
18 persons to the sq. km.). Gerhard Rohlfs, however, gave in 1883
only 2,700,000 inhabitants. Taking the highest figures as correct,
according to English estimate, the population is divided as follows :
Fez 3,200,000, Morocco 3,900,000, Tafilet 800,000, Sus and Draa
territories 1,400,000. — There are about 1500 foreigners in the
country.
The Dominion embraces the Sultanates' of Fez ( Fas) and Morocco Division.
(Merakesh), formerly independent of each other, the Oases Tafilet,
Figig, Kenatsa, Tazzerult, Sidshilmessa, Rif, the Wadi Sus, Wadi
Draa and Cape Juby. The Empire is divided into 44 districts or
L6
Anml.it-. .-it tlif head of which are Pashas or Qadis. The Bedouins
have their own chief, who is appointed 1>\ the Sultan.
The whole district is considered the actual possession of the
Sultan, luit his wonl is seldom respected l»\ the Bedouins. There
is no Moroccan Sphere of Interest.
Histi Moorish-Carthaginian, Roman, Gothic, Vandal and Byzantine
government. Arabs conquered the Land in the 8th century A. 1).
Piratical state. Occasionally attacked by Spain and Portugal. Under
the descendant of Abbassides, Idris'ibn'Abdallah, Morocco was raised
to the importance of a large independent State (Dynasties: Edrisiden,
Fatimiden, Omajaden of Spain. Almoraviden, Almohaden, Beni Mcrini
of Figig, Assaniten of the Wadi Draa, and finally since 1699 A. D.
Fileliten [Aliden] of Tafilet). The Empire always remained inde-
pendent of the Porte.
1672 till 1727 A. D. War with Spain. — Foundation of the
Presidios (see page 17).
Till 1822, A. J). Great civil war and internal crises.
1844—1847. War with France and bombardment of Tangiers,
and Mogador (Battle of Dsholi). Morocco surrendered in 1847 the
North-East district to Abd el-Kader.
1845, French-Moroccan treaty concerning the East frontier of
the Empire.
1851, November 25th, Bombardment of Sal eh by French ships.
L856, French campaign under de Colomb and Count Wimpffen
against Morocco.
1859 — 1860, April, Renewed war with Spain and defeat of
the Moroccans at Tetuan.
1894. June 6th. Sultan Mulej Hassan dies; Mulej Abd el-Aziz
succeeds him.
1895, Morocco purchases the fort on Cape Juby.
17
The most important of the European ambassadorial journeys Diplomatic
to Morocco, from which the greatest number of commercial treaties
resulted, are :
1825, French Embassy under Caraman and Delaporte.
1829, British Embassy under Washington.
1830, Austrian Embassy under Pflttgl and Baron Augustin.
1830, French Embassy under de Chasteau and Roche.
1856, British Embassy under Drummond Hay.
1863, Spanish Embassy under Don Merry and Colom.
1875, Italian Embassy under Edmondo de Amicis.
1877, German Embassy under Weber and Zembsch.
1882, Italian Embassy under Cremas.
1896, British Embassy under Sir Arthur Nicolson.
The Sultan rules as Emir el-mumenin (i. e. : "Master of the varia.
Faithful"), but in the North-East of the Country the authority of the
Sherif is also recognised. The latter is under French protection and
resident in Wesan, but only exercises a religious jurisdiction.
The postal service is managed by Spain and France.
Capital of Morocco (Merakesh) is Fas (Fez), 140,000 inhabitants.
The foreign representatives and consuls reside in Tangiers; 30,000
inhabitants.
Spanish Presidios, Rio d'Oro, Canaries,
(a) P r e s i d i o s.
Since the Moroccan wars and particularly those of the 16th
century, Spain has had the right to maintain garrisons (Presidios)
on the North Coast of Morocco. The necessity of maintaining them
id to the acquisition of small territories around the points of Ceuta,
Count Kinsky: "The Diplomatist's Handbook for Africa". . - 3
IS
1/ \Ula } Vdu </< la Gomera (Penon de Vole/) and Alhucemas.
They were strongly fortified and received the official name of "os
presidios". The group of small Ohafarimas Islands also belong to
the "Presidios", which comprise in all a superficial area of 35 sq. km.
The population in 1887 n\;i^ 5,280; according to other accounts
16,000. The garrison consists of infantry regiments at Ceuta and
Melilla; at Ceuta there is also a body of 50 marines and a vo-
lunteer force 100 strong. Ceuta, belonging to Cadiz, had in 1887
1<».744 inhabitants, Melilla 3,538, Penon 447, Alhucemas 366, the
Ohafarimas 7<».'5.
In accordance with the treaty of Wad lias of 1860 the Sultan
of Morocco recognises the right of Spain to the possession of the small
territory of Santa Cruz <!<■ Mar Pequena, also called Ifni (70 sq. kin.,
6000 inhabitants), South of Mogador on the mouth of the Ifni River.
It was surrendered in due form in October 1883. Spain has hitherto
enjoyed no advantage from this Possession, but holds it temporarily.
(b) " Subgobernorado" of Bio d'Oro.
Dating back to the period of the great Portuguese voyage of
discovery is an old fortress, 23° 36' 18" North Latitude. During the
time of the Spanish government over Portugal it fell into the
hands of Spain, but in course of time it was almost abandoned. It
bears the name Rio d'Oro (Gold River), in consequence of the custom of
the Portuguese discoverers of bartering for gold here with the Sahara
caravans coming from the Niger territories. Starting from this point,
Spain was gradually able to form a Protectorate out of the whole
stretch of coast in the North above (-ape P>ojador, as far as Cape
Juby, and in the South as far as Cape Blanco (Bahia del Oeste).
The Bank of Arguin, however, was not included in this territory.
The attempt of a German company in 1886 to erect a factory
on the Rio d'Oro called forth a protest from Spain and an
assertion of her rights, followed, on the 6th April, 1887, by a
19
decree of the Spanish government, in which the district between
Cape Blanco and Cape Bojador was declared to be Spanish territory.
It was placed under the General-Captaincy of the Canary Islands
as a "subgobernorado". (Governor, a "Subgobernador Politico-Militar".)
The Uled Embarek were placed under French protection on the
14th May, 1887. In April, 1895, the Moorish tribes of Ulad Dim,
Gerger and Arassin stormed the Spanish fort. Captain M. E. Boretti
had already explored the neighboring district, in consequence
of a proclamation of Alfonso XII of December 26th 1884, placing
this part of Africa under permanent Spanish rule. The "Sociedad
Espanola de Africanistas y Colonistas" was thus able to obtain
540 km. of sea-coast. In 1886 it regulated the Southern frontier
with France, A military garrison was established and the settle-
ment, organised upon the plan prevailing in the Spanish colonies,
was placed under the colonial ministry. In 1895, the tribes of the
neighbouring Oasis territory and the Sahara of Adrar surrendered to
the Spanisli government. They solicited Spanish protection, and
promised to respect the safety of Europeans. The disputed
district of Adrar, or at least its Northern part, can therefore be
rightly considered as under Spanish protection. No diplomatic
settlement of the Adrar question has as yet taken place. Since Panet's
journey in 1850, the French have also laid claim to Adrar.
Area (700,000 sq. km.) 243,000 square miles ; 100,000 inhabi-
tants (according to other sources 500,000). Chief Station, Rio d'Oro.
(c) The Canary Islands (Islas Canarias).
From an administrative point of view, the Canary Islands are
considered as a part of I he mother country, Spain. 7,378 sq. km.
291,625 inhabitants, 40 to 1 th sq. km. In 1478 they were taken
possession of by Spain, whose rights have never been disputed.
Capital, Santa Cruz de Tenerife. 20,000 inhabitants.
3*
.1 titli-
20
Madeira, the Azores and Cape Verde
Islands.
The Islands of Madeira, the "richly wooded", and the Azores
(Unas At.mvs or "the Hawk Islands") are treated politically and ad-
ministratively as an integral part of the mother country, Portugal.
Tfo Islands of Madeira comprise 815 sq. km. (134,000 inhabitants,
162 to 1 the sq. km.), and the Azores 2.388 sq. km., (269.401 inhabi-
tants. 1 13 to 1 the sq. km.). The Portuguese took possession of Madeir
in 1410. but did not colonise the islands until 1421. In the group
are included Madeira, the JDesertas, and Porto Santo. Capital:
Funchal, 20.000 inhabitants. The capital of the Azores, which were
discovered and inhabited about the middle of the 15th century, is
Ponta Belgada on the island Sao Miguel, with 18,000 inhabitants.
The Tlhas do Cdbo Verde, discovered, 1455 — 1462, by the
Portuguese Antonio da Noli, 3581 sq. km. with 110,930 inhabitants (20
to tin- sq. km.), are divided into an Easterly and Westerly group.
Unhealthy climate. Undisputed possession of Portugal since the earliest
times. The largest island is Sao Thiago with 1239 sq. km. and
53,000 inhabitants, on which is the capital, Cidade de Praya, where
the governor resides.
Seneoambia.
/. Senegal et dependances, Senegamltie.
France claims the whole of North West Africa to the South
of the Spanish Protectorate of Rio d'Oro and the Great Desert,
also of the Senegal and Niger rivers, with the exception of the
21
British possessions of Gambia, Sierra Leone, the Gold Coast, Portu-
guese Guinea and the Liberian Republic, 4,000,000 sq. km. By the
Treaty of the 5th August, 1890, England recognises the following
frontiers of the territories under French influence in the North,
South, East, and South East, viz., Algiers, Tunis (N), a line from
Say on the Niger to Baruwa on the Tsad Lake (see Algiers)
on the one side, and on the other a line as far South as the Upper
Volta in the North of Ashanti, whence it passes to the mouth
of the Assinie. The colony on the Senegal embraces only the North
West part of this vast territory as the direct Possession of the
French Republic. It lies to the South, i. e., on the left bank of
the river. The official frontier between the Senegal Colony and the
French Soudan forms a line from Kayes to Bumtu on the Faleme,
passing along the bed of this stream as far as the frontier of Futa
Dshallon, and then along the Diankolo River, which is looked upon
as a continuation of the Faleme. On the coast, the territory
extends from the mouth of the Senegal to that of the Salum, 13°
and 21° 40' North Latitude, a distance of 1200 km. ; and from the
right bank of the Senegal to Arguin Bank near Cape Blanco. In
the East the Colony extends from the valley of the Senegal to the
Niger, i. e., as far as Segii Sikoro and Sansandig. It is scarcely
possible to trace out an exact line of frontier for the Senegal Colony,
owing to the circumstance that immediately adjoining the Senegal
Colonial territory of the French Soudan (Soudan francais p. 23) and
the possessions on the Ivory Coast (Rivieres <Ju Suit), (which embrace
a great number of French protectorate districts,) the French stations
in the Senegal valley in the direction of Matam are each surrounded
by an area not strictly defined, but passing as the direct and actual
possession of the Republic. The natives, moreover, would not
be likely to respect it, as the frontier line is subject to frequent
changes.
The Senegal Colony embraces the communities of St. Louis,
Dakar, Rufisquc, the Island Goree, the Arguin, Bank and Island
Divisions.
no
the provinces N'Diandor, Gangomm6, Pankoy, in the Cayor district,
the territories M'Pall, Khatete, and the station Batete.
The Senegal Colony, including that of the Rivieres du Sud, is
>aid to comprise L4,700 square miles and 174,000 to 200,000 inha-
bitants, of which L35,000 belong to Senegal alone. French West
Africa lias in all a total superficial area of 1,400,000 sq. km.
Reckoning also the numerous small West-African States, wliicli
stretch from the Senegal River over Fnta Dshallon (Guine'e Fran-
chise down to the Ivory Coast, and either form an integral part of
the French Protectorate or are considered as such, the figures would
be 54,000 square miles superficial area and 1,700.000 inhabitants
(1897) for the whole territory. It should be here stated that some
authorities return the number of inhabitants of the Senegal Colony
and the French Soudan in round numbers as 5 Millions.
The River Senegal and the districts at its mouth are supposed
to have been discovered by the French Normans, after they had
been already visited by the Carthaginians. The Portuguese appeared
there in 1556, the first European settlement being formed in 1664.
1664 — 1758, Establishment of French commercial houses on
the Senegal.
1758 — 1793, England annexes and occupies the Senegal Coast.
1763. The Senegal territory temporarily ceded, to England at
the Peace of Paris : formally restored 20 years later.
L793 and following years, state of anarchy. Disputes about
possession. Wars with the natives.
L817, France again definitely obtains the Senegal territory
and remains henceforth in undisputed possession.
1854. Faidherbe's appearance on the Senegal. War with the
Trarzas and Hadsch Omar. The first French advance to Futa Dschallon.
1860—1863, War with Cayor. Battle of Ngolgol, 30th Dec. 1863.
1*72 and following years. Galleni's, Archinard's, Combes', and
Monteil's campaigns against the Dominions of Samory.
23
1882, June 28th, Frontier treaty with England. 14th Sept.
Protectorate over Bafing.
1882 — 1891, Fifteen Treaties for the cession of territories con-
cluded with native princes.
1895, June 16th, Creation of the "Gouvernement general de
FAfrique occidentale".
Residence of the Governor-General, St. Louis, 20,000 inhabitants. varia.
French Soudan.
Le Soudan Frangais. Official title
Officially, this title comprises all the territories of the interior Frontiers.
of West Africa which lie on the Upper Senegal and on the Upper
and Middle Niger. Towards the North, the territory crosses into
the great French Sphere of Interest of the West Sahara; in the
West it borders on the Senegal Colony and the Guinee Franchise,
Sierra Leone, Liberia, and the Colony of the Rivieres du Sud. The
East frontier is not exactly determined, but joins the boundary line
of the French Sphere of Interest (from Say on the Niger to the
Upper Volta and the mouth of the Assinie). From 4 n West Latitude
of Greenwich, as far as the Western frontier of Sokoto, England,
France, and Germany are each striving to augment their influence
among the negroes, and protectorate or commercial treaties are being
frequently concluded with native princes. Since the occupation of
Timbuctoo by the French, the course of the Niger is no longer
the North frontier of the French Soudan, which extends beyond the
river into the Turag districts of the South Sahara. In this immense
sphere of power a distinction is made officially between: 1. occwpied;
2. annexed; and 3. protected territories. For the official frontier
between the French Soudan and the Senegal Colony, see page 21.
( Iwing to the constant changes in area of the occupied territories, Area.
Population.
it is difficult to give any reliable figures. The annexed territories, Di vision8 .
24
aioi mostly situated on the Upper Senegal (Kaarta, Bachunu, the Country
of the Died Embarek, Bambuk, Fuladugu, Beledugu, Bambara, Bondu,
FutaToro, FutaDshallon, Timbuctoo) are held to contain 54,000 square
miles ami 360,000 inhabitants; the protected territories (Massina,
Segti, Samory's and Tieba's Country, Jatenga, Aribinda, Kong)
230,000 square miles and 3 million inhabitants (5 millions, including
the Senegal Colony). Continual fighting takes place between the
French troops and the natives, particularly with the Turaeg negroes
in the North and the Madinka negroes in the South, whenever
France attempts fresh occupation. The territories in dispute between
France, Germany and England are in particular Gurma and Mossi
(Muschi). It is not yet determined how far the power of the Sultan
Sokoto extends in the West. The petty princes declare it does
not reach so far as this district; consequently the conditions of the
Anglo-French treaty of the 5th August 1890 are not applicable
to this part of Africa. To determine the sphere of power of Sokoto
is a problem which will require some time before it is practically
and satisfactorily solved.
1796, July 20th, Mungo Park arrives on the Niger.
L827— 1828, Rene Caillie's journey through the West Soudan
and to Timbuctoo.
1865, First French military campaign to the Soudan.
1878 and following years, Gallieni's and Archinard's military
expeditions to the Soudan.
1880, Gallieni's protectorate treaty with Ahmadu, which was
not carried into effect.
1881, July 14th, Futa Dshallon under French rule.
L883 — 1885, Campaigns against Samory.
L887, March 23rd, Samory under French protection. — April
22nd Segii, Nioro, Kaarta ditto.
L889, Captain Binger's advance on Kong.
1 890, Incorporation of the territory between Bassam and Liberia.
25
1894, Taking of Timbuctoo by the French.
1895, June, 16th, Creation of the "Gouvernement general de
l'Afrique occidentale".
1896, Hourst navigates the Niger. — The French occupy
Wagadugu, the Capital of Mossi.
The French Soudan is ruled by a military governor, who has
his residence at Kaijes, but who is subordinate to the governor-
general of the Senegal Colony.
French Guinea and the Ivory Coast.
Gulnee Francaise; Rivieres du Sud, Cote d'ivoire. Official title.
French Guinea, which was separated from the Senegal Colony
Divisions.
on the 1st January 1890, includes the districts on the Casamanza
(Casamence 11" — 9° North Latitude) together with the neighbouring
Archipelago, with the exception of Los Islands, which are English ;
further, the coast territory from the mouth of the River Nunez to
the mouth of the Scarries, together with the Interior, Futa Dshallon,
bordering on the French Soudan, the frontiers of which are not
yet determined. (Treaty with En gland 28th June 1882). For
administrative purposes, the French Possessions on the Ivory Coast
were included in this territory down to 1896, as also those on the
Gold Coast, beginning on the coast at Cape Palmas at the mouth
of the St. Pietro Paver, and extending as far as the mouth of the
Assinie River (Grand Bassam, Grand Lahou, Jackville), including the
Interior with undefined frontiers. (Treaty with England 10th August
1894.) This territory is called Rivieres du Sud (formerly Bas de Cote).
The district on the Casamanza contains 15,000 sq. km. ; (Guiii.c
Population.
Francaise, 150,000 sq. km.), with 103,000 inhabitants (Guinee
Francaise, 500,000 [200 Europeans]). The Rivieres du Sud include
about 25,000 square miles with a fluctuating population of about
Count Kinsley: "The Diplomatist's Handbook for Africa". *
26
--lull
Histor)
ntier.
Regulations.
200,000. Of course, only the inhabited stretch of coast is here
taken into account, as the area and population of the Interior
bordering od the French Soudan (Kong and Beledugu) do not appear
to be determined.
The whole country on the Casamanza is the immediate possession
of France. The governor of French Guinea also exorcises authority
over luta Dshallon. Outside the coast territories of the Rivieres
dii Sud. i. e., in the Interior the protectorate of France is con-
stantly extending.
Since the middle of the 15th century, the Portuguese have traded
towards the Casamanza, where the British have several times tried to
obtain a firm footing, but without success.
1828, France occupies the Island Djogue at the mouth of the
( asamanza.
1836—1837, The French occupy the islands Carahane and
Guimbering at the mouths of the Casamanza and Cacheo, and found
the station Sedhiu on the main-land.
1868, February 4th, Treaty with Beriby and Basha (ratified
20th December 1883).
1883, December 16th, A French resident appears at Assinie,
although the French troops had been withdrawn from the garrison
in 1870, since which time the coast was guarded by the employes
of the firm Verdier et de la Rochelle. The French, however, always
retained protectorate rights.
1884, Bouet Willaumez's treaty with the chiefs of the Ivory
coast of Assinie, Grand Bassam, and Dabii.
1885, December 24th, Convention between France, Portugal and
Germany, by which the territories of Kaba and Kabitai, which
Germany had occupied between Compony and Mellacoree, were
restored to France.
1886, May 12th, Convention between Portugal and France
(ratified 31st August 1887} which fixed the present frontiers of the
27
territories on the Casamanza, and by which France ceded the terri-
tories of the Rio Cassini and Ziquincior to Portugal.
1889, August 10th, Frontier Regulation with England. Sepa-
ration of the colony from the Senegal.
1891, France occupies the last unoccupied stretch of coast
South of the Liberian frontier.
1893, March 10th, Organisation of the colonies : (1) La Guinee
franchise; (2) Cote d'ivoire; (3) Dahomey.
1895, January 21st, Convention between France and England
relating the frontier line. — 15th June. Constitution of the
"Gouvernement general de l'Afrique oeeidentale".
1896, March 16th. Organisation of a judicial autonomy for
French Guinea.
The governor of ''Guinee franchise" has his residence at Conakry
on Tombo Island ; the governor of the Ivory Coast at Grand Bassam.
Portuguese Guinea or Portuguese
Senecmmbia.
Varia.
Official title.
Guinea Vortuguesa, Senegambia Portugueza.
This embraces the territory between the basin of the Casamanza ^
and that of the Cassini. The North frontier forms the watershed
between the Casamanza and the Cacheo, the South frontier a line
from the Channel between Catak Island, at the mouth of the
( . sini, and the mainland, and from Tristao, at the mouth of the
Compony, running thence to the middle of the course of the Cassini,
and finally crossing this river as well as the Rio Grande, to the west of
the junction of the Combia. The two frontier lines meet at the
Geba Springs (Treaty with France 12th May 1880).
4*
28
Population.
--lull.
Ill-
mtier.
lation:
The district also embraces the Bissagos Archipelago, 30 islands,
the largest of w liit-li is Orango.
The superficial area is from 37,000, to 42,000 sq. km.; but
only about 72 sq. km. arc occupied. Scattered settlements cover
a surface of 10,000 sq. km.
The population is estimated on the undetermined colonised area.
The figures therefore differ, varying as they do between 150,000
and 800,000 (the latter from English sources, 1885).
In theory, direct possession; in reality not to be distinguished
from a protectorate.
Portugal settled here in the middle of the 15th century.
L692. Andre Brue landed 275 British colonists here; the
greater number succumbed to the climate, whereupon England withdrew
all claim to possession.
1870. Decision of the President of the U. S. A., as arbiter,
in favour of Portugal.
1885. May 15th. Regulation of the present Northern frontier
on the basis of a Treaty with France, which however was not ratified
until August 1887.
.Residence of the governor, Boldma (Bulam).
British Possessions in West -Africa.
Wesi-Afriraii Colonies (formerly West- African Settlements).
The British possession in West-Africa consists of 4 crown
colonies: Gambia, Sierra Leone, Gold Coast, and Lagos.
29
(a) G a m b i a.
The Gambia Colony embraces the territory at the mouth of
the Gambia River., viz., the island Santa Maria, 13° 28' North
Latitude, with Combo and Punta Barra on the right bank of the
river, and the Bank d'Albreda, San Giacamo, Elephant and Mac
Carthy Islands with the corresponding river banks. The present frontiers
were agreed upon between the French and British Governments by
the Treaty of the 10th August (2nd and 19th Nov.) 1889. Accor-
dingly, Georgetown on the Gambia forms the most easterly point of the
British territory. The superficial area amounts to about 7000 sq. km.
(2700 square miles), the inhabitants to 50,000. The so-called "settle-
ment proper" contains only 69 square miles with 14,978 inhabitants
(1894); the remainder is a Sphere of Interest. Since 1821 the
British have been in undisputed possession of the colony. Previously
however, the Portuguese, French, Dutch and Spanish were in posses-
sion. Gambia was separated from Sierra Leone for administrative
purposes on the 1st December 1888.
Capital: St. Mary of Bathurst, 6000 inhabitants.
(b) Sierra Leone.
This colony extends 180 English miles along the coast from the
Scaries River in the North to the Liberian frontier in the South, em-
braces the island Sherbro and Cape Mount, has about 39,000 sq.km.
or 15,000 square miles and 180,000 inhabitants, including about
300 whites. The North frontier was defined in detail by a Treaty
l>rt ween France and England of the 28th June, 1882 (adopted by the
French Chamber 1894) and the Southern frontier on the basis of
one between England and Liberia of the 11th January, 1887. By a
Treaty of 21st January, 1805, only the Northern frontier alone was
revised by an Anglo-French Frontier Regulation Commission; but
the details of it have not yet been recognised by the powers. The cause of
30
this revision was a still valid treaty with France, giving the latter
the right to annex territories on the Upper Niger.
The territory was first visited by the Carthaginians. They
were followed by French mariners from Dieppe in the 15th century,
who settled here, after which the Portuguese took possession. In 1787
it was ceded to England hy native chiefs. In 1800 to 1808, a British
trading company occupied the territory, and eight years later trans-
toned their rights to the British Government. 1861, the Island
Sherbro was sold to England by the native chiefs; 1883, consi-
derably extended. Sierra Leone contains 4000 square miles and
(1891) 74,835 inhabitants, including 224 whites. Separated from
Gambia for administrative purposes on 1st December 1888.
Capital: Freetown. 30,033 inhabitants.
(e) Gold Coast.
The British Colonies on the Gold Coast, Appolonia, Vassao,
Krikor, Denkera, Sefui, Akim, Croboe, Crepi, Akwama, Cape Coast
Castle. Elmina, Axim, Accra, Adda, Winnebac, Quitta, Dixcove,
Secomdi, Anamaboe, embrace 350 miles of coast on the Gulf of Guinea
between 5° West and 2° East Longitude from Greenwich together
with the Interior, the limits of which have not yet been determined.
An agreement was come to with France concerning the course of
the Western frontier as far as 10° North Latitude in July 1893, and
with Germany and England on the 1st July 1890 with reference to
the Eastern frontier, which from the 7° North Latitude and beyond is
not yet determined. The Northern frontier in no way defines the limits
of the Soudanese districts of Mossi and Gurma, as the upper course
of the Volta is not yet exactly known, while Great Britain is engaged
in extending her sphere of interest by the conclusion of protectorate
and commercial treaties. In 1896 the King of Ashanti placed himself
under British protection.
31
The area of the territory claimed by Great Britain is given
as 120,000 sq. km., the population (1891) 1,473,882 (150 whites).
15,000 square miles form direct possession, the frontiers of this terri-
tory being constantly extended. 46,600 square miles (1895) belong
to the protectorate.
It is alleged that mariners from Dieppe landed on the Gold
Coast as early as 1365. 1610, the Portuguese took possession and
inhabited the territory. 1616, the Dutch ceded to England, by the
treaty of Breda, the land which had been gradually gained, and two
private trading companies undertook the opening up of this rich
district, in order to surrender it in 1821 to the British government,
which for administrative purposes incorporated it to Sierra Leone.
1824, commencement of the war with the barbarian state of the
Ashantis, in which the Fantis were England's allies. 1837, Dutch
Embassy sent to the Court of Ashanti. 1850, England buys the
fortresses of Accra and Quitta from Denmark for 250,000 francs.
1867 and 1871, Holland sells the remainder of its possessions on
the Gold Coast (tracts on the Sweet River) to England. 1873,
England's war with Ashanti ; battles of Essaman, Iskobio, Amaoful,
Becquah, Ordashu and Coomassi. 1874, February 4th, Taking and
burning of Coomassi. 1895 — 1896, Third military expedition against
Ashanti and submission of king Prempeh, who places himself under
English protection. Since 15th of Jan., 1886, independent government.
Capital : Accra, 16,267 inhabitants.
(d) L a g o s.
The island and town of Lagos on the Slave Coast from Badagry
to Lekke are the actual possession of England. The British Protecto-
rate extends between the 2° and 6° East Longitude of Greenwich
(Treaty with France, 20th Aug. 1889) "for some distance inland", a
definition which distinctly shows the undetermined nature of the
frontiers. In consequence of the war against Yoruba (with Abeokutta,
32
Jbadan and Ogbomotsho) in 1893—1894, and the Jebu, the British
protectorate was also extended over this thickly-populated dominion.
The British also claim Borgu for the protectorate.
According to surveys, the island and the protectorate contain
L071 square miles or 2770 sq. km.; with 100,000 inhabitants.
VToruba included, the British territory embraces 20,070 square miles
or 51,800 sq. km. and ,'> million inhabitants (150 whites).
Lagos was an ancient slave market. 1852, England concluded
a treaty with King Dotschemo, resulting in the abolition of the
slave trade, and the establishment of the British Protectorate.
1862, March 3rd, Annexation of Lagos, and connection of the
colonies for administrative purposes with Sierra Leone.
KS74, July 24th, Lagos placed under the Governor of the
Gold Coast.
1883, Extension of the Colony.
1886, January 15th, Independent government.
1802 — 1895, Campaigns against the Egba and Jebu.
Capital: Lagos (the African Liverpool) 60,000 inhabitants.
Liberia.
Official title. United States of Liberia.
The territory of the Republic extends along the Atlantic coast
from Cape Mount, near Robert's-Port, to the mouth of the St. Pietro
(630 km.). The frontier towards Sierra Leone was separately defined
in a Treaty with England 24th Dec. 1885 and 11th Nov. 1887;
and that bordering on French territory in a Treaty with France,
8 Dec 1892 and August 1894. It stretches into the Mandinka
33
Divisions.
Possession.
History.
Countries almost as far as Musardu, and is therefore, on the average
more than 300 km. distant from the sea.
The superficial area amounts to 85,350 sq. km. or 14,360 square Area,
miles.
Population, 1,068,000; (according to earlier estimates, 760,000 Population
to 2 millions), of which 18,000 are Americo-Liberians.
The territory comprises four states viz : Mesurado, Grand Bassa,
Sinu and Maryland. A Sphere of Interest or Protectorate does not exist.
1815, Arrival in Sierra Leone of the first emancipated negroes
from Massachussetts.
1820, Founding of the American Colonisation Society for the
settlement of emancipated negroes from America, which formed the
first colony in Liberia.
1822, The whole colony declares itself an independent and
free republic. Government formed in 1847.
1857, Union of the Maryland territory with the Republic. This
territory was founded by Tlie Maryland Colonisation Society in 1834.
Lately, the American negroes have flocked back to Africa in large
numbers, for the purpose of the repatriation of the negro race, a move-
ment which is being zealously advocated in the U. S. A.
Capital, Monrovia (5000 Inhabitants in 1891): the seat of the, Varia.
Government, which is based on that of the U. S. A.
Togoland.
.Protectorate of the German Empire (Schutzgebiete des Deutschen Official title.
Reiches) : Toyota nil.
This part of the Slave Coast is bounded on the West (1° 14' Frontiers.
Longitude East of Greenwich) by the British Gold Coast Colony,
on the East (1° 41/ Longitude East of Greenwich) by French
Dahomey. In the North and North West, the frontiers are not yet
defined, but the North-West frontier is held to extend from Lome
Count Kinsky, "The Diplomatist's Handbook for Africa". J
34
to the Todshte and Volta, the course of which it follows. Germany's
intention is to advance as far as the Niger. Length of coast, 52 km.
About 76,000 sq. km., 19,660 square miles, according to English
estimates. As far as the 9° North Latitude, only 60,000 sq. km.
About 2 Million^. ( )nl\ 800, 000, according to English figures.
89 Europeans, of which 81 (1897) are Germans.
Togo proper, North of the Avon Lagoon, forms the heart of
the land inhabited b.\ the Ewe tribes; to this must be added
Little Pop", ceded 1>\ France to Germany with the Interior (Adeli
districts), in December 1885. The most important stations in the
[nterior are Bismarckburg and Misahohe.
Actual possession on the coast: Protectorate in the Interior.
Discovered in the 16th century. — 1682, the Great Elector
established colonies at Aneho (Gross Friedrichsburg), which however
were broken up in 1718, having proved a commercial failure.
1720. The Dutch took the fortress Gross Friedrichsburg.
1884, July 15th, The country on the coast placed under German
protection by the German Consul-General, Dr. Gustav Nachtigal,
by desire of certain commercial houses in Bremen and Hamburg.
Protectorate treaty with the King of Togo.
1885, Dec. 24th. France cedes Little Popo to Germany in accor-
dance with Treaty.
1888, Treaty of neutrality relating Salaga. Germany's priority
recognised.
1894, Fergusson tries to acquire Salaga for England.
1894—1895. Expeditions, Gruner, Doring, Carnap. Treaties with
(.norma, Mangol, Dagomba, Tshantyoan, Gando.
1896, September 1st, The French occupy Wagadugu.
ls ( .)7. May 24th — July 26th, Conference between France and
Germany relating to the hinterland of Togo.
The East (Treaty of 1888, unpublished) and the North frontiers
were regulated by the Anglo-German Treaty of Oct. 20th (1st Nov.)
1*86, and the West frontier by the Franco-German treaty of the
35
1st July, 1890. (Lome, Todshie River — Volta River). The territory
is under the control of an Imperial Governor- General. Seat of
government, Sebbe; siuce 1897 Lome (2084 inhabitants, 31 Europeans).
Dahomey,
Dahomey — Pays de protectorat de Dahomey et dependances. Official title.
According to the Anglo-French treaty of the 10th August 1889, Frontiers.
German Togoland (l°4l y Longitude East of Greenwich) forms the
West frontier, and Jorubaland (course of the Addo) the East
frontier. The North frontier is by no means defined. It lies probably
between 6° 14' 15" and 6° 23' 51" N. Lat.
Area.
The superfieial area cannot be given in exact figures. According
to English estimates there are about 4000 square miles. The
French calculation gives (1897): 40,000 sq. km. without new
territorial acquirements.
The population, according to English authorities, is 730,000, viz., Population.
Dahomey 150,000, Grand Popo 100,000, Mains and Ajada 150,000,
Porto Novo 150,000, Abeokutta 120,000, Ogbomotsho 60,000.
About 1 Million, however, would be nearer the mark. According
to the French: "300,000 habitants pacifies aujourd'hui (1897)."
The French colonies on the Gold Coast, called Benin, consisted Divisions
Possession.
of Grand Popo, Ague, and Porto Novo (Agiuda, also Ajuda or
(.Irhuc), also called after the capital, Whydah or Weyda (Uida).
Since the 15th Jan. 1894, two French vassal kingdoms took the
place of the old barbarian dominion of Dahomey, viz., Abome in the
North and Alhuhi in the South. Each had its own king, who was
virtually a vassal of France. Their successors must receive the
5*
36
sanction of the French, who have abolished the former human
sacrifices, A French resident minister lives in Abome. France lias
introduced free trade, and lias the right to build railways and
telegraphs in both kingdoms and to establish schools.
ii,.,. ( } ra nd Popo mid Ague were from the earliest times the coast asylum
I ilioii-
for the refugees from Dahomey. 1871, Expulsion of the Europeans.
1883, French Protectorate over Grand and Little Popo; April,
L885, <»vcr Ague*.
L885, Little Popo ceded to Germany.
Porto Novo became a state in the 18th century at the time of
the founding of the town. Hombonu (Agiashe or Little Adra) under
King Allada or Adra.
1861, Bombardment of Porto Novo by the English, whereupon
the king seeks French protection. France occupies the capital,
hut evacuates it soon afterwards.
1882, France reclaims the old Protectorate rights and again
occupies Porto Novo and Kotonu.
Dahomey became a state in the first half of the 17th century
i ( apital, Savi or Xavier in Agiuda), destroyed the rival and neigh-
bouring state, Allada, in 1724. Portugal has a resident-consul in
Why da.
1876, English campaign against Dahomey.
1883, July 19th, French Protectorate over Porto Seguro, Ague,
Grand Popo. July 25th, Protection treaty with Porto Novo.
L885, June 10th, Watshi (North of Ague) under French
protection. — December 24th, Treaty re the West frontier. —
August 5th, Protectorate treaty with Dahomey, which, however, is not
recognised by Portugal.
1887, Dec. 22th, Portugal renounces the Protectorate taken over
on the oth of August 1885, and merely retains certain commercial
right-.
37
1889, August 10th, Decision concerning regulation of the Eas-
tern frontier (Lagos); October 3rd, Treaty relative to Porto Novo and
Kotonu, the latter being occupied by France.
1890, French campaign against Dahomey.
1894, French campaign and conquest of Dahomey. January 25th,
Subjection of King Behanzin.
1895, Organisation of the colony: Divided into two States,
dependent upon France.
1896. September 1st, France occupies Wagadugu.
1897. July 26th, Arrangement between France and Germany
relating to Goorma and Sausane-Mangu.
Seat of the French resident, Abome and Porto Novo (Cotonou)
residence of one of the kings, Kelmina (Kana).
Niger Coast Protectorate.
Niger Coast Protectorate. Official title.
This territory is not to be confounded with the British Niger
territories. (See p. 38.) It includes the whole coast line between
Lagos and Cameroon, with the exception of the tract between For-
cados and the Brass Rivers, which belongs to the Niger territories,
besides the possessions of the African Association founded in 1889
in the Oil River district.
The frontier begins (1896) on the seacoast, 10 miles North Fronti
West of the Benin River, extends along this river as far as Lagos
Creek, and then follows and includes the general frontier of the
Benin territories, following the Forcados River to Gana, excending
10 miles towards the North East, and 50 towards the North. The
Eastern frontier begins between Nun and Brass at the mouth of the
Niger begins towards the East, and extends towards Idu to the
Oratsghi or Aegenni River. According to the statement of the Im-
perial Commissioner and Consul General, ''these boundaries are
38
subject to modification according to local requirements." The frontier-
line towards Cameroon extends from the commencement of the Rio
del Re} estuary to the rapids of the River Cross (9° 1' North latitude),
and thence "to a point East of Yola on the BenuG River." Its
details arc therefore uncertain.
At present nothing definite can be said concerning the area
Population. , , ,•
and population.
The coast of the territory was discovered by the Portuguese at
the end of the loth century, but for three centuries it was only
sparsely colonised.
1854. Baikie's expedition up the Niger. The origin of the first
British settlement on the Niger River.
1884, July, Declaration of the British Protectorate by Consul
Hewett, after he had concluded treaties with the chiefs in consequence
of Germany's acquisition of the Cameroon district.
1886, July, Issue of the Niger Company's charter.
1891, Transference of government to the Imperial Commissioner
and Consul-General, with administrative and judicial power. Six vice-
consuls, under the Consul-General, are stationed along the rivers.
The Consul-General has no fixed residence.
Niger Territories.
Niger Territories.
I MM:
Not to be confounded with the Niger Coast Protectorate
(see p. 36). The English territory of the so-called Royal Niger
Company — founded in 1879 as the United African Company, re-
named the National African Company, 1882 -- lies to the North of
39
the Niger Coast Protectorate. By the terms of the Anglo-French
Agreement of the 5th of August 1890, the frontier between the English
and French Spheres of Interest in the Niger Territory is a straight
line from the town Say on the Niger to Barua (Baruwa) on the
Tsad Lake, "drawn in such a manner as to comprise within the"
"sphere of the Niger Company all that which fairly belongs to the"
"kingdom of Sokoto, the line to be determined by commissioners to"
"be appointed." By the terms of the Anglo- German Agreement of
the 2nd Aug list 1886, the East frontier of the territory extends from
a point on the River Cross about 9° 8' East Latitude of Green-
wich, and appears to be marked on the British Admiralty Chart
as "Rapids," to the point on the Bennue "three miles below the
centre of the main mouth of the River Faro," about 30 miles East
of Yola, and from this point to the shore of the Tsad Lake,
0°35' East of the Meridian of Kuka, the capital of Bornu. (Anglo-
German treaty, Nov. loth 1893.)
The whole territory of the British Protectorate is estimated at Area.
500,000 square miles.
The population amounts to 20 — 35 millions. Population.
The greater part embraces the dominion of the Fuldn or Divisions.
Fellabah of Sokoto, whose vassal is the Sultan of Gando, the
greatest of the Fellatah chiefs. How far the territory of the
"Emperor of Sokoto", as he is called by the English, extends, and
which of the chiefs towards the West recognise his authority, is very
uncertain. The Sokoto territories are usually said to contain
219,500 square miles and 15 millions inhabitants. The reigning Sultan
of Sokoto transferred the rights of civil, criminal, and fiscal juris-
diction over foreigners to the Royal Niger Company. Among the chiefs
of the provinces belonging to Sokoto, there is a sort of Lieutenant-
Governor of the Sultan of Sokoto. These officials attend to the
payment of the tribute, and are in regular communication with the
40
"Emperor". The officials of the Royal Niger Company have
concluded a series of special treaties ("alternative treaties'') with
the chiefs or "vassal kings" of the various provinces. To the
Niger territories in the West on the right bank of the Niger belongs,
besides Sokoto, Borgu or Bussang, which borders upon Dahomey
in the North and Adamua in the South East. The Capital of Sokoto
is at present Wumo (15,000 inhabitants).
The earliest relations of England with the tract embracing the
nresent Niger territories date from 1822 and the following years,
r milt iri. 1 ~
Reflation Lieutenant Clapperton reaching Sokoto in 1825 and remaining there
till 1827.
1884—1885. J. Thomson's treaties with the Sultans of Sokoto
and Gando.
1885, May 7th. The South East frontier regulation with Germany.
1886, July 10th. Granting of the Royal Charter to the National
Africa Company Limited, founded in 1882, and which henceforth
called the Royal Niger Company Chartered and Limited, capital
1 million /. 18th October 1887. Extension of these rights.
From 1883—1886, the Company concluded about 300 treaties
with the potentates of the Niger territories in Sokoto and Gando,
from which they derive their present rights of possession.
1880. A French commercial company tried to compete with
the British on the Niger, but received so little support from France
that they were compelled to abandon their project, the British
company having already in 1884 a Niger flotilla of 25 steamers
and a considerable capital. Since then Great Britain has endeavoured
tn firmly establish herself on the middle Niger and in the Bennue
districts, despite the simultaneous attempts of France and Germany
in this direction on the ground that the territory "Sokoto" is in-
determinable. In accordance with the terms of the Berlin Treaty
of the 26th <f February 1885, the navigation on the Niger is free.
41
1896, January 15th. Franco-English Convention.
Capital: Asaba. The military head quarters is at Lokodja Varia.
(Lokoja). Government by a "Civil Council" in London.
The Independent States of Central-
Soudan.
Tshad Lake Countries.
There is no general official title.
In England, the Tsad Lake State, Bornu, is looked upon as
the principal of the Independent States of the Central- Soudan; then
come Wadai, Kanem and Baghirmi, all bordering on the Tshad
Lake. The political frontiers of these States are undefinable.
As regards Bornu, this state belongs, in accordance with the
Agreement of the 5th August, 1890, and the Anglo-German treaty of
the loth November, 1893, to the British Sphere of Interest. The state
contains has about 50,000 square miles area and about 5 million in-
habitants. The Soudan conqueror, Rabah, an officer of Ziber Pasha
from the Egyptian Soudan, governs the land as Mai or Sultan.
Capital: Kuka (Kukaua), 50,000 to 60,000 inhabitants. By the
terms of the Anglo-French Agreement of 1893, Bornu is, accor-
ding to the English official statements, excluded from the sphere
of France and Germany.
Wadai is at present the most powerful state on the Tshad
Lake. Even the celebrated conqueror Rabah could not subjugate it.
The area amounts to 172,000 square miles with about 2 million in-
habitants. Kanem on the North-East side of Tshad (30,000 square miles,
10,000 inhabitants, capital, Mao, where the authorised agent of
Count Kinsley. "The Diplomatist's Handbook for Africa". "
42
Wadai resides), is tributary to Wadai, as is also Baghirmi, which
was recently reconquered, alter Rabah had deemed it expedient
to retire towards Bornu, and leave the occupied country.
The country lias a superficial area of about 20,000 square miles
and 71,000 inhabitants; and holders on the Tshad Lake, the German
possession of Cameroon, the French colony of Haut Uhangi, and in
the East on Wadai. The suzerainty of Wadai was recognised by
the Sultan of the country (then residing at Massenja) as early
as 1871.
As far as the right of possession is concerned, the Tshad Lake
territory is a district of Africa over which there has been much
dispute, and the order maintained there at present is not likely to
last long. In course of time two points with reference to possessory
rights came to the front: 1. Germany endeavoured to touch the Tshad
Lake shore from Cameroon across the Bennue, and attained her
object by an Agreement with England in 1890 and 1893 and with
France hi 1894. 2. France attained, over the basin of the Tshad
Lake, as it is technically expressed in France, "la reunion sur les
lives du lac Tshad des possessions Franchises du Soudan, de l'Algerie
et du Congo Francuis," which even in France itself was considered
as Utopian as late as 1890. The Convention bettveen the English
Niger Company and Germany of 15th November 1893, secured the
East of the Tshad Lake territory as far as Dar Fur to the latter,
which security has naturally a theoretical value only. In consequence
of the Franco-German Convention of the 4th February and loth March,
1894, Germany was granted an advantage not less theoretical in
being allowed access from Cameroon to the shores of the Tshad Lake.
In the same convention of the 4th February, 1894, France also suc-
ceeded in reaching the Tshad Lake; Germany, however, also reached
the Sanga Valley and consequently the Congo. To all appearances,
France has gained the greatest advantage, having not only right of
access to the Tshad Lake along the Shari, but also to Mayo Kebbi
43
and thereby "par Benoue", as it is called, to the Niger, on which
navigation is free. It is however doubtful whether Turkey will be
able to reach the Tshad Lake across the Eastern Sahara. Doubtless
England will in future reach the Tshad Lake either across the
dominion of the Mahdi along the Nile, or from the East African
side (Ibea, which see) and thus endeavour to connect her West
African with her East African possessions and the Nile Countries
across the Tshad Lake.
Cameroon.
Protectorate of the German Empire (Schutzgebiete des deutschen Official title.
Reiches): Kamerun.
The Western frontier runs (see p. 39, Niger Territories) in accor- Frontiers,
dance with the Convention with England of the 14th April, 1893,
from the right bank of the Calabar River (9° 8' East Longitude of
Greenwich, "Ethiopian Rapids") towards the North East in a straight
line direct to Yola in Adamawa (30 miles East of this town lies the
boundary point, at present in British possession). Thence it runs to a
point situated on the left shore of the Bennue, which lies 5 km below
the principal mouth of the River Frao, afterwards taking a straight
course to Ngala on the South border of Tshad Lake. The coast line
is 198- 1 km, in length, and extends from theCampo River orEtembue,
2° 14' North Latitude, to Rio del Rey, 4° North Latitude. The
Southern frontier extends in a straight line from the mouth of the
Campo River to the 15° East Longitude of Greenwich (Agreement
between France and Germany, k teth /)<■<■<•)»/)<■)•, 18S5). The Eastern
frontier follows roughly speaking the 15° Longitude East of Greenwich
(along the Logone to the Point Lame and thence to Biafara on the
Mayo Kebu [Bcniu v |), to the shore of the Tshad Lake. The Franco-
German convention of the 15th of March / tth of February) 1894 regu-
6*
44
lates this frontier iii detail, and allows Germany to share the
upper course of the Sanga River, and consequently to have
access to the Congo Basin. It is further due to this Convention that
the Northern frontier partly follows the course of the Shari. Germany
has thus an interest in the Shari (Logone) basin. Special treaties with
I Hand, April29th ami May 7th, 1885 ; July 27th and August 2nd,
1886.
The area amounts to 495,000 sq. km. or about 200,000 square
miles, according to British estimates.
Population. Population: 2,500,000. 1897 about 230 Europeans, of which
L61 are Germans and 36 English; according to English estimates,
about 4.fw0,000 inhabitants.
Divisions. The provinces belonging to this Protectorate are chiefly Cameroon
p "'" itself (from camarao, said to be the name of a small kind of crab),
Batanga with the Kribi Station and Lolodorf, Tibati's dominion and
the greater part of Adamawa, together with the districts of the Mendif
mountain on the South shore of the Tshad Lake. (The official title-
deed says "Schutzgebiet" (Protectorate).
Discovered by the Portuguese in the 15th Century. The coast of
Cameroon remained uninhabited for a long time. Later, British
missionaries settled there, and were followed by traders from most
of the sea-faring nations. Manifold disputes ensued among Hamburg
firms, French in Batanga and English as to possession.
1861, Richard Burton's and Gustav Mann's journeys in Cameroon.
1871 and following years. Buchholz, Reichcnow and Luehder
in Cameroon and Calabar territories.
1877, Ross, Grenfell and T. J. Combers explorations in Cameroon.
1884, Rear-Admiral Knorr lands with 185 soldiers, captures
Fetishtown and Hickorytown and subjugates the chief, Bell. —
July 14th, Dr. Gustav Nachtigal placed the possessions of the Hamburg
firms under German protection.
45
1885, January, German flag hoisted in Batanga. — May 7th,
Treaty with England about the Northern frontier and again August
2nd, 1886, and July 1st, 1890.
1887, March 29, Ambas Bay and Victoria handed over to Germany.
1885—1896, The journeys of the explorers, R. Flegel, Kund,
Tappenbeck, Kling, v. Stetten, Dr. Zintgraff, Lieutenant Morgen
Baron von Uechtritz, Dr. Passarge and others led to an extension
of the possessions in the Interior.
The protectorate is ruled by an Imperial Governor, who also
governs Togoland administratively and judicially, and has his residence
at Cameroon. Missionary station: Victoria.
Spanish Possession in the
Gulf of Guinea and on the Gaboon.
In the Gulf of Guinea, Spain possesses the Islands, Fernando
Po, 1998 sq. km.. 25,000 inhabitants, 13 to the sq. km., and AnnoUn
("Good Year", 17 sq. km., 3000 inhabitants, 176 to the sq. km.) of
which the former was discovered by the Portuguese in 1471, and
the latter on New Year's Day 1498 by Juan de Santaren. Both
islands were ceded to Spain in 1778.
Since the 1st of March 1843, Spain has laid claim to the so-called
Corisco Bay with the islands, Gorisco and Eloby, at the mouth of
the Muni and Campo, and a small part of the adjoining territory,
San Juan. Corisco island has an area of 14 sq. km.; the whole of
the territory claimed by Spain, 2200 sq. km. (according to English
estimate, 150 square miles), with 30,000 inhabitants. The Spaniards
claim the right to trade with this territory.
46
France is the only country which recognises the Spanish claim to
the whole territory. Spain however lays exclusive claim to a part
of the territory not recognised by France, from the Cape Santa Clara
to the Interior, of about 50,000 sq. km. (British estimates, 69,000
square miles) with a population of 500,000, which was acquired
1>\ the treaties with the chiefs. October 1884. Indeed, at one
time. Spain was believed to lay claim to 150,000 sq. km. in this
part of Africa. The point remains unsolved. — The territory
is administratively connected with Fernando Po.
Portuguese Possession in the Gulf
of Guinea.
Since the glorious times of Portuguese discovery in the 15th
century, Portugal has possessed St. Thomas Island in the Gulf of
Guinea (Eha de Sao Thome, 929 sq. km., 18,000 inhabitants [1895,
presumably 20.000], or 20 to the sq. km.) and the Princes Island
{Bha do Principe, 151 sq. km., 3000 inhabitants, 19 to the sq. km.).
A (cording to British estimates a total surface of only 454 square
miles and 21,040 inhabitants. This estimate however, dating from
the years 1878—1879, is too low.
French Congo.
Congo Frangais (France Equatoriale, first part), and Haut
Ubangui (second part).
The French possession on the coast of Lower Guinea, bordering in
Divisi*
the south on the German protectorate (Convention 24th December 1885)
embraces the districts on the Gaboon, Ogowe, Kuilu or Niari, and
47
extends along the coast (Loango Coast) to the Massabi (5° South
Latitude) on the frontier of Portuguese Cabinda. The frontiers are defined
in detail by the Convention between France and Portugal on the 12th May
1886 and 25th May 1891. The frontier, according to the Convention
between France and the Association Internationale Africaine (Berlin
Conference 26th February 1885) runs from the Easterly point of
the Cabinda territory on the Upper Tshiloango, 10° 20' East of
Paris, and follows this river until opposite Manyanga on the Congo. It
then follows the right bank of the Congo as far as the junction of
the Ubaugui (Convention between France and the Independent Congo
States 29th April, 1887), continuing its course to the mouth of the
Mbomu, and along the right bank into the Niam Niam countries,
between the seats of Semio and Ndoruma. The eastern frontier passes
through the territory of the Bongo and Dar Fertit (Agreement between
E, inland and Germany, November, 189S), as far as Dar Fur. The
northern frontier of the French possession is, with the exception of
the tract on the Tshad Lake (see page 40), not determined upon. The
neighbouring state is Wadai with its vassal lands of Baghirmi. As
regards the Western frontier towards Cameroon, see page 42. The
Kuilu, Alina, Likuala and Sanga Valleys join the basins of the Gaboon
and Ogowe rivers, which with the aforesaid countries along the coast
form the territory of the first colony (Congo Frances). The territory
of the second colony (Haut Ubangui) includes the countries extending
along the right banks of the Ubangui and its tributaries upon the right
bank and chiefly the basin of the Shari (1 Logone) and the Niam Niam
countries on the right bank of the Mbomu.
The area measures 650,000 sq. km. (1891, officially 570,000 Area.
sq. km.); according to British calculation 300,000 square miles, of
which about half belongs to each colony.
The number of inhabitants is 5,900,000 (officially 1891, about population.
5 millions; 1897, 10 millions). There are only about 800 Europeans
beside the garrison.
48
In such an extensive province, only the stations on or near
the coast ran be considered as actual possesion; the remainder
comes under the titles Protectorate and Sphere of Interest.
The Loan-o and Gahoon coasts were discovered by the Portuguese
in the 15th century who exported the natives as slaves. 1521, the
first mission established there.
1839, February 9th, Bouet Villaumez obtained the Gaboon
territory by treaty with the chiefs.
1841, Appearance of English and French ships to suppress the
slave trade.
1849. founding of the commercial station Libreville, the capital
of the territory.
1850—1865, Paul Belloni du Chaillu's expedition.
L862, France acquired the Ogowe territory.
1873, German Loango expedition under Dr. Paul Gussfeldt.
1877, Stanley's navigation of the Congo.
1880, Pierre Savorgnan de Brazza commences operations on
the Ogowe. Treaties with chiefs September 10th, October 30th
1880 — ratified November 30th 1882 — March 12th 1883, June
21st 1883, December 15th 1883, August 25th 1884.
1885. February 26th, Berlin Conference. December- 24th,
Agreement with Germany relative to the Northern frontiers.
1886, April 27th and June 22nd, decree, by means of which
the colonies Gaboon and Congo became organised.
1891, April 30th, official title, "Congo Francois".
1894, The French Congo divided into two separate colonies by
a decree of the President of the French Republic dated July 13th.
In the general records of the Berlin Conference, 26th February
1885, Article I, 1 — 8 "General" and "Free Trade District in the
( ongo"; Article III, 10 and 12, "The Neutrality"; Article IV,
13—25, relate to the navigation of the Congo.
49
1884, April .23rd. French Convention with King Leopold II,
according to which France received the right of preemption — le
droit de preemption — over the territories of the Congo States.
1885, December 24th, Convention between Germany and France
re the Northern and North- Western frontiers.
1886, May 12th, Convention between Frame ami Portugal re
frontier regulation North of the Congo and South of the Senegal
(Articles 3 and 4 re the Congo).
1887, April 29th, Treaty with the Congo State about Ubangui.
1894, March 15th, Convention with Germany re North-East
frontier.
Both colonies are governed by a „commissaire du gouvernement Government.
de la Repnblique Franchise", who in the Congo has his residence
in Libreville (200 Europeans); in Haut Ubangui at various places.
By means of the Tsad Lake, the French possession, Sphere of
Interest and Protectorate on the banks of the Congo and Ubangui
are connected with the similar possessions in the West Soudan, on the
Senegal, in the West Sahara, Algiers, and Tunis. Thus the "reunion"
(page 41) which French politicians and patriots have so earnestly
strived for has become "un fait accompli".
The Congo State.
L'fifaf Tndependant du Congo. official title.
The Western frontier is formed by the Atlantic where the Congo Frontiers.
discharges itself into the ocean. The North .frontier leaves the ocean
South of Povo grande near the Juba Factory, and runs according to
the convention between Portugal and the Congo State of February and
Count Kin sky, "The Diplomatiet'a Handbook for Africa". ?
50
Mairli (25th May) L891 in the direction of Tshiloango, touches the
Congo follows the course of this river and of the Ubangui, and, thirdly
the left bank of the Mbomu as far as the point where the latter
intersects the 5° North Latitude, in accordance with an agreement
with France, dated August, 14th, 1894. It passes thence South to the
30 East of Greenwich, finally reaching the Latitude of the Nile Station
Lado, after which it bends eastwards towards Lado itself, and pursues
it- course along the White Nile to the Albert Nyanza. The Congo State
thus encloses the left of Emin Pasha's former province, which by the
agreement with England and France 12th May and 14th August,
1894, is practically leased to Leopold II during his lifetime
i"tvd<r a bail")- These two treaties deserve attention. The former
was concluded With England only. By it, the territory as far as the
Westerly watershed of the Nile is leased to the Congo State.
France opposed this treaty, and compelled the Congo State to keep
to the convention of the 14th August, by which this English Sphere
of except the part of Emin's province, is not recognised by France.
The treaty with England, 12th May, 1894, still remained in force;
but in consequence of the French Convention of the 14th of August,
1894, it was not acted upon. Owing to these circumstances, the
frontier in this part is not fixed. The frontier returns from the
West shore of the Albert Lake to the 30° Longitude East of
Greenwich and, following the same, turns at the North end of the
Tanganyika Lake, running along its western shore (declaration of
the general administrator of the Congo Stair, February 1886) and
thence along the centre of the Meru Lake from the northernmost point
of the basin, thus cutting the Meru in two. It next follows the
Luapula, which discharges itself into the lake, as far as its outlet
in the Bangweolo Lake. After following the watershed a short
distance to the 30" East Longitude of Greenwich, the frontier
bends round towards the West in a winding line towards the
watershed of the Congo, thereby enclosing the province Katanga. The
South frontier runs fnmi the Bangweolo to the Dilolo Lake, turns
51
then (Convention of Congo State with Portugal 30th Dec. 1886 and
25th Man 1891) towards the North to the Kassai ; thence along the
7" South Latitude to Kuilu, along the 8" South Latitude to the Kuango,
and finally parallel to Nokki to the sea-coast. (Conventions of Congo
State with Portugal, 14th February, 1885 and 24th March 1894.)
The frontier is settled and unbroken, i. e., apart from the circumstance
that some of the land is leased for the lifetime of King Leopold II.
The superficial area is 2,252,700 sq. km.; about 900,000 Area.
square miles, British authorities.
The population is estimated at 15 millions. 1895, 1325 Europeans, Population,
about 839 of which Belgians. The English give 30 millions, but the
detailed census now being taken in the separate districts does not
appear to confirm this figure.
The countries of the Congo State embrace almost the entire Divisions.
Congo River territory with its tributaries, and particularly Urua,
Kasongo, Katanga, Ulala and others. They are divided into districts,
each of which has its commissioner.
Direct possession, but only a small part occupied. In the Possession.
former province of Emin Pasha, the territory is leased by England (?).
1876, September 12th. Conference of the "Association Infer- History.
nationale Africaine li in Brussels to consider the ways and means
to civilise Central Africa.
1877, Navigation of the Congo by Stanley.
1878, November 25th. Founding of the "Comite d'Etudes du
Haut Congo".
1882, Founding of the "Association Internationale <ln Congo".
1884, February 26th. Lord Granville's Agreement with Portugal,
by which the South-West coast of Africa between 5° 12' and 5" 18'
Nortli Latitude is recognised as Portuguese territory, whereby the
territories of the Association Internationale would have been com-
52
pletel) cut off from the sea. This treaty was not ratified by the
Powers, and France made use of it to occupy the territory. - - April,
22ml. the territories of the Association recognised by the American
Union as a state.
1884, April 23rd. En a private treaty with Leopold II, as head
of the Association Internationale Africaine, France receives the right
of preemption of his territories on the Congo. The question arose
later whether France possessed this right before or after Belgium;
hut it was settled in 1895 by Belgium being given the preference
till 1900. in which year site will have to make a new agreement.
— November, 8th. Treaty with Germany.-- December, 16th, recog-
nition of the Congo State by England.
1884, November 1st, till February 26th, 1885; Berlin Conference.
Founding of the Congo Stale and Free Trade Territory for 20 years.
(Passing of the Congo Act.) The territory in question is enclosed by
a line which, starting at Cette Cama in the French Congo territories,
takes in the Ogowe Territory and the greater part of the Cameroon
Hinterland, includes the Ubangi Uelle territory, and terminates at
the Indian < >cean below the 5° North Latitude. This frontierline
begins in the South at Ambriz in the Portuguese Colony Angola,
follows the course of the Loge, touches the source of the Kassai
and Congo, bends a little South of the Bangweolo Lake, touches the
lower course of the Zambesi and follows this stream to its mouth
in the Indian Ocean. — 5th December. Agreement with France
relative to the Licona Question.
1889, August 2nd. King Leopold's will, in which he bequeaths
all his rights of sovereignty after his death to Belgium.
1890, Brussels Conference, which allows the Congo State to
levy some taxes and duties in the free trade territory.
1890, July 21st. Territories of the Congo State declared
inalienable, Belgium having already on the 3rd (25th and 30th)
July, 1890, retained the right to annex the same after the expiration
of 10 years.
53
1895. Right of preemption of France regulated, by which it
stands second only to that of Belgium till 1900.
Conventions for the purpose of frontier regulations have been
agreed upon between the Congo State and neighbouring states as follows:
(a) 1883, July 2nd, with Portugal, ratified 24th March 1884.
(b) 1884, November 8th, with Germany.
(c) 1884, December 16th, with Great Britain.
(d) 1884, December 27th, with the Netherlands relative to the
possession of the numerous Dutch factories on the Congo.
(e) 1885, February 5th (22nd November), with France re the
North and East Frontiers.
(/) 1885, February 14th, with Portugal.
(g) 1887, April 29th, with France.
(h) 1890, June 10th, with Portugal (Lunda).
(/) 1891, May 25th, with Portugal (1st August, neutral treaty),
22nd November with France.
(./) 1893, June 23rd, (1894, March 24th) with Portugal.
(k) 1894, May 12th, with England relative to the leasing of
the Bahr el Ghazal territory and the Western part of the former
province of Emin Pasha.
(/) 1894, August 14th, renewed convention with France, which
however has become unfeasible, although the Northern frontier was
regulated by its means.
The central government has its seat at Brussels, and consists Government.
of the King of the Belgians and a state secretary for foreign, gt ^™"
financial, and home affairs, under whom are a "Tresorier General''
and three general secretaries for the departments, foreign and juridical,
financial and home. A High Court of Appeal also exists, and can
be convened when required.
The local government is formed by the Governor General, his
representative, the state inspector, general secretary, administrator
54
of justice, financial director and the commander of the garrison.
Seal of the local government Boma.
Portuguese Possession in Lower-Guinea,
Angola is the official title of these Portuguese Colonies, but it
is also used officially and independently for the integral parts of
the same, viz., Catdnda, Congo, Ambriz, Loanda, Angola, Benguella
and Mossdmmedes.
The possession is divided into two separate territories. The
Front
smaller. Cabinda, North of the mouth of the Congo, stretches from
the Juba Factory on the coast to Massabi at the mouth of the
Loango River, 100 km. Concerning the frontiers in the Interior
see page 46. The part extending South of the lower course of
the Congo, the Northern frontier of which is described on page 49,
passes along the coast from the left bauk of the Congo to the mouth
of the Cunene River, a stretch of littoral of 1400 km. (Treaties with
the t 'ongo State, 1 1th February, 1885, and with France, 12th May, 1886.)
The Sot tthern frontier follows the lower course of the Cunene to the
Huuibe Cataracts, takes then an easterly direction to Mpaschi
on the Cubango, and follows its course to 20° East Longitude of
Greenwich (Ndara). (Agreement between Portugal and Germany
December, 30th, 1886.)
According to the Anylo-L'oilaf/aese (Jowidinu '■ Atigttst 20th 1800,
the "mod/is rirci/di" Xormtbrr J ilh 1890, anil the Convention dime.
11th. 1891, the East frontier, which follows the 20" meridian East
of Greenwich to that point where it meets the Kassai River, is of
a provisional character. The line then follows the Kassai current
towards the North, as described on page 50. By the Anglo-Portuguese
55
Convention. August 20th 1896, the Barotse Laud was added to
Portugal.
The area amounts to 1,315,450 sq. km. (English estimates,
457,500 square miles).
The number of inhabitants is about 2,400,000 (according to Population.
English estimates only 2 millions; other authorities as low as 1,315,460).
The Portuguese give the figures as about half a million.
The territory embraces the former Congo Kingdom, whose Divisions.
ruler, Don Pedro V, was declared vassal to Portugal, the Lunda
Country (Country of Muata Jamwo, Portugal's protectorate since
1886), Loanda, Angola, Benguella, Mossamedes, the Gangella terri-
tory, Amboella, Barotse, etc.
The provinces on the coast and those extending to 15° Lon- Possession.
gitude East of Greenwich are actually considered as direct possession
of the Portuguese; further East there is a Protectorate and Sphere
of Interest. Privileged companies lease parts of the territory in the
Interior, which apparently are very favourable for opening up. The
same is the case in Mossamedes and elsewhere.
The Angola Coast was discovered in 1486 by the Portuguese, History.
Diego Coao, and soon afterwards colonised by the Portuguese.
1578, The town Sao Paolo de Loanda founded.
1640, Blockade of the coast and siege of Sao Paolo de Loanda
by the Dutch fleet under Hautebeen and expulsion of the Portuguese,
who however recovered the land from Brazil in 1650 and have re-
mained in undisturbed possession ever since.
A Portuguese Governor General resides in Sao Polo de Loanda,
who receives his orders from Lisbon.
A circumstance worthy of particular notice is that Portugal
did claim the whole South African territory between the
B6
6 and 18 South Latitude on the West side, and the 11" and
28 South Latitude on the East across the Continent. The British
destroyed the dream of an "Impero Portuguezo Sudafricano" by
gravitating from Cape Colony towards Egypt. It cannot, be denied
that Portuguese merchants, the so-called "Pombeiros", had already
in ancient times traversed the extensive territory of Angola to
Mozambique, although this tract has never been governed or occupied
h\ tie- Portuguese.
Ascension, Tristan da Cunha, Walfish
Bay.
Ascension — discovered on Ascension Day, 1502, by Juan deNova,
(hence the name) — 7° 57' South Latitude and 15° Longitude West
of Greenwich, 750 Miles North-West of St. Helena, with an area
of 88 sq. km. (35 square miles), and 140 inhabitants, is in British
possession. Chief Town, Georgetown. 1815, occupied by British troops
to guard Napoleon; since then British.
Tristan da Ouriha, 37° 6' South Latitude and 12° 1' West Longi-
tude of Greenwich, described officially as a small group of islands
consisting of Tristan da Cunha, which the Portuguese discoverer named
after himself, Gough's Island, Inaccessible and Nightingale Islands,
rocky islands in British possession with 61 inhabitants, (1894).
1815, received an English garrison.
The British possession in Walfish Bay, with the frontiers
which were more accurately fixed on the August, 7th, 1884, embraces
the small territory at the approach to German South West Africa,
almost at the Tropic of Capricorn. It has an area of 1320 sq. km.
or 430 square miles, and 768 inhabitants (1891, 31 Europeans)
57
ov 1-79 per square mile. The territory, which has been British
since 1879, was added in 1884 to the Cape Colony. Possession
Island, South of Walfish Bay, together with 8 to 10 uninhabited
islands scattered along the coast, also belongs to the English. For
particulars concerning Walfish Bay, see also Cape Colony, p. 59.
St. Helena.
An island of volcanic origin lying South of 16° South Latitude,
L53 sq. km. or 47 square miles, with 4116 inhabitants (1891), 33 to
the sq. km. Population in 1895 has fallen to 3900 inhabitants, inclusive
the garrison of 179 men. Exile of Napoleon I, 1815 — 1821; dis-
covered by the Portuguese in 1502, but not colonised by them and
soon afterwards deserted. In 1600 the Dutch took possession of the
Island, and occupied it till 1673, when it was taken over by the
British East India Company. Since 1815. it has been incorporated
into the British Empire. There is much emigration to Cape Colony.
Chief town: Jamestown (2300 inhab.).
German South West Africa.
Protectorate of the German Empire (Schutzgebicte des deutschen official title.
Reiches): Sudwest-Jfrika ; German Damaraland, German Namaland.
The Western frontier extends along the Atlantic coast, (excepting Frontiers.
Walfish Bay which is British), from the mouth of the Cunene River
a distance of 1500 km. (930 miles) to the mouth of the Orange
River. The right bank of the Orange River to 20" East Longitude
of Greenwich forms the South frontier. The East frontier is
formed, in the terms of the Memorandum of December 1884, and the
Q
Hj lomatl r Handl k lor Afrii
Area.
58
Anglo-German treaty, 1st July IS90, by the 20th Meridian East of
Greenwich as far as the 22° South Latitude. Here the frontier
bends towards the East, till it meets the 21° Longitude East of
Greenwich, follows this to the IS" South Latitude, where it crosses
the Tshobe River, and follows its course to the point where the
latter discharges itself into the Zambesi. The North Frontier (Por-
tuguese-German treaty 30th December 1886) is formed by the course
of the Cunene as far as the Ilumbe cataracts; it then continues in a
straight line to Mpashi, on the Cubango, along the right bank of
this river to Ndara on the Okavango, and to the Katima Falls on
the Zambesi. As the course of the Okavango has been inaccurately
surveyed, the demarcation of the tract of land towards the Zambesi
is uncertain. It still awaits an exact settlement.
The area is estimated at 835,100 sq. km. or 320,000 square miles.
The population numbers 200,000 ; 1896, 2050 Europeans
(about 700 Germans and 300 Englishmen).
The territory includes Gross Nama- (Namaqua) land and Damara-
land with the Kaoko and Amboland, Liideritzland, Upingtonia, and
several other tracts.
Direct possession ; only a small part, however, is actually occupied.
The opening up is left to different companies : West Africa Company
I am., South-West Africa Company, German Colonial Company for
South- West Africa, Kharaskhoma Exploring and Prospecting Syndicate,
the Hanseatic Land, Mining and Trading Company for South-West
Africa, South African Territories Company and several others.
Histon
This extensive territory was until 1880 not under European
influence. A stretch of littoral 150 km. broad, from the Orange
River to the 20" South Latitude, which was acquired by the Bremen
merchant, V. A. E. Liideritz, on the 1st of May and 25th of August
1883, and further acquisitions by German subjects on the coast
59
North of 26° to Cape Frio, with the exception of Walfish Bay, were
placed under German protection on the 24th April, 1884. On the
12th August, 1884 additions were made, the coast-line being exten-
ded from 26° South Latitude to Cape Frio. Recognised by England,
22nd September.
1884, December, Memorandum, concerning the frontier towards Treaties..
Frontier
British Bechuanaland. Treaties with the chiefs, August 18th, Regulation.
October 11th and October 28th.
1885, Treaties with the chiefs in January and March, July 28th,
September 2nd, September 15th, October 21st and November 3rd.
1886, December 30th, Treaty witJi Portugal (published 21st July
1887) re Northern frontier. Upingtonia under German Protection.
1890, July 1st, Treaty with England re Eastern frontier.
1893—1895, War with Hendrik Witbooi.
Governed by an Imperial Commissioner who resides at Great-
Windhoek.
The Imperial Government intends by degrees to declare it a Government.
Varia.
crown laud, after having fixed the limits of the native reservations
and to divide it into farms of about 1000 to 10,000 hectars each.
Cape Colony,
<;,,„ Colony (Cape of Good Hope). Official title
To the Cape Colony belongs the colony proper, i.e., those lands ^ontk
which before the time of the reorganisation in 1875 formed a part population,
of the same. It has an area of 191,416 square miles and a popu-
lation of 956,485 (1891).*) These are
*) Statesman's Year Book, 1897, fol. 170 and Dr. A. Petermann's Mittheilungen
from Justus Perthes, Geographical Institute, Gotha, 1896, fol. 89 etc.
8*
Ill)
Surface in
square miles
Europeans
Natives
Total
Per
square
mile
Colony proper . . .
191,416
336,938
619,547
956,485
500
Griqualand .
L5,197
2'. Li 170
53,705
83,375
5-49
Easi Griqualand .
7,594
4,150
l 18,468
L52,618
20-10
Tembuland . . .
1.122
5,179
175,236
L80,415
13-77
Transkei ....
2,552
1,019
L52,544
L53,563
00-16
Walfish Hay ....
i:;o
31
737
768
L79
Total :
221,311
376,987
1,150,237
1,527.221
6-90
In 1896 the population of the whole of Cape Colony was
estimated at 1/725,739 (376,812 Europeans), and the area at
225.1 so square miles.
Transkei, Tembuland and East Griqualand are the Kaffir districts,
which between 1876 and 1880 wore made part of Cape Colony. In 1886
and 1887 parts of Pondoland (Xesibeland and Rode Valley) wore
added. West Griqualand was annexed by Cape Colony in 1871
in consequence of the discovery of diamonds: in 1873 it was again
separated, being annexed for a second time as a province in 1880
after the repeated claims of the Orange Free State had been satisfied
by England paying I 90,000. British Bechuanaland (60,770 square
miles and 60,376 inhabitants, 1891), since the September 30th, 1885,
a crown colony. North of West Griqualand, has been connected with
Cape Colony since the 16th November, 1895, including the Western
district between the Molopo, Nosob and the Anglo-German frontier,
which till 1891 belonged to the Bechuanaland Protectorate.
Pondoland forms a sort of Personal Union with Cape Colony
and has 200,000 inhabitants. Became a British Protectorate in 1878
(the coast being acquired 5th January 1885) and was annexed on
the 25th September, 1894, by Cape Colony. The Governor of Cape
Colony has been Governor of Pondoland since the 3rd April 1894.
61
The course of the Orange river serves roughly as the Northern
frontier : Together with the Molopo River and the frontier of the
Orange Free State.
Since 1878, the Governor of Cape Colony superintends, as Her
Majesty"s High Commissioner for South Africa, Basutoland, Bechuana-
land Protectorate, the territory of the British South Africa Company,
and also since February 1896 the territory of Jloutisioa, Chief of
Barolong, North of British Bechuanaland, who died in the autumn
of 1896, and of Ikanning, Chief of Bamaliti (North of Mafeking)
which was separated from the British South African Company's
territory in 1895. For both these territories an assistant commis-
sioner is appointed.
The collective territories form the direct possession of Great Possession.
Britain.
1486, Bartholomew Diaz discovered the Cape of Good Hope, History.
and the Portuguese vainly endeavoured to found a colony there.
1601, The Dutch East India Co establishes a peasant colony
at the Cape, and builds in 1651 a fortress, where Cape Town is at
present situated.
1620, The English East India Co attempts to colonise the Cape.
1652, Van PJebeek succeeds in establishing a Dutch colony
of the Netherlands East India Co at the Cape.
1688 — 1689, Hugenot immigration to Cape Colony.
1776, August, Whilst attemcing to regain Cape Colony, the
Dutch tleet was captured by Elphinstone in the Saldanha Bay.
1781, First war witli the Ama Kossa Kaffirs.
1795. Revolution of the Boers against the Dutch Fast In-
dia Co.
1795, September 16th, The English establish themselves in Cape
Colony without striking a blow, and conquer the land as tar as the
Great Fish River.
62
171)7. Rising of the Boers and beginning of the frictions with
the English.
L803, Cape Colony, which had become French territory, restored
to Holland.
L806, The English reconquer Cape Colony, ■which is ceded to
them on payment of 3 millions / sterling.
L820, Extensive immigration of Scotchmen to the Cape; Port
Elisabeth founded.
L823, Founding of a British settlement in Natal.
1 S : i 7 . Dutch Boers cross the great mountains, and settle in
Natal. Emigration of the Boers northwards and defeat of Umsa-
lekaze (Mosilekatze) near Mosilekatze's Neck.
1839, The Boers found the Nalal Free States, which the
English Government tries to incorporate with the Cape Colony.
1840, The Boer and Kaffir wars break out. Natal declared a
British possession, whereupon the Boers wander northwards in two
great bodies.
1 84S, The English occupy the Boer States North of the Orange
Free State: the Boers cross the Vaal and found Transvaal.
1858, More than 2000 hardy peasants from Germany are
allotted farms in British Kaffraria, including many belonging to the
German legion raised by England for service in the Crimea.
1865, Incorporation of British Kaffraria.
1868, Incorporation of Basutoland, and 1871, West Griqualand.
1877, Extension of England's royal prerogative over free
Kaffirland and the Transvaal.
1878—1879, Zulu War.
1879, January 22nd, Battle of [sandula, in which the English
were defeated by the Zulus and 858 out of 1329 English soldiers
killed or wounded. Followed by the decisive battle of Ulundi under
Lord Chelmsford followed, when the Zulu power was completely
shattered. June 1st, death of Prince Napoleon. August 18th,
Cetewayo made prisoner.
63
1886, December 10th, Pondoland incorporated.
1887, Zululand divided (14th May annexation) and the foundation
of a new South African State, "Vryheid", which a few months later
was connected with the Transvaal.
Cape Colony proper is divided into 74 districts, and its depen- i>ivisi«...s.
„ . , , » ,, r* -, Government.
dencies into 29 divisions. A Governor is at the head ot the Colony V;n . ia
with an Executive Council. The Legislative Council consists of 22
members, who are elected every seven years. The Colony is managed
by a Governor and five Ministers of State. Each district has its
own resident magistrate, who is also Civil Commissioner, and a council
of six members. The Seat of Government is Capetown (83,718 inha-
bitants in 1891) or, without the suburbs only 51,251.
Bechuanaland.
The Bechuanaland Protectorate (since 27th February [30th Sep-
tember] 1885) embraces the South African territories between the
Molopo River, about 26° South Latitude, in the South; and the Zambesi,
Tshobe, and Okavango in the North; German South West- Africa in
the West; and the South African Republic and Matabeleland in the
East, The area is 386,200 square miles and the population about
1()0,000. The greater part of the territory is made up of a water-
less desert overgrown by thicket, with here and there a sprinkling
of forest. It is only properly fertile in the East. According
to the terms of a Resolution of Council, the 4th July. 1890,
the territory was placed under the jurisdiction of the Governor of
British Bechuanaland, but on the 18th November, 1895, when it was
annexed by the Cape as the Crown Colony, British Bechuanaland,
i/c/r agreements were made. According to these, the Chartered
Company of South Africa was to take over the management;
til
but the leading chiefs of the country protested, being dissatisfied
with the project of building a railway through the country towards
the North. The result of their protests was that the districts of
the chiefs, Khama of Bamangwato (chief town, Palachwe, 25,000
inhabitants), Sebele of Bakwena, Batoen of the Bangwaketse, Mantsioa,
chief of the Barolong tribe of the Boratsile, and Ikanning, chief of
the Bamaliti, were, according- to the State Papers, Nos. 40 and 43,
of the English Bluebook ('. 7962, London 1896, subjected to a strict
demarcation, and Khama, Sebele, and Bathoen were informed that
they might rule their land as usual, "under the protection of the
Queen. 1 ' The Queen is represented by various officials. The country
forming the protectorate outside the provinces of the chiefs mentioned
is governed by the South Africa Company, with the exception of
Mantsioa's and Ikanning's territories, which were placed under the
High Commissioner of Cape Colony on the 3rd February, 1890.
after being- subordinated to the South Africa Company on the 18th
October, 1895. Seat of the authorities, Shoshong.
< 'nly the possessions and claims of the Bakhatla chief, Lenchwe,
remain still upsettled. lie will have to come to a decision personally.
Owing to the construction of railways, and the mining in the neigh-
bouring districts, as well as to the rapid political changes characte-
rising this part of Africa, things arc by no means definitely settled.
On the 6th August and 25th October, 1882, the Boers established
the Republics of Stellaland (15,490 sq. km, 15,500 inhabitants),
and (,<>nsr„ (1<).4<M) sip km and 17,000 inhabitants) ; but they arc
no longer existing. In 1884, Stellaland was placed under British
Protectorate.
65
Territory of the Chartered Company
of British South Africa.
(Rhodesia, British Zambesia.)
The names, Rhodesia, British Zambesia, and British Central Official title.
Africa, do not exactly constitute the official titles of the lands of
the Chartered Company of British Snath Africa, but are often used
to denote the collective territories situated North and West of
the South African Republic and the 22° South Latitude on the
one side, and German East Africa, Congo State, Angola, Ger-
man South West Africa, and Bechuanaland on the other. Zamhesia
is in a sense an official title, the name Rhodesia on the other
hand is quite unofficial.
The course of the Zambesi divides the Dominions of the Com- Frontiers,
pany into two parts: Northern Zambesia on the left bank, and
Southern Zambesia on the right bank. According to the terms of
the Anglo -German Agreement of the 1st July, 1890, the West
./nattier of Southern Zambesia, with which the greater part of the
present Bechuanaland Protectorate is still united for administrative
purposes, commences at the mouth of the Orange River, and follows
its course as far as the 20° Longitude East of Greenwich, which,
in turn, it follows Northwards until it cuts the 22° parallel, thence
running to the point where it touches the 21° Longitude East of
Greenwich. Its further course is Northward to the 18° parallel,
which it pursues as far as the Tshobe River and Zambesia. (See
p. 57) The East frontier was determined by the Anglo-Portuguese
Treaty Uth Jane, 1891, as follows: A straight line beginning
opposite the mouth of the Aroangva or Loangvariver, which flows into
the Zambesi near Zumbo, and proceeds directly South to the 10" parallel,
i '..iin i Kinsky: "The Diplomatist's Handbook foi kt\ •>
66
follows this till its connection with the 31° meridian East of Green-
wich, then passing directly South to the point where the Mazoe River
touches the 33° Longitude Easl of Greenwich. The frontier then
follows this meridian southwards to the 18° 30' South Latitude, cuts
the Maniea Plain (1884 occupied by Portugal), along the watershed,
winds towards the South -West to the contiux of the Sabi and
Lunti, whence it runs to the North-Easterly point of the South-
African Republic. The frontier at the watershed on the Maniea
Plain is evidently drawn in such a manner that no more any terri-
tory West of 32° 30' East Longitude of Greenwich shall belong to
Portugal. Again, Great Britain has no more any claim to the land beyond
33" East Longitude of Greenwich. The Tati gold district between the Shaslii
and Ramaquaban Rivers is excluded from the Company's territory,
and likewise the tract of land between the Shashi and Maklutji Rivers
and Khama's district North of the 22° parallel.
Northern Zambesi is included politically in British Central
Africa (which see), being only administratively connected with
the lands of the British South Africa Company. For the Western and
Northern frontiers see page 49, "Congo State" and "Portuguese
Lower Guinea".
Area of operations of the Company, 750,000 square miles.
Population uncertain, but may be safely computed at 2,500,000.
Since 1888 Mashonaland and Matdbeleland have formed the
heart of the Company's possession.
Southern Zambesia is the direct possession of the Company.
Since February 1891, the Company has also governed the North
Zambesia territory, (except Nyassaland) ; the Royal Commissioner of
which works together with the Company, whose officials are also
placed under him. English Bluebook 1895, C 7637. This was the
status quo till the 1st of January 1896.
67
1888, February lltli (5th June). Treaty of peace with the
Matabele Prince, Lobengula. — 25th July. Demarcation of the
British Sphere of Interest.
By the Royal Charter of the 29th October, 1S89, the British History
Sphere of Interest South of Zambesi and Tshobe was handed over
for management to the Company.
1890, August 20th. Frontier treaty with Portugal.
1891, May 9th. The Sphere of Power of the High Commissioner
of Cape Colony was extended to this territory. (Blue Book 1894
C 7383). — 28th May. New Frontier treaty with Portugal.
1894, Matabele War; capture of Bulawayo.
1896, Dr. Jameson's raid into the Transvaal and renewed
rising of the Matabele.
i s
1897, January 30th. Arbitration re the Manica Plain.
The territory is divided into 13 Districts, excepting North Government
)esi, which is undivided.
Government Offices, Salisbury and Bidawayo, 2000 inhabitants.
British Central Africa.
Under the title of British Central Africa (usually abbreviated official title.
into B. C. A.) is comprised since 22nd February 1893 the territory
of the English Sphere of Interest North of the Zambesi River.
The frontier line runs from the East Shore of the Nyassa Frontiers.
Lake, viz., from the parallel at which the Rovuma River joins the
M'Sinje, thence Southwards to 13° 30' South Latitude and the East
Bhore of Chiuta Lake, which it follows. II ere the line runs in a straight
line to the East shore of the Kilwa Lake along which it continues
68
its course until it reaches the extreme South-Masterly point. The
frontier next proceeds to the extreme Easterly affluent of the Ruo
linn-, following the course of the former and the Ruo till they
discharge themselves into the Shire. From this point, the frontier turns
in a North Westerly direction towards Chiwanga, and runs along the
watershed between the Zambesi and the Nyassa Lake, till it touches
the L4° South Latitude. The frontier from this spot is directed
towards that point where the 15° Latitude meets with the Aroanga
or Loangva, and follows the river-bed of the latter as far as the
Zambesi (Anglo-Portuguese Agreement, 11th June, 1891). The South
frontier is formed by the Zambesi River. The Western boundary
line begins on the Zambesi at the Katima Falls, and stretches in
a northerly direction along the river to the Kabompo, whence it
passes to the frontiers of the Congo States. (Anglo-Portuguese Treaty,
31st Mag, 1893; rati, I fill July 1898.) No decision was then reached
with regard to the possessory rights of Barotseland. (See Portuguese
Lower Guinea). In accordance with the Anglo-Portuguese Convention,
20th August, 1896, Barotseland was definitely added to Portugal.
German East Africa forms the North frontier from the South
point of the Tanganyika to Naronga on the Nyassa Lake. The
remainder of the frontier line runs across the Nyassa Lake as far
as the parallel of the Rovuma-M'Sinje junction.
Including the British Central Africa Protectorate, the territory
measures 500,000 square miles.
The number of inhabitants is uncertain, but is most likely
4 millions. Number of Europeans 850 (1895), of which 32 are
English.
Divisions. The former dominion of Kazembe, North Zambesi. For the
territory on the West Shore of the Nyassa Lake see page 69.
The whole territory is a Sphere of Interest. For the Protectorate
see page 69.
69
Great Britain has occupied the territory since the beginning Possession.
of 1891.
1858 — 1873, Livingstone's journeys into the Interior, his first History,
courte being across the Continent from East to West. His death
occurred at Dsitiambo's village in the Bangweolo Lake district.
The following districts are administered by the British South Varia.
Africa Company (which see): Tshambesi, Tanganyika, Meru and
Luapula. Seat of the authorities, 1895, Fort Bosehery.
British Central Africa Protectorate.
(Nyassaland.)
The land on the South and West shore of the Nyassa Lake
has borne this name since the decree of the 14th May, 1891. It was then
separated from British Central Africa, aud placed under a Boyal
Commissioner and Consul- General, who also superintends Northern
Zambesi, as explained on page 66. The West frontier runs from
North to South scarcely 100 km. distant from the West Shore of
the Nyassa. The area and population have never been properly
estimated. 1896, the returns for the population were 844,995,
including 259 English. The whole country is divided into twelve
districts, in each of which are one or two administrative officers. The
chief town and residence of the Commissioner is Blantyre with
6000 inhabitants, including 100 Europeans. Seat of the Administration,
Zumba on the Shire. The garrison is formed by 200 Sikhs of the
Indian Army. For the purpose of communication with the sea,
Portugal has ceded to the British Government in Tshinde, on tin-
Indian Ocean, "a small piece of land" as a so-called "British
concession", at the only navigable mouth of the Zambesi.
70
Basutoland.
This territory is situated on the right bunk of the Upper Orange
River, and surrounded by the Orange Free State, Natal, and Cape
Colony. It has 26,640 sq. km. or 10,293 square miles, with 250,000
inhabitants (1895) including 600 Europeans. It was annexed in
August 1871. and on the 18th March 1884 placed directly under
the Crown. Governed by a Resident Commissioner working under
the High Commissioner for South Africa.
Chief Town. Maseru, 862 inhabitants (inclusive of 99 Europeans).
Natal.
Official tnlr
Frontiei-s.
Population.
--lull.
Colony of Natal.
The land borders in the North on the Orange Free State and
the South African Republic together with Zululand (frontier river,
Tugela), in the East on the Indian Ocean (200 miles), in the South on
Cape Colony (East Griqualand), Pondoland, and Basutoland.
Estimated at 42,920 sq. km. (20,461 square miles).
In 1891, 543,913, made up of 46,788 Europeans, 41,142
natives of British India and 455,983 Kaffirs. In 1895, 544,000.
Formerly an integral part of Cape Colony. Natal was converted
into an independent Crown Colony on the 15th July 1856, and in 1866
increased by the addition of Alfred County (the most Southerly
Coast district). The charter of the Constitution was altered in 1875,
1879, and 1893.
71
The coast was discovered by Vasco da Gama on Christmas
Day, 1497, hence the name.
1719, Founding of a Dutch colony, soon afterwards abandoned .
1834, Settlement of English emigrants.
1835, The republic " Victoria" was founded by Captain Gardiner
but dissolved in 1838.
1837, Gert Maritsz and Andreas Pretorius founded in Natal
the Batavisch Afrikaansche Maatschappij and Pietermaritzburg.
1840, Expulsion of the Boers by the English. The former
wandered into the territory of the Yaal and Orange.
1893, July 20th, Natal becomes an independent colony with
a responsible government.
The governor rules in the Queen's name, assisted by a legis- Government
lative council and a legislative assembly together with live
Ministers appointed by him.
Capital and residence of the Governor, Pietermaritzburg.
17,500 inhabitants (1891).
Zululancl and Tong-oland.
The British possession Zululand (annexed 14th May 1887) lies to
the North-East of Natal, and borders on the North and West on the
South African Republic and Tongoland (Tongola River, Maputa and
Usutu Rivers, Swasiland), on the East on the Indian ( )cean (Convention of
England with Ihr South African />'c/>/i/>/i<\ UOth June 1888). It embraces
the former Zulu Reserve, the greater part of the dominion of Cetewayo
who died 9th February 1884 and that of Usibebu, and Santa Lucia Bay
(12,500 square miles, 22,320 sq. km. with 1(15, 121 (1895) inhabi-
tants, including about 124(5 whites). The territory is administered by
72
the Governor of Natal. The Commissioner has his residence at
Eshotve, (100 whites i. L888 and 1890, some territories on the other
side of tin' former North frontier towards tin* Mkusi River were joined
to Zululand. 23rd April, L895, by a proclamation of the Governor
concerning the intended railway from the sea to the South African
Republic, the territories of the chiefs of Umbegesa, Mdhlaleni Sam-
bane and others were joined to Zululand, the union being confirmed
1»\ a Royal Order of the 8th June, 1895. Anglo-Portuguese Treaty
38th May, 1891. English Bluebooks C 7780 and C 7878, London
1895. See also Petermann's geograph. Mittheilungen, 1896 f. 90.
Tongoland, Amatongo, situated North of Zululand ; friendly
treaty with England since 6th July, 1887; 5000 sq. km. with 31,000
inhabitants. On 30th May, 1895, made a British Protectorate, and
placed under the government of Natal. (English Blue Book C 7395,
London 1885.) The North frontier was regulated by an agreement
with Portugal 28th May, 1891. Further agreements are dated
29th November (3rd December) 1887; 1888 (with Zambila) and
August 1890.
The British annexations in Zululand and Tongoland Protectorate
render it impossible for the South African Republic to build a
railroad to the South without passing through British territory. The
Boer Free State is therefore entirely cut off from the sea.
Orange Republic.
Official title. Oranje Vrijstaat (Orange Free Slate).
The South Frontier is formed by Cape Colony near the course
of the Orange River ; the East frontier by Basutoland and Natal,
the North frontier by the South African Republic (Vaal River), and
the West frontier by West Griqualand.
73
131,070 sq. km. (48,326 square miles). Area.
1890 — 207,503 (129,787 natives); 1895 - - 220,000. Population.
Independent State. Possession.
In 1836 the territory was still a wilderness inhabited by Bistoiy.
Beclmans and Bushmen. When in 1834 the British proclaimed the
abolition of the slave trade in Cape Colony, the Boers wandered
with their slaves into the territory of the present Republic, and founded
there a free state, which, being taken by the English in 1848, and
on the 23th February 1854 declared independent, received on the
10th April of the same year a constitution, which was revised on
the 9th February 1866 and 8th May 1879. On the abolition of sla-
very by the Boers, the latter received from England in 1854 all
the possessions belonging to them in the territory of the free state.
Since then the country has been quietly developing.
1S97, May 25th. Commercial treaty with Germany. — June 17th,
Union with the South African Republic.
The legislature for the 19 districts consists of a Volksraad Government.
Various.
with 58 members and an executive with a president, who is elected
every rive years. Capital: Bloemfontein, 3,457 inhabitants, of which,
in 1890, 2077 were Africanders or Europeans.
South African Republic (Formerly
Transvaal).
Zmdafrikaansche Eepubliek, formerly Transvaal -Vrijstaat. Official title.
In the West the territory borders on Bechuanaland and British Frontiers.
Central Africa, the boundary line being formed 1>.\ the Limpopo or
Count Kinsley : "Th Diplomatist's H« ™
I»i\ i-ii>n-
74
Crocodile River (Convention with England 27th February 1884). In
the North it borders on the territory of the British South Africa
Company; in the East on Portuguese East-Africa, Zulu, and Tongo-
land; and in the South on Natal and the Orange Free State.
Total Area, 308,560 sq. km., 119,139 square miles.
Potion. Apnl 1895, 790,000.
Besides the Transvaal proper, the territory of the Republic
includes also, since 1887, the New Bepublic, Zululand, which was
founded by the Boers on the 16th August, 1884, under the name
"Vryheid", and (since 10th December 1894), the Protectorate state
of Swaziland, declared independent in 1884 (18,140 sq. km., 41,000
inhabitants. 1000 Europeans), the Republic being unable to incor-
porate it.
Independent State, whose foreign affairs are so far limited by
Paragraph IV of tin' treaty with England 27th February 1884, that
England has a right of veto in all state treaties within six wwnths.
The state was formed by those Boers who emigrated in 1835
from Cape Colony to Natal, but who left the latter territory when
it was annexed by England and declared a crown colony.
1852, February 17th, England's recognition of the independence
of the State.
1853. Founding of Pretoria. Proclamation of the Constitution
in 33 Articles (from 23rd May, is 19).
1858, February 13th, passing of the Grondwet or Fundamental
Law-.
1869, July 29th, Frontier regulation treaty with Portugal.
L875, Ignatz Maritsz founded the Small Free State.
1877, April 12th, England annexes the Transvaal.
1880, Commencement of the war with England.
1 880, January and February. Battles by Laing's Neck on the
Ingogo and near Majuba.
— i « » i » .
Hist on
75
1881, March 21st. Volksraad resolution, 26tli October, 1881.
Restitution of the Transvaal State in reference to home affairs, the
management and control of foreign affairs being made subject to
the suzerainty of the Queen of England.
1884, February 27th (August 3rd 1881) Convention with Eng-
land (ratified by the Volksraad August 8th 1884) by which Eng-
land's suzerainty for the control of foreign affairs oj the State was
restricted, and the State for political reasons adopted the name of the
"South African Eepublic" .
1887, September 14th. Incorporation of the New Republic.
1888, June 20th. England's recognition of the alterations in
the South African Republic.
1889, March 13th, Mashona and Matabeleland fall under the
British Sphere of Interest.
1890, June 23rd, Revision of the constitution; 2nd August, front-
ier treaty with England and incorporation of the Small Free State;
August 4th, Incorporation of a part of Swasiland (Swasiland Con-
vention).
1894, December 10th. Swasiland becomes a protectorate state
of the South African Republic. Although not incorporated, the Boers
have had the right of legislating and administering justice since the
21st February, 1895.
1896, December. Dr. Jameson's invasion and march to Johannes-
burg.
1897, March, (June 17th). Union with the Orange Free State.
At the head of the State is a president, elected every three years
and supported by two chambers the Eersle Raad and the Volksraad,
..nli composed of 24 members.
Capital: Pretoria, 8000 inhabitants.
10*
76
.1 title.
I r.mlni -.
A I •
Population.
Divisions.
--ion.
History.
Treaties.
Portuguese East Africa.
Estado <!' Africa Oriental^ formerly Mogambique and Sofala.
The East frontier is formed by the Indian Ocean from the
Kosi Bay, about 27° South Latitude, to Cape Delgado at the mouth
of the Rovuma, about 10" 30' South Latitude; the North frontier,
towards German East Africa, by the course of the Rovuma (German-
Portuguese-English agreement, 29th October awl :>()/// December, 1886
ami 1st July 1890 : re the territory at the mouth of the river
[Kionga bay] September 1894) to ll 1 //' South Latitude, whence
it runs in a straight line to the East shore of the Nyassa Lake.
The frontier next follows the shore of the lake towards the South
as far as the 13° 30' South Latitude. From this point it is formed
by the hitherto inaccurately defined frontier on the Manica Plain
(vide Anglo-Portuguese convention oj the 28th May and 11th June,
1891). From Limpopo onwards the territory is bordered by the S. A.
Republic. In the South, the Estado borders on British Tongo-
land and Zululand. *
The area amounts to 768,740 sq. km., (261,700 square miles.)
Population, 1,500,000; other authorities, 768,740 to 2V 2 millions.
The territory embraces the districts of Cape Delgado, Ibo,
MoC/ambique, Inhambane, Quilimane, Senna, Tcte, Sumbo, Gasaland,
Sofala, Laurenco Marquez, Delagoa Bay (the "key" to South Africa)
and several small islands. The land is divided into two parts, by the
course of the Zambesi Mogambique North of the Zambesi, aud Lau-
go Marquez, South of same, with capitals bearing the. same name.
Direct possession, which nevertheless, according to Royal Decree
of the September 30th, 1891, is leased for 25 years to private com-
panies for opening up and general management.
Vasco da Gama discovered the coast in 1498, and it w r as soon
afterwards colonised by Tristan da Cunha and became the scene of
77
many immigrations. The territory was connected administratively Frontier.
• 11 nnrti Regulation,
with Goa in the East Indies till 1752.
1869, July 29th, Frontier regulation treaty with Transvaal.
1870, Abolition of slavery.
1878, Arbitation by the French Marshall, Mac Mahon, whereby
Portugal obtained definite possession of Delagoa Bay, claimed by
England. Disputes arose with England (African Lakes Co, Building
of the Stevenson Road, Cardosa, Serpa Pinto), which resulted in
England's colonisation work on the Lake Nyassa. England maintained
the right of preemption of Delagoa Bay.
1884, Portuguese occupation of Manica.
1885, October 14th, Protection treaty with the Zulus under
Gungunhana.
1888, April 27th, Reclamation of Mashonaland.
1890, August 20th, An un-ratified treaty with England re-
lative to the Zambesi basins.
1891, May 28th, Renewed frontier treaty with England.
1891, July 30th, Formation of the Inhambane and Mozam-
bique Companies.
1891, September 30th, Formation of the Estado d'Africa Oriental. Government.
1895, February. Regulation of the German frontier.
1S96, December 9th. Definitive regulation of the German-
Portuguese frontier.
1897, April. — Bern Arbilration re Delagoa Bay railway.
A Royal Commissioner General, appointed for three years, rules
the state as Governor and has his seat in Laurengo Marques (1700
Europeans; 5000— 6000 black inhabitants, 700 Portuguese, [1897]).
The native chiefs in the various districts arc subject to him as Capitaes
moroes. An important railroad runs from Laurengo Marquez (1895,
57 miles laid by the Portuguese and 290 miles by the Netherland
Company) to the South African Republic (Pretoria). A line is also
being built from Beira to Salisbury in Rhodesia.
78
Madagascar and Dependencies.
iai title Madagascar.
Besides the large island, the St. Marie, Nossi Be, and Glorioso
Islands are regarded us dependencies of Madagascar, the former on
the N. E. side, and the latter on the N. W. side of the Island.
Area, 591,563 sq. km. (228,500 square miles) with the surround-
ing islets, 591,964 sq. km. (1650 km. greatest length, 520 km.
greatest breadth, 400 km. average width.
Population. Population : 3.500,000 (French official indication 1897 : from five
to six Millions). Malay Hovas : 1 Million, Sakalavas: 1 Million, Bet-
siloes: 600,000, Betsimisarakas: 400,000, Southern races: 200,000.
P ion. Since August 1896, direct French possession.
Madagascar was mentioned by Marco Polo as early as the 13th
Century. 10th August, 1506, discovered by the Portuguese d' Almeida,
who called it Sao Lourenco. Under Louis XIV declared French
possession; the kingdom of the Malegassies however remained intact.
Subsequently the last dominion collapsed.
1814, Reconquest of Foulepointe, Tamatave and St. Marie by
the French.
1822, Expulsion of the French by Iiadama I. who was supported
b\ England, whereupon Ranavalo I expelled all Europeans from the
island.
1845, Franco-British Expedition against Madagascar.
1862, In consequence of having conceded land to the French-
man Lambert. Radama II was killed. His wife and successor,
Rasoherina, formed an alliance with England and the U. S. A. to
her ultimate detriment.
79
1868, August 8th, Renewed treaty with France.
1869, Ranavalo II adopts Christianity through English influence;
wars and rebellions follow.
1885, December 17th. At the end of the French war, France
obtained the right, by a treaty, to maintain a general resident on
the island and to control foreign affairs. (Occupation of Diego
Suarez Bay by France.)
1890, England recognises the French protectorate of the island,
but the natives oppose any kind of protectorate whatever.
1895, May, French war with Madagascar. The taking of the
Capital on the 1st October led to the occupation of the island.
1896, July 11th and August 3rd, Decree of the French Govern-
ment concerning the reorganisation of the island.
1896, August 6th, Official proclamation of the annexation of the
island by France in January, which is recognised by the U. S. A.
The Hovas have been allowed to retain the Royal dignity (the Government.
Prime Minister is also the Queen's husband). Ranavalo III has
reigned since the 13th July 1883. Capital: Antananarivo, 100,000
inhabitants. Seaport : Tamatave, 10,000 Inhabitants. Slavery still
exists in a patriarchal sense, although abolished by a proclamation
on the 8th March, 1889.
The surrounding islands, which are dependencies of Madagascar,
are St. Marie, since 1643 French, with 165 sq. km. (64 square miles)
and 7667 Inhabitants, and Nossi Be, 393 sq. km. or 113 square miles
and 7700 Inhabitants. These islands were formerly direct French
possession, as also was Diego Suarez (4567 inhab.) on the North Coast.
The uninhabited islands are Juan de Nova, Bassas de India
;iinl Europa.
80
Mauritius and Dependencies.
i >r final title. I lony of Mauritius, formerly Isle de France.
Divisions. The Easterly Mascarenhas Island Man fit in*, belongs to the
Colony of Mauritius, together with the islands Rodriguez 110 sq. km.,
Diego Garcia, Amirantes, Seychelles, of which only Mane" and Pras-
lin are inhabited, the Tshagos Islands, Trois freres or Eagle Islands,
the Cosmoledo Islands (Oil Islands) Assumption, St. Brandon or
Cargados (16°50' and 16°20 i South Latitude and 56°16' to 59°14'
Longitude East of Greenwich), and lastly the Aldabra Islands
157 sq. km.
Mauritius, 705 square miles, Seychelles 204 sq. km., Amirantes
13 sq. km. Total area of the dependencies, 172 square miles.
Popniation. Mauritius 370,588 (1891) (1895; 375,000) inhabitants, two
thirds of whom are Indians and 3400 Chinese; the Seychelles 16,400
(1891 : Amirantes 100 (1891); Rodriguez 2061 (1891); Diego
Garcia 700.
Direct possession of Great Britain.
The Mascarenhas Islands were discovered in 1505 and 1507 by
the Portuguese Pietro Mascarenhas Mauritius (discovered 1507)
was occupied in 1591 by the Dutch under Van Neck, who named
the island after Ids sovereign. 1712 evacuated by the Dutch,
1721 occupied by Fiance, who ceded Mauritius and the Seychelles
in ' IS 14 to England.
( apital of Mauritius and seat of the Governor, Port Louis,
_'41 inhabitants (1894). Chief town of the Seychelles Mahe.
81
Reunion and Dependencies.
Reunion (Isle de Bourbon). Official title
The islands Mayotta (since 26th January 1896), St. Paid, and New Divisions.
Amsterdam, which Great Britain ceded to France, in 1892, together
with the uninhabited Kerguelen islands, annexed by France in 1893,
are dependencies of the westerly Mascarenhas Island. St. Paul is
the oldest French settlement in the Indian Ocean.
The area of Reunion is 2512 sq. km. or 965 square miles, of Area.
Mayotta 366 sq. km. or 140 sq. m.
167,847 (1893) inhabitants, one-fifth whites, 23,161 British In- Population,
dians, 412 Chinese (1892). Mayotta contains 8706 inhabitants (1893).
Direct possession of France. Possession.
1505, discovered by Pietro Mascarenhas; 1631, the island was History,
colonised by the French merchant Gobert from Dieppe. It was used
for a long time as a convict station. 1764, conquered by the English.
1784 returned to France, and the island has remained since" then
a French possession. Mayotta has belonged since 1843 to France.
Capital: St. Denis; sends one Senator and two Deputies to the Van'a.
French Chamber of Deputies.
The Comoro Islands.
Les Comores. Official title.
This archipelago, situated North West of Madagascar, consists Divisions,
of the islands Great Comoro, Mohilla, and Johanna. The small uninha-
bited islands situated North ol Madagascar also belong to this group,
i' on nt K i n s k y : "The Diplomatist's Handbook for AJrioa" 11
82
\i/.. Assumption, Astove, Cosmoledo, St. Pierre, Providence, Get/
<i)/il Farquhar, together with the Wizard Cliffs; Tromelin, Galega,
dt/</ Garayos are unoccupied.
1972 sq. km. (620 sq. in.) area of the Comoro Islands.
Comoros 61,700 (according to British authorities 53,000).
Protectorate of the French Republic; Mayotta French possession
since 1845.
The French Protectorate came into force on the basis of the
treaty dated Johanna, 24th April, 1886.
Zanzibar.
1 : • ' ' ' ' ' • ' Zanzibar (Sansibar).
The territory of the Sultan of Zanzibar consists of the islands Zan-
zibar m& Pemba. None of the opposite mainland belongs to the Sultanate.
Zanzibar, 1590 sq. km., 625 square miles; Pemba, 960 sq. km.
360 sqnare miles.
Zanzibar 150,000, Pemba 50,000 of which more than 100 are
of European descent (50 English, 50 Germans and 7000 Indians).
British protectorate since the 1st July (4th November) 1890.
Since the 31st August, 1896, known as the East Africa Protectorate.
In 1499 Vasco da Gama's fleet touched the island, which fell
into the bands of the Portuguese in 1503. The African coast from
Mombassa to Cape Corrientes, together with the islands, came under
the rule of Portugal in 1529. 1698, Imam of Maskat conquered the
83
territory, and drove the Portuguese South. 1823 and following years,
British appeared in Zanzibar waters. 1856, the possessions of Imam
Sejjid Said of Maskat were divided between his two sons, and
Sejjid Medshid acquired the African countries on the mainland,
which had in the meantime been extended to the regions of Tan-
ganyika and Nyanza, as an independent state. The Governor General
of India, Lord Canning, recognised the division in 1861, but France
not untill the 10th March, 1862. At that time the coast of the African
continent from Warsheik, 3° North Latitude, to Tunghi Bay, 10° 42'
South Latitude, also belonged to Zanzibar. Germany's recognition
30th December, 1886. October 29th (IstNovember) 1886, the territory,
which had in the meantime extended far into the interior, was
divided in such a way that the coast land from Cape Delgado to
Kipini on the Ozi River, 10 miles broad and stretching into the
interior, was added to the Sultan's dominion. It was then decided
that the German Empire should possess a Sphere of Interest in
connection with the Zanzibar territory from the Rovuma River to the
Umba River. North of Kipini, the Sultan retained several garrison
towns, viz., Lamu, Kismayu, Brava, Merka, Maqdishu and Warsheik.
1885, August 14th, Recognition of the German Protectorate over
Usagara, Nguru, Useguha and Ukami.
1888, May, the German East Africa Co. obtains, in consideration
of the payment of 4 million marks, the right to administrate in
Mrima, (the interior from Rovuma to the Umba). England (Imperial
British East Africa Company), as early as the 24th of May, 1887,
had acquired the right of administration of the land from the Umbi
to Kipini for a yearly payment to the Sultan.
1XJS9, August 31st, England obtained the island and huts
Lamu, Manda and Patta to the North of Tana.
1890, November 4th, British Protectorate of Zanzibar and
cession to England of the territory from Umba to Juba, with Witu as
British Sphere of Interest, Germany receiving Heligoland in exchange.
84
L892, August 26th (July 16th), Italy leases from the Sultan
Warsheik, Maqdishu, Merka and Brava.
L893, Jul} 31st, Sultan once more governs the territory bet-
ween Tana and Juba.
1895, June 15th, Declaration of British Protectorate over all
the country from the coast to Uganda; on the 30th June the British
Imperial Government itself takes a firm footing there.
L896, August 25th, Sultan Sejjid Hamed bin Thwain bin Sa'id
dies. Hamud bin Muhammed succeeds him.
1897, April 6th, Abolition of slavery, which was already prohi-
bited in 1890.
The present government of Zanzibar was formed in October,
L891, with Sir L.Mathews as "Prime Minister". All proclamations
and agreements, etc., must be drawn up in the English and Arabian
languages, and must first be submitted to the English Consul General
tor his consent. Since the 1st February, 1891, Zanzibar a free port.
Chief town, Zanzibar, 30,000 inhabitants (often estimated at 100,000).
German East Africa.
Protectorate of the German Empire (Schutzgebiete des deutschen
Reichesi: German East Africa, Deutsch-Ostafrika.
Knmt,.,-. lu the East, the Indian Ocean (the Mafia Island has also be-
longed to the Protectorate since the 1st December 1891), in the South
(Portuguese, German and 'English mum/lions of the 29th October
[1st November] and 30th December 1886, 1st July 1890, and Sep-
tember 1894), a straight line from Cape Delgado to the Rovuma,
(the Kionga Bay is German), then along the course of this river to
liy 2 ° South Latitude, whence it passes direct to the East shore of
the Xyassa Lake as far as Karonga, the track of the former
85
Stevenson road to Tanganyika (Anglo-German Treaty 1st Jidy 1890),
along the East shore of the basin of this lake toUsige on the North shore
of the Tanganyika, and from here in a straight line as far as Mfumbiro
(Declaration of the Congo State's Administrator February 1885), till
it reaches the 1° North Latitude. Omitting the Mfumbio, the North
frontier follows the 1° North Latitude (Convention between England
and Germany 1st July 1800) across the Victoria Nyauza as far as
Kawirondo Bay, thence continuing its course in a straight line N. E.
towards Kilima Ndsharo, which belongs to Germany, and so to the
North bank at the mouth of the Umba. (Treaties between England
and Germany, 1st November, 1886 and 1st 'Inly, 1893).
975,000 sq. km. or 310,000 square miles, which (according to Area.
Dr. Karl Peters) are divided into 220,000 sq. km. settlement land,
116,000 sq. km. uninhabited territory, and 66,000 sq. km. water.
The number of inhabitants is estimated at 3,850,000 (English Population.
estimates 2,100,000. 1896, about 1000 Europeans.
The most important provinces are Usambara, Usagara, Uhehe, Divisions.
Uniamwesi, Karagwe, Iramba, Konde, Kawende, Ruanda, Usukuma,
further the Matia island in the Indian Ocean and Ukerewe in the
Victoria Nyanza.
A so-called Protectorate, but in reality a direct possession. Possession
Dr. Peters, Dr. Jiihlke, and Count Joachim Pfeil landed in History.
Treaties.
Saadani on the 4th November, 1884, and concluded, as representatives Frontier.
of the German Colonisation Society the first commercial treaty on l
the 19th November, having at the same time hoisted the German Hag
in M'buzimi.
1885, February 12th (3rd March), Formation of the German
East Africa Company in Berlin by Dr. Carl Peters, who was furnished
with mi Imperial Privilege etc., on the 27th February (Special trea-
ties with the chiefs, 8th of April, 10th and L9th of June, 26th of
86
November, 29th of November, and 9th of December). 14th of August,
German Protectorate recognised by the Sultan of Zanzibar.
1886, June, the GermaD part of the territory in tin 1 Sultanate
of Witu acquired by the Brothers Denhardt became the property
of the German East Africa Company. — 29th October (1st No-
vember), Regulation of the North Frontier with England.
1SS7. March 27th, The rights of a body corporate granted to
the German East Africa Company.
1888, Arab rebellion. — 16th August, the tract of coast from
Wanga to Rovuma taken over. (Convention with Zanzibar, 28th April,
1886
1889, October 22nd, Declaration of the German Protectorate
over the const from Witu to Kismayu, followed by claims from
England. 17th August of the same year, Baron Lambermont's
arbitration in reference to Lamu.
1890, March, Wissman appointed Imperial Governor.
1890, July 1st (17th June), Treaty between Germany, England
and the Saltan of Zanzibar, determining the present frontiers
of the possession. (Uganda comes under the British Sphere of
Interest). — 27th October, The indemnity of 4 million Marks fixed.
— 17th November, France gives her consent.
1896, Wissmann retires.
The Government is administrated by an Imperial Governor, who
has his residence at Bar es saldm (6000 inhabitants).
British East Africa.
Imperial British East Africa (usually abbreviated I. B. E. A.).
All the British possessions in East Africa excepting Zanzibar,
Pernba and Uganda, bear since 1896 Aug. the name of the "East Africa
Protectorate". The „ Uganda Protectorate*' existe since 1896, July.
87
The Indian Ocean from the mouth of the Umba to that of the Frontiers.
Juba forms the East frontier. The boundary line proceeds along
the Juba, the upper course of which is still unexplored, as far as
the crossing of the 40° East Longitude of Greenwich and the 6°
North Latitude, whence it follows the latter (Anglo-Italian agreement
24th Mart], and 15th April 1891) to 35" Longitude East of Green-
wich, and so to the Bahr el azraq or Blue Nile. The North frontier
towards theMahdi's dominion is not fixed; in general the 10° North
Latitude may be taken as an approximative frontier. The Soutli
frontier is the North frontier of German East Africa (which see);
the West frontier (see the East frontier of the Congo State), runs
along the 30" Longitude East of Greenwich across the Albert
Edward Lake and along the Semliki on the West of the Albert
Lake through the Niam Niam lands to 10° North Latitude and South
Dar-Fur.
2,600,000 sq. km. or one million square miles. Uganda alone Area.
contains 80,000 sq. km.
Roughly estimated, about five million inhabitants. Up to the population.
present, the English have published no official census.
The I. B. E. A. possessions embrace Uganda, Usoga, Unioro, Ankori, Divisions.
Mpororo, Koki, a part of Paianda; the Niam Niam countries, the
former Egyptian Equatorial Province of Emin Pasha, also, according
to some accounts, a part of Kordofan and Dar-Fur, Kawirondo,
Massai, and a part of the Galla and Somali countries.
1.5th June 1895, British Protectorate declared over the whole Possession,
country from the Indian Ocean to Uganda, including the former
Sultanate of Witu.
The coast territory belongs, as already mentioned, to the Sultan History.
of Zanzibar. 7th February 1824, Admiral Owen, who in the fri- Fl . ollt j,.,/
gate"Leven" dropped anchor off Mombassa, declared Mombassa, the Regulation.
88
island Pemba, and the coast from Melindi to Pangani under British
Protection, on the strength of a convention with the Sultan of
Zanzibar, and despite the presence of a fleet from Maskat. This
act was not ratified, and the British flag was consequently lowered
in Mombassa, the English officials left, and the country remained
in the hands of Arabs from Maskat till 185(>, when the Sultan of
Zanzibar took possession.
L885, April 8th. Denhart Brothers received land from the Sultan
ofWitu, which they placed under a German Protectorate 27th of May.
1887, May 24th. The stretch of land from Wanga to Kipini
handed over to the British East Africa Company.
1888, October 9th. Sultan of Zanzibar ceded the stretch of
coast from linba to Ozi to the Imperial British East Africa
Company for fifty years.
1889, August 31st. The Sultan yields up all his possessions
North of Kipini to the Company.
1890, July 1st. The British Sphere of Interest more definitely
fixed by Germany and England. — 5th August, Recognition of
the British Protectorate by France. 19th November. British
Protectorate over Witu, Kismaju, Patta, Manda.
1891, The company took over all the land from Umba to
Juba (400 miles length of coast), from the Sultan for a yearly
payment of 80,000 dollars, and at the same time the ports North
of Kumayu were by the Anglo-Italian convention of 24th March
(16th July) 1893 leased by the Company to Italy.
1892, March 30th. Protectorate treaty with Uganda.
1893, End of .March. The Company, which had occupied the
whole territory as far as Uganda, the Albert Edward Lake, and
Semliki River, retires from Uganda.
1893, July 31st. The Company gives up the administration
of Witn.
1894, June 19th. British Protectorate declared over Uganda.
89
1895, June 15th. The whole of the lands of the I. B. E. A.
placed under British protection, and the administration taken over by
England on the 30th June, and placed under the control of the
British Consul General at Zanzibar.
The Uganda province is under a commissioner, who is subordinate Government.
to the British Agent and Commissioner at Zanzibar, who is also
responsible for order along the coast for a distance of ten miles inland
and for the maintenance of the communication between the coast
and Uganda. — A railway 657 miles long is being built from Mom-
bassa to the Victoria Nyanza. A road, 100 miles long, runs from
Mombassa to Kibwezi.
The chief town of Uganda is — Mengo (seat of the British authori-
ties : Port Alice). Seat of the government, Mombassa, 15,000 inhabitants.
British Possession in Somaliland and
Sokotra.
Somali Coast Protectorate. Official title.
The frontier line leaves the sea-coast West of Zejla on the Frontiers.
Gulf of Aden at Cape Wahadu, and stretches southward across
Lovadu (Lavada), Davali, Abasuen, and Biokaboba to Dshildessa. Here
it turns towards the South-East to Milmil, then follows the 8° North
Latitude Eastwards to the 48° Longitude East of Greenwich,
whence it runs N. E. as far as Wadi Nogal and from this valley
directly North along the 49" Longitude East of Greenwich to the
coast again, which it reaches at the seaport, Bender Ziada. (Franco-
English Agreement of 2nd of February 1888, and Anglo-Italian
Convention of 5th of May 1894.)
77,000 sq. km. ; English estimates "about 75,000 square miles"
Count Kinsky: "The Diplomatist's Handbook for Africa". * ^
Area.
90
Population. Population: 240,000.
The possession embraces the provinces of Ejssa (Isa), Gada-
burssi, Habr Aual, I lain- GerMdjii, Dolbohanta, Habr Toldshalej,
War Singeli Somali.
p os8ess i on Protectorate of (neat Britain, which however resembles an
actual possession, although some of the Somali chiefs receive subsidies
from the British Government.
History. As early as 1827, England had established herself on the
Frontier.
Somali coast from Aden and India, and in 1855 concluded con-
tentions from Berbera with the most important Somali chiefs (Ugases,
Garades, Sultans).
1875. Occupation of the Somali coast by the Egyptians.
1884. Egyptians evacuate the districts. Since 1887, England
has occupied the ports under the title of a protectorate.
1885. March; Ejssa, Gadaburssi and Habr Aual Somali under
British Protectorate.
1888, February 2nd. Regulation of the West frontier by a
Franco-English ( km vention.
1889, December 13th. Regulation of the Protectorate. (Somali
< >nler in Council).
1894, May 5th. The frontiers determined by means of an
Anglo-Italian Agreement.
The territory is administered by the political agent of the
governor of Aden, who is at the same time Consul for the Somali
Coast. (Seat of the Vice Consul and British Agent, Berbera). In
the winter 30,000 inhabitants, during the summer almost deserted.
The Sokotra Archipelago embraces the Islands Sokotra, Abd el
Kary and the Brothers Islands with an area of 3579 sq. km. (1382
square miles, including the area of Kuria Muria on the Arabian
coast) and 10,000 inhabitants. The greater part of the archipelago
was bought from the Sultan of Sokotra in 1875, and in accordance
91
with the rights of preemption, which were obtained by a treaty
with the Sultan of Kashin in South Arabia, 1876, occupied by Eng-
land 30th September, 1886, and administered from Aden. An agent
and a small garrison are stationed at Tamarida on the North coast.
French Possession on the Gulf of Aden.
Cote Frangaise des Somalis et dependances (formerly Obock.) Official title.
The Gulf of Aden starting from Raheita (Ras Dumejra 12° 30' Frontiers.
North Latitude) via the Gubet el Kharaib (Virgin's Water) as
far as Cape Lovadu or Ras Ali (Wells of Hadu) 25 km. East of
Ras Dshibuti (250 km.) forms the East frontier. The frontier then
runs along the caravan tract from Dshibuti across Lovadu, Dauali,
Abasuen to Bia Kaboba and Dshildessa. A West and South Sphere
of Interest is considered as extending across the Somali and Afar
(Danakil) countries to the foot of the Abyssinian mountains. The
courses of the Raheita River, the Hawash, and its tributary Addifuha,
denote the direction of the North West frontier. Anglo-French
agreement. 2nd February, 1888.
French estimates, 120,000 sq. km. but generally supposed to Area,
be only 10,000 sq. km. (3860 square miles); British estimation:
43,320 sq. m.
Population 200,000 estimated officially 1890; 50,000 1897. Population.
(Somali and Afar or Danakil); probably much larger.
The possession embraces Obock with its territories, to which Divisions.
belong the island of Dumejra, Dshezira Soba, Les Freres and the
Musha Islands in Gubet el Kharaib; further Tadshura, Ambabo,
Dullul, Sagallo, Dshibuti together with the Interior belonging to
these points. Roads lead to Shoa and Ilarar.
12*
92
Possession. The points on the coast form the actual possession of France,
and arc all occupied, whereas the interior of the Afar Country can
only be considered a Sphere of [nterest. The territory was organised
as a Colony by a decree of the '20th May, 1896.
History. 1857. Henri Lambert appointed Consular Agent in Aden,
associated himself with Aber Baker of Tadshura, who sold the
stretch of land from Ras Ali and Uano to France for 10,000
thalers. Lambert was murdered on the 4th of June, 1859.
L861, January. Admiral Fleuriot de Langle installs Abu Baker
as governor of Zejla.
1862. March 11th. France purchases Obock from Ras Dumejra
to Ras Ali.
1872. Pierre Arnoux's treaty with Menelik of Shoa, by which
the rights of the Negus are recognised.
1883, March 17th. Italy attempts to obtain the protectorate
over Gubet Kharaib. France occupies Obock officially.
1884, October 18th. Tadshura becomes French by purchase.
1885, May 20th. French Protectorate over Tadshura, Ambabo
Sagallo, and Gubet Kharaib, and annexation of these territories the
same year. England cedes the Musha Islands to France.
1886, March 3rd. Obock becomes a penal colony for Arab
prisoners.
1887, Division of Tadshura Bay between England and France.
1888, January and February. France occupies Ras Dshibuti
and regulates the East frontier by convention with England of the
2nd of February.
1889, January 11th. Landing of the Russians in Sagallo under
Atschinoff (175 men, 6 priests). 18th February, Bombardment of
Sagallo.
1896, May 20th. Organisation of the Colony, and removal of
the governmental residence from Obock to Ras Dshibuti.
93
A governor is responsible for the administration. Chief town Government,
and port, Puis Dshibuti, 3000 inhabitants.
Italian Possession in North East Africa.
For the single territories — Possedimenti, protettorati Italiani official title.
in Africa — there exist different official names: Eritrea, Assab,
Costa dei Benddir, Somalia Italiana.
In consequence of the defeat of the Italians on the 1st March Erontiers.
1896, at Adua, their possession in Africa is at present undergoing
a political change. Omitting Abyssinia, which would never submit
to an Italian protectorate as provided by the treaty of Utshali 2nd
May 1889, the boundary lines may be defined as follows. They
begin at Has Kasar, 18° 2' North Latitude, and on the Falkat River,
according to the Anglo-Italian treaty of May 1887, (Italian Green
Book laid before the Italian Chamber 25th April 1888), run in a
straight line to the right bank of the Barka, follow it in the direction
of Kassala, which the Italians took and occupied in 1894, thence
probably following the Lareb Eastward. Before the war of
1895— 1896, the line extended {Anglo-Italian treaties 24th March and
15th April, 1891, ratified on the 25th February 1890) from Chor
Gash South-westerly towards the Atbara, followed this and the Semsen
and Rahat to 35y 2 ° Longitude East of Greenwich and to the 6th
Parallel Northern Latitude. Proceeding along this Parallel to 40°
Longitude East of Greenwich, it then followed the undefined course
of the Juba to its outlet into the Indian Ocean. The course of
the Mareb may in future form the South frontier of the Italian
possession adjoining Abyssinia.
Towards the South-East of Ras Kasar, 18° 2* North Latitude,
the coast of the Red Sea borders the Italian possession as far as
94
Raheita 12° 30' North Latitude. The ocean frontier starts again
near Bender Ziada in the Somali country, bends round Cape Guar-
dafui, and ends at the mouth of the Juba. As the French possession
on the Gulf of Aden has no fixed frontiers in the West and East,
and on the other hand Menelik II of Ethiopia declared himself
sovereign of the whole of the African East Horn in 1885, only
the Anglo-Italian Agreements of the 21th March and 15th April,
1891, the 5th and 25th May, 1894, concerning the demarcation of
British Somali Country, the Italian Sphere of Interest as well as the
S Miiali Italiana, can be authoritative.
The Italian possession embraces Massowah with its territory,
the Dahlak Archipelago, the protectorate over Habab, Marea, and
Beni Amer, the protectorate over Anssa and the Danakil coast, as
well as all the Afar races depending on Anssa, Assab, the Raheita
protectorate, and that over East and South Somali country (the races
of Midshurtin near Obbia, Merihan, Ogaden, Hawiya Rahanwin) and the
Gallaland as far as Dshub (.Juba) thus, principally the Arussi-Galla
land. For the present it is impossible to give an exact description
of the Italian Dominion on the African East Horn, as the extent
of the actual Abyssinian government there is unknown. Abyssinian
outposts are stationed near Bia kaboka in the Gadaburssi Somali-
land, and in the Marar Prairie (towards Ogaden), and Abyssinian
bands raise tribute far into Ogaden, having in 1895 also ransacked
Bardera on the Juba river.
145,000 sq. km. (487,000 square miles), according to Italian
statements 247,300 sq. km.; with the area of the Somali and Galla-
lands 775.000 sq. km., including Abyssinia and Shoa, 1,676,000
square miles.
The population was estimated in 1893, according to the state
of affairs then prevailing, and was set down as 150,000 for the
occupied territories; but when the whole area is taken into con-
95
sideration, it would certainly amount to more than two millions,
Abyssinia and dependencies always excepted.
Massowah and the Interior, also Assab, direct possession Possession.
(possedimento). The protectorate is formed by Habab, Marea, Beni
Amer, Aussa, the Danakil coast, and Raheita, also the Somali
territories. The Gallalands can only be taken as Sphere of Interest.
The coast was visited by the Portuguese in the 15th Century. History.
1520, Diego Lopez landed in Massowah.
Treaties.
1557, Turks took Massowah, installing a Habab chief as gover- Frontier.
, .,, „ , T ., Regulation,
nor with the title of Naib.
1866, Turks formally cede Massowah to Egypt.
1870, The Rubattino Company purchase Assab, and surrender
it in 1879 to the Italian Government. Egyptian protest 1st July 1870.
1874, Khedive Ismail Pasha occupies Keren and marches on Tigre.
1882, July 5th. Law concerning the organisation and recognition
of Assab as a colony. Occupied on the 9th January 1881.
1884, Taking of Kassala. Raheita under Italian Protectorate.
1885, February 6th. The Italians under San Marzano occupy
Massowah.
1885, June. Italian protectorate over the Danakil coasts,
2 December. Civil administration in Massowah.
1887. January 26th. Defeat of the Italians at Dogali.
1887, July 5th, General Saletta's protectorate treaty with Kan-
tibai concerning Habab.
1888. Conclusion of the protectorate treaty with Berehan,
Sultan of Raheita, and acceptation of the protectorate by the
Marea, (January).
1888, December, 2nd. General Baldissera's Protectorate treaty
with Deglel concerning the Beni Amer.
1888, December, 6th. Treaty with the Sal I an of Aussa respecting
the pro/ed orate (ratified 13th November, 1889).
96
1889, February, 8th, (16th May). The Sultan of Obbia places
himself under the Italian protectorate. In April and November the
protectorate was extended, by a treaty with the Midshurtiu Sultan,
to the territory between 5° 33' and 8° 13' North Latitude. 12th July,
Occupation of Asmara. 29th September, Frontier Regulation with
Al>\ ssinia.
L889, Maj 2nd. (25th Miazza 1881) Treaty of I Hshali, by which
tin- Altvssinians hind themselves to accept the intervention of Italy
in foreign affairs (ratified 29th September, 1889, Italian Green Book
4th March 1890). This treaty was never recognised by Abyssinia
(Paragraph 17, Amharish: "itshallautshal", "pourra" or "devra"). —
May 20th, Occupation of Keren.
1890, January 1st. Incorporation of the Assab colony with
Eritrea. — 14th January. The Italians enter Adua.
1892, August 26th. The Sultan of Zanzibar cedes the coast of
nhbia as far as Juba by lease to the Italians. Italian administration
instituted September, 1893.
1893, July 16th. Italian Government hands over the administra-
tion of the Benadir ports (Merka, Brava, Maqdishu, Warsheik, Itala)
for 3 years to Messrs. S. Filonardi and Co., who pay 160,000
rupees annually to the Sultan.
1896, March lth. Battle of Abba Garima.
1896, June 25th. Formation of the "Societa anonima com-
merciale Italiana nei Benadir". (Somalia Italiana.)
1897, January 7th. Publication of the terms of peace with Italy.
A Governor superintends the administration of Eritrea, assisted
\ ai
by Royal Commissioners.
Seat of Government, Massowah, 16,000 inhabitants (1891).
97
Abyssinia.
Itjopja, El Hdbasha, Abessinien, Abyssinia, Abyssinie, Abissinia, Official title.
Miopia.
Abyssinia borders in the North on Eritrea, in the East on Frontiers,
the Italian and French Danakil and Somaliland, the territory of the
Italian Sphere of Interest; in the South on the protectorate of the
I. B. E. A.; in the West on the countries of the I. B. E. A. and
the Mahdi's Empire. An exact topographical limitation is not possible.
So much may be said, however that Abyssinia has no sea-port.
The country is formed of provinces and the partial Kingdoms
of Tigre, Amhara, Godsham, Shoa, Harar, and the Galla territory,
on the left bank of the Abaj (upper course of the Blue Nile),
Gudru, Djimma etc., then of Kaffa, Wallamo, and the Sidama terri-
tories, and extends with the South frontier to the vicinity of the
Rudolf and Stefanie Lakes, in the South East as far as the Erer
and Webi Shebeli. The provinces governed by "ras" are: Semien,
Dembea, Tigre, Sakota, Begemeder, Yetzoo, Aroossi, Goorage,
Marocco, Galla to the west of Kaffa, Harar, and Tchertcher.
About 500,000 sq. km. (The Abyssiaus give 2,500,000.) Area.
Population : 4 l / 2 millions. (The Abyssinians give 15,000,000.) Population.
Absolute barbaro-tyrannical country under the rule of Negusa Possession.
Neghest ("King of Kings"), or Ati, at present Menelik II of Shoa,
whose vassals are the monarchs of Tigre, Godsham, Galla lands,
and Harar. Italy claimed in vain, on the strength of the treaty
of Utshali 2nd May (1st October) 1889, the right of protection over
Abyssinia. The latter never recognised the riglh but on the other
hand frequently protested against it to the European Powers.
Count Kinsky: "The Diplomatist's Handbook for Africa". 13
98
An ancient Semitic oinpire originally consisting of five large in-
dependent territories, whose inhabitants are monophisitic Christians,
with kings elected from amongst themselves as Negusa Neghest.
Once governed in the North by Byzantines. 1520, visited by the
Portuguese, when they had already a considerable history. It is pro-
bable that the empire extended over the whole African East Horn.
Abyssinia's Mohammedan rival in the East, the Adel Empire (later
Harar) arose about 1300 A. D. and flourished about 1500.
15 34. Invasion of the Galla into the Ethiopian Empire and
settlement there.
1536 to 1543, Wars of Muhamnied Granj, monarch of Adel
against Abyssinia; the Portuguese under Christoforo da Gama in
Abyssinia.
1538— 1539, Turks support the enemies of Abyssinia with an army.
1680 — 1704, Invasion of the Galla in Central Amhara.
1743 — 1807, Taking of the Galla territory by the Abyssinians.
1766 — 1858, Civil war in the Sidama countries in the South
of Shoa.
1805 and following years, Lord Valentia, 1809 Salt, visit
Abyssinia with presents from Britain.
1843, June 7th, Conclusion of a trade and friendly treaty by
Bochert d'Hericourt in the name of King Louis Philippe, between
France and Abyssinia. This treaty is still in force.
1846, Harris' British expedition to Shoa.
1854 — 1855, Extinction of the ruling dynasties of Djimma,
Kaha, and Ennerea.
1858, Commencement of the Galla war of Negusa Neghest
Theodore
1864 — 1896, Subjection of the Galla by Ras Govanna and Ras
Darghie.
1867 — 1868, English campaign, and taking of Magdala.
1874, Egyptian war against Abyssinia. The Egyptians routed
at Gura.
99
1880, German mission to Abyssinia under Gerhard Rolilfs.
1884, June 3rd, Treaty of Adua between Abyssinia, England,
and Egypt. Negus retains the sovereignty over Bogos.
1885, February 25th, Landing of Italians in Massowah. —
26th May, Harar deserted by the Egyptians.
1886, January, Taking of Harar by the Shoans. Meuelik II
declares himself sovereign of the whole African East Horn.
1887, Defeat of the Italians near Dogali.
1889, January 18th. A Russian expedition under Atshinoff attempts
to advance upon Abyssinia across Obock. Atshinoff plants the Russian
flag at Sagallo, but the French admiral Olry bombards the fortress,
and carries off the Russians as prisoners to Obock.
1889, May 2nd, Protectorate treaty at Utshali with Italy (ratified
29th September in Rome), extended in October to mutual protection.
1889, May, Campaign against the Mahdi's followers and 10th
March, death of Negusa Neghest John II. — Menelik II of Shoa
became Negusa Neghest of Ethiopia. — 29th September, (additional
clause, 1st October) Frontier regulation with Italy, by which the Negus
recognises Italy's possessory rights.
1889, October 22nd, Coronation of Menelik at Antotto.
1890, British mission to Abyssinia under Sir G. H. Portal.
1890 — 1894, Second Journey of the Russian Cossack officer
Mashkoff to Harar and to Menelik II.
1891, February 11th, Protest against the Utshali treaty.
1895 — 1896, War between Abyssinia and Italy.
1895, Russian expedition under Leontjeff to Abyssinia, and
despatch of an Abyssinian legation to Moscow and St. Petersburg.
1896, Summer, Deputation of Pope Leo Mil to Menelik II
with reference to the liberation of the Italian prisoners.
1896, October 26th, Treaty of Peace with Italy. Abolition of
the Utshali treaty and recognition of Abyssinia's independence.
After the expiration of a year, frontier regulation to follow.
100
L897, Januan 27th, Conclusioo of Franco-Abyssinian trade
convention at Harar. British mission under Rennell Rodd to Menelik II.
The Negusa Neghesl governs the extensive Empire through Has
or Governors of the provinces, and Sluiin or District Administrators.
Imperial residence, Addis ababd in Shoa. 50,000 inhabitants.
Although the exact position of the European Powers is not quite
clear, the Negusa Neghest is better disposed towards France, which
lias obtained a firm footing from Dshibnti in Harar and Shoa. The
old ((invention (Alliance et commerce) of the 7th June, 1843,
concluded by d'Hericourt with Menelik's grandfather, Sahla Selassie
of Shoa, stands France in good stead. Abyssinia is the only
part of Africa in which Russia has recently had any direct and
considerable political influence — an influence which many have
wrongly attributed to the alleged resemblance of the Russian-Oriental
to the Ethiopian creed. These religious propagandas reach far
back into the past. The Abyssinian statesmen display towards
England a reserve almost amounting to timidity. Abyssinia is
completely cut off from the sea-coast.
Literature.
Egypt.
Parliamentary Papers 1882, Nr. 18; 1885, Nr. 11; 1886, Nr. 1 — Bhiebook C 5668. —
Joloidcz, Bihliotheca Aegyptiaca (Leipzig 1858, Supplement 1861). — Kremer von, A., Aegypten
(Leipzig 1863). — Ronchetti, L'Egypte et ses progres sous Ismail Pacha (Marseille 1867). —
lane, An account of the manners and customs of the modern Egyptians (London 1871, 5th
edition). — Stephan, Das heutige Aegypten (Leipzig 1872). — Wyse, Egypt political, financial,
strategical (London 1882). — Amici, L'Egypte ancienne et moderne (Alexandrie 1884). —
Prince Ibrahim Hiltny, The Literature of Egypt and the Soudan from the earliest times
to the year 1885 (London 1886). — Plauchut, L'Egypte et sa occupation anglaise (Paris
1889). — Revue francaise 1891, pag. 372. — Britain's work in Egypt (Edinburg 1892).
— Russel II, The Soudan, cause, effect and remedy (London 1892). — Scott Keltie J., States-
man's Yearbook, 1892, page 1054 etc. — Due d' Harcourt , L"Egypte et les Egyptiens
(Paris 1893). — Neumann Th., Das moderne Aegypten (Leipzig 1893). — Fircks A..
Freiherr von, Aegypten 1894 (Berlin 1895 und 1896, 2 Bde.). — Revue diplomatique et
coloniale (Paris 1894 seqq.). — Hron K., Aegypten und die agyptische Erage (Leipzig 1895).
— Alts H., Promenade en Egypte (Paris 1895). — Pensa H., L'Egypte et le Soudan
Egyptien (Paris 1895). — Hertslet E., The Map of Africa by Treaty (London 1896, 3 Vols )
I, pp. 259—262; III, 1072—1074.
The Mahdi's Dominion.
Colborn, With Hicks Pasha in the Soudan (London 1885). — Boyle, The Egyptian
campaigns 1882— 1885 (London 1886, 2 Vols.). — Wilson C. T. and Felkin R. W., Uganda
and the Egyptian Soudan (London 1887, 2 Vols.). — Buchta, R., Der Sudan (Leipzig 1888).
— Emin Pascha, Eine Sammlung von Reisebriefen und Berichten Dr. Emin Pascha's
(Leipzig 1888. English: London 1888). — Wingate F. R., Mahdiism and the Egyptian
Soudan (London 1891). — GessiR., Sette anni nel Sudan egiziano (Milano 1891). — Russel II,
The Soudan, cause, effect and remedy (London 1892). — Chaille-Long Bey, L'Egypte et
ses provinces perdues (Paris 1892). — OJirwalder J., Aufstand und Reich des Mahdi im
Sudan (Jnnsbruck 1892. English: London 1892). — Vita Hassan, Die Wahrheit fiber
Emin Pascha, die agyptische Aequatorialprovinz und den Sudan (Berlin 1893, 2 Bde.). —
Statin Pascha R., Feuer und Schwert im Sudan (Leipzig 1896; English: London 1896).
— I. R. I'nited Service, I, 41 (1897): G5— 79: The Dongola Expedition of 1896. —
Atteridge A. H., Towards Khartoum. The story of the Soudan war of 1896 (London 1897).
Tripoli.
Maltzan, Freiherr ton, L'cise in den Pegentschaften Tunis und Tripolis (Leipzig
1870, ■ '• Bde.). — Pctcrmann's Mitth.ilungen 1887, pag. 28. — Borsari F., Geograli;!
e Btorica ctnologica dclla Tripolitania e Eczzan etc. (Napoli 1888). — Nachtigal G., Sahara
and Sudan (Berlin 1879, 1881, 1889 3 Vols.). — Rohlfs G., Kufra (Leipzig 1881). — Robecchi-
Bricchetti L., Tripolitania (Roma 1896).
Count Kinsky: "Thi Diplomat! t's Handbook t"i Airica". 14
102
Tunis.
Dilhan, Histoire abrege'e >lo la regence de Tunisie (Paris 1866). — Desfosscs, La
Tunisia [Paris 1877). — Journal Officio] de la Republique Francaise, 27 et 28 Mai 1881.
i-Wagner, BevQlkerung der Erde (Gotha 1882, pag. 50 f.). — Le Journal Offi-
ciel de Tunis. -- Play/air R., Handbook for Algeria and Tunis (London 1887). — El
Raid el Tunisia. — Petermann's Mittheilungen, 1887, pag. 28. — Riviere A., La Tunisie
Paris 1887). — Mayer, Cabier coloniaux, 1&89, pag. 386. - Ashbee H. S., A biblio-
graphy of Tunisia from the earliest times to the end of 1888 (London 1889). — Lallc-
mand C, La Tunisie, pays de protectorat francais (Paris 1891). — P. H. X., La politique
francaise en Tunisie (Paris 1891). — Fitzner R., Die Regentschaft Tunis (Berlin 1895).
Clarin de la Rive, Histoire gencralc de la Tunisie (Paris 1895). — Planet E.,
Correspondance des beys de Tunisie et des consuls de France avec la cour 1577 — 1830
(Paris 1893—1895). — Livre Jaune (Traites Tunisiens) 1896. — Kenseignements coloniaux
et documents publics par le comit( ; de l'Afrique Francaise Nr. 1. Le reglcment Italo-
Tunisiens etc. ;Nr 6. — La Tunisie, I. Histoire et description (Paris 1896, 2 Vols). —L'Afrique
Francaise 1896, pp. 46, 83. — Hertslet K, The Map of Africa by Treaty (London 1896). II,
pp. 548—563, 906—915.
Grammont, Histoire d'Alger sous la domination turque 1815—183.0 (Paris 1857). —
Nettement, Histoire do la conquete d'Alger (Paris 1869). — Bulletin Ofllciel du Gouverne-
ment general de l'Algerie 1873 seqq. — Journal Ofticiel de l'Alg-erie. — Annuaire general
de l'Algerie. — Sautayra, Legislation de l'Algerie (Paris 1878). — Idem, Relation entre
la France et la regence d'Alger au 17 me siecle (Paris 1882). — Gaffarel P., L'Alge'rie
(Paris 1S83). — Play fair R L., Handbook of Algeria and Tunis (London 1887). — Rousset,
L'Algerie de 1830 a 1840 (Paris 1887,2 Vols.). — Le Roy-Beaidieu, L'Algerie et la Tunisie
(Paris 1887). — Amat, Le M'zab et les M'zabites (Paris 1888). — Play fair R. L., A
bibliography of Algeria (London 1888). —Rousset C, La conquete de l'Algerie (1841— 1857)
Paris 1889, 2 Vols ). — Robin, Le M'zab et son annexion a la France (Alger 1889). — Idem,
Bibliography of the Barbary States (London 1889). — Mercier E., Histoire de l'Afrique
septentrionale (Paris 1890 3 Vols.). — Choisy M. A., Documents relatifs ;i la mission dirigec
au sud de l'Algerie (Paris 1890). — De^orter, La question du Touat etc. (Paris 1891). —
Mis E., La conquete du Tchad (Paris 1891). — Ferry J., Le gouvernement de l'Algerio
Paris 1892). — Vignon L., La France en Algerie (Paris 1893). — Vuillot P., I/Exploration
du Sahara. Etude historique et geographique (Paris 1895) — Mather Col., La question du
Touat (Paris 1895). — Vicarez A/., Au sujet du Touat (Alger 1896). — Goguyer A., Occu-
pation de l'arrii're-terre du Maghreb (Paris 1896). — Journal Ofticiel, 1 Janvier 1897. —
Hertslet E., The Map of Africa by Treaty (London 1896), I, pp. 287—290. — Foureau F.
A u Sahara (Paris 1897).
Morocco.
Bernard, Quatre mois dans le Sahara (Paris 1881). — Erckmann, Le Maroc moderne
Paris 1885). — Jannasch, Die deutsche Handelsexpedition in Marokko (Berlin 1886). —
Stutfield, El Mogbreb (London 1886). — De la Martinih-e E.. Bibliographie du Maroc,
1844—1886 [Revue de geographic 1886, Aout). — Foitcauld Ch. de, Reconnaissance au
Maroc 1883—1884 (Paris 1888). — Idem, Morocco (London 1889). — Cora, Cosmos, IX,
pag. 73. — Thomson J., Travels in the Atlas and Southern Morocco (London 1889). —
Blackwood's Magazine, 1889, page 412. — Leared A., Morocco and the Moors (London
L891). — Bonsai S., Morocco as it is (London 1893). — Diercks G., Marokko und die
deutschen Interessen (Berlin 1893). — Wolfrom G., Le Maroc (Paris 1893). — Picard E.,
L\ Moghreb al Aksa, une mission Beige au Maroc (Bruxellcs 1893). — Diercks G., Meine
103
Materialien xux Kcnntnis und Beurthcilung des Schcrifenrciches and der Marokko-l'rago
(Berlin 1894). — Merry e Colom Fr., Mi embajada extraordinaria a Marruecos en 1803
(Madrid 1894) — Libro rojo 1894. — Cauizares y Moyano E., Apuntes sobre Marruecos
(Madrid 1895). — Harris W. B., Tafilet (London 1895). — Hertslet E., The Map of
Africa by Treaty (London 1896), II, pp. 802—809, 894—902, 1062— 10G6.
Spanish Possessions (Presidios, Canaries, Gaboon, Islands in the
Guinea Gulf).
Chil y Naranjo G., Estudios historicos . . . de las Islas Canarias (Palmas d. g. C.
1876 et 1880). — Sorela A., Les possessions espagnoles en Afrique (Paris 1885). — Gaceta
de Madrid 1885 seqq. — Diplomatic and Consular Reports from Spain and her Colonies
(London 1891). — Revista geographica commercial 1886, Nr. 25. — Iradier M., Africa
(Victoria 1887, 2 Vols.). — Baumann O., Fernando Poo (Wien 1888). — Boletim da Sociedad de
Geographia (Madrid 1888, pag. 157). — Bulletin Societe de Geographie commerciale (Paris 1888,
Nr.7j. — CoelloF., La cuestion del Rio Muni (Madrid 1889). — Boletim da Sociedad de Geographia
(Madrid 1890, pag. 7). — Verneau B., Cinq annees de sejour aux iles Canaries (Paris 1890).
— Reparaz G., Espana en Africa (Madrid 1891). — Wagner-Supan, Bevolkerung der
Erde, VIII. (Gotha 1892, pag. 170). — Beparaz G., Melilla. Nociones de politica hispano-
marroqui (Madrid 1893). — Millares A., Historia general de las Canarias (Las Palmas
1893). — Bulletin des lois de la Republique Franchise Nr. 888. — Hertslet E., The Map
of Africa by Treaty (London 1896), II, pp. 882—902.
Rio d'oro.
Boletim da Sociedad de Geographia (Madrid 1885, pag. 333). — .Globus, 1885, 18
und 21. — Gimenez S., Espana en el Africa Septentrional (Madrid 1885). — Revista goo-
graphica commercial I. (1885—1886, page 11; II. 1885—1887, pp. 53, 100, 250). — Boletim da
Sociedad de Geographia (Madrid 1885, pag. 191, 1886, pag. 1). — Perez del Toro F. Espana
en el Nordeste de Africa (Madrid 1886 et 1892). — Bonelli,E\ Sahara (Madrid 1887). —
(Jaceta official, 6. Abril 1887. — Blackwood's Magazine, 1889, pag. 412. — Bulletin Societe
de Geographie (Paris 1889, pag. 180). — Revue Franchise, 1891, pag. 429. — Hertslet E.,
The Map of Africa by Treaty (London 1896), IT, pp. 886, 887.
ftladeira, Azors, Cap Verde Islands.
Morclet, Iles Arorcs (Paris 1860). — Schultze, Die Insel Madeira (Stuttgart 1864).—
— Doeltcr C, Die Vulkanc der Capverdischen Inseln und ihre Producte (Leipzig 1881). —
Brown A. S., Madeira and the Canary Islands (London 1891).
Senegambia.
.Journal Officiel, lBOctobre 1882, 20 Juillet, 28 Octobre 1890, Fevrier, Hi Mars 1891,
14 ct 27 Avril 1891. — Annales Senegalaiscs de 1854 ;i 1885, suivies des traites passes
avee les indigenes (Paris 1885). — Annuaire du Senegal 1888 seqq. — Le Brim Bcnaiid,
Les possessions franeaises do rAfrique occidentale (Paris 1885). — Ancclle, Les explorations
an Senegal (Paris 1887). — Economists francais, 21 Janvier et 21 Juin 1888. — Faid-
herbe, Le Senegal (Paris 1889). —Bulletin Societe de Geographie (Paris 1889, pag. 180).—
Idem Bordeaux. 1889, page 614. — Wagner-Supan, Bcviilkerung der Erde, VIII., pag. 161.
— Revue franchise 1800, pp. 308 et 488; 1891, pag. 112. — Du Sorbier de la Tourasse
./., Au pays de Woloffs. Souvenir d'un traitant du Senegal (Tours 1897). — Bonnet G.,
Une mission au Sahara occidental (Paris 1896). — Hertslet E., The Map of Africa by
Treaty (London 1896), II, pp 539, 640. 14*
104
French Soudan. Guinea, Ivory Coast.
Bluebook, c 6906. — Journal Officio], 28 Mars 1883. Gallieni, Voyage au Soudan
francais (Paris 1886). — Faidherbe, Le Sou, Ian francais (Lille 1880). — Faidherbe, Le
gal. La Prance dans I'Afrique occidental e (Paris 1889). - Piroz /v., An Soudan francais
Paris 1889).- ! Cahiers coloniaux, pag. 118. — Revue francaise, 1889, pag. 705. —
Lea Colonies francaises Paris 1890, Vols. V et VI, pp. 1G0— '230). — Proces-verbaux
ct rapports du Congres colonial national (Paris 1890). — Gaffarel P., Le Senegal et lo
Soudan francais Paris 1890). - Revue ge'ographique, 1890, pag. 210. — La Mellacorde ct
la colonic de Sierra I. cone (Paris 1890\ - Wagnw-Supan, Bevolkerung der Erde, VIII.
ha 1891, pag. 165). — .Journal Officiel, 4 ct 17 Aout 1891. — Rcnseigncmonts snr
la situation des Colonics Nr. 35 — 38 (Paris 1S91). — Armand Sfc, Note sur les etal.lisse-
ments Francais de la C6te d'or (Paris 1S91). — Bingo; Cap., Du Niger au golfo do
Gnine'e par le pays de Kong et le Mossi (Paris 1891, 2 Vols.). — Idem, Deux campagnes
au Soudan francais (Paris 1891). — Parliamentary Papers 1892, Nr. 1. — Sander ml de, O.,
Soudan francais (Paris 1893). — Iiancon A., Lc Bondou. Etude de geographic et d'bistoire
aniennes de 1 08 i a nos jours (Bordeaux 1894). — Peroz, Commandant, Recit de cam-
pagne 1891 ct 1892 (Paris 1895). — Le Journal Officiel de I'Afrique occidentale Francaise.
— Hertslet E., The Map of Africa by Treaty (London 1896), II, pp. 582—587, 589—591.
British Possessions in West Africa.
Parliamentary Papers 1865—1869. — Bluebook, C 670, C 4642, C 4957, C 5357,
i 5373, C 5905, C 6354, and Reports of the Colonial office. — Papers relating II. M. colonial
possessions (London 1872, Beqq.). — London Gazette, 1875. — Deutscher Reichsanzeiger
vom 30. Januar 1875 und 4. December 1888. — Griffith, Sierra Leone, past, present and
future (London 1881). — Journal Officiel, 28 Mars 1883. — Banbury G. A., Sierra Leone
London 1888). - - London Gazette, 15th January 1886 and 4th December 1888. — La
Mellacoree et la colonie de Sierra Leone (Paris 1890). — Deutsches Kolonialblatt, 1890,
15. Juli. — Journal Officiel, 17 Aout 1891. — Ingham E., Sierra Leone after a hundred
years (London 1894). — Colonial reports Nr. 185 and 189. — La main-d'oeuvro aux
colonies. Documents Ofticiels. Bruxelles 1897 (Institut coloniale Internationale). — Hertslet E.,
The Map of Africa by Treaty (London 1896), I, pp. 365—384, 388-402, 405—432
4S4— 530; II. pp. 554— 567, 575— 581, 589—591, 596—604, 674—679; III, pp. 1048 -1058,
Liberia.
Parliamentary Papers 1892, Nr. 107. — United States' foreign Relations, 1879 seqq.
Wauwermans II.. Liberia. llistoire de la fondation d'un Etat Nigre Libre (Bruxelles
1885). — M c Cants Stewart T. t Liberia (New-York 1886). — Baurzeix P., La Republique
dc Liberia (Paris 1887). — Dutry, Liberia, son histoire, sa constitution et ses ressourccs (Gand
1887). — Petermann's Mittheilungen 1888, pag. 248. — Biittikofer J., Liberia (Amsterdam
1890, 2Bdc). — Me Pherson J. H. T.. History of Liberia (Baltimore 1891). — Cook O.
/•>., Third Report to the Board of Managers of the New-York State Colonisation Society.
i York 1896). — Hertslet E., The Map of Africa by Treaty (London 1896), II, pp.
575—581, 777 — 786.
Togoland.
Zdller 11.. Das Togoland (Stuttgart 1885). — Kolnische Zeitung vom 25. April 1887
- Deutsche WeiCbucher 1881 ff. (1. Februar 1886). — Deutscher Reichsanzeiger 1884 ff. —
Danckeltnann, Freiherr von, Mittheilungen aus den deutschen Schutzgebieten (1888 ff.).
— Deutsche Kolonialzeitung 1888 ff. besonders 10. Juli 1890. — Deutsches Kolonialblatt
1889 ff. — Petermann's Mittheilungen, 1890 pag. 194; 1897, pag. 270 f.
105
Dahomey.
Bluebook, C 5905. — Burton B., Mission to Gelcle king of Dahomey (London
1864, 2 Vols.). — Les Colonies franchises (Paris, Vol. VI). — Albeca, A. L., Les etablissements
francais du golfe de Benin (Paris 1889). — Nineteenth Century, 1890, October. — Revue
francaise, 1890, pag. 694. — Nicolas W., L'Expedition du Dahomey en 1890 (Paris 1892).
— Barbou, Histoire de la guerre au Dahomey (Paris 1893). — Dalzel, The history of
Dahomey (London 1893). — Journal Ofticiel, 22 Juin 1894. — Aublet E., La guerre an
Dahomey (Paris 1 894, 2 Vols.). — Decoeur, Bulletin du Comite de l'Afrique francaise,
1895, Nr. 7. — Foa E, Le Dahomey (Paris 1895). — tV Albeca A. L. , La France au
Dahomey (Paris 1895). — Tontee, Dahome, Niger, Touareg (Paris 1897). — Hertslet E.,
The Map of Africa by Treaty (London 1896, 3 Vols), I, pp. 247—257; III, page 998. —
Reichsanzeiger, 19. October 1897. — Deutsches Kolonialblatt, 27. October 1897.
C ameroon.
Bluebook 1880, (Slave Trade) Nr. 4. — Deutsche Weifibiicher 1884 ff. —Bulletin des lois
de la Republique Francaise Nr. 888 (Paris 1885). — Beichenow, Die deutsche Kolonie Kame-
run (Berlin 1885). — National-Zeitung, 15. Februar 1885. — Deutscher Reichsanzeiger.
20. Juni 1885, August 1886, 10. Juli 1890. — Correspondence respecting affaires in the
Cameroons (London 1885). — Danckelmann, Freiherr con, Mittheilungen aus den deutschen
Schutzgebieten (Berlin 1888 seqq.). — Deutsches Kolonialblatt, 1888 ff. (besonders 1894,
Nr. 8). — Journal Ofticiel, 14 Aout 1894. — Deutsche Kolonialzeitung, 1889 ff. — Morgen
C, Durch Kamerun von Slid nach Nord (Leipzig 1893). — Passarge S., Adamaua
(Berlin 1S95). — Koschitzky, Deutsche Kolonialgeschichte (2 Bde.). — Zintgraff E., Nord-
Kamerun (Berlin 1895). — Hertslet E.. The Map of Africa by Treaty (London 1896), II.
pp. 59G-604, 612—614, 658—662; III, pp. 999-1003, 1048—1058.
French Congo.
Parliamentary Papers 1895, Nr. 5. — Bluebook, C 4279. — Bulletin des lois de la
Republique Francaise Nr. 888 (7 Fevrier 1885). — Journal Officiel, Fevrier 1885, 28 Avril
1886, 3 Mai 1891. — Compte rendu des seances de la Societe de Geographic de Paris
1885—1896. — La Gazette geographique 1886, pag. 410. — Iradier M., Africa (Victoria
1887,2 Vols.).— Bulletin Societe de Geographie commerciale (Paris 1888, Nr. 7). —Santos
e Silva J. E. de, Esboeo historico do Congo e Loango nos tempos modernos (Lisboa 1888).
— Guiral-Kinckel d'Herculais, Le Congo Fran v ais (Paris 1889). — Les Colonies fran-
eaises (Paris 1890, Vol. VI, pp. 1—60). — Proces-verbaux et rapports du Congres colonial
national (Paris 1890). — Revue francaise, 1891, pag. 929. — Wagner-Supan, Bevolkcrung
der Erde, VIII. (Gotha 1892, pag. 170 ff.). — Deutsches Kolonialblatt, 1894, Nr. 8. —
Journal Ofticiel, 14 Aout 1894. — Mouvement geographique 1894, pag. 72; 1891, pag. 60; 1888,
pp. 62, 242. — Documents parlamentaires 1894, 28. Mai. pp. 813—856. — Revue generate.
Aout 1804. — Hertslet E., The Map of Africa by Treaty (London 1896), I, pp. 98, 99,
207—215, 298; III, pp. 999, 1059 J
The Congo State.
Parliamentary Papers 1894, Nr. 4, 5, 15. — Bluebook, C 7360, C 3885. — Bulletin
Officiel de l'Etat Independant du Congo 1887, pag. 49. — Wuuters A J., Les Beiges au
Congo (Bruxellea 1884). — Petermann's Mittheilungen 1885 pag. 136 ff. — Faure Ch., La
conference africainc do Berlin (Geneve 1885). — Documents diplomatiques. Affaires du
Congo 1884— 18*7. — Stanley H. M., The Congo and the founding of its Vwr Stale
(London 1885), II, pp. 378 — 15s. - Le Mouvement geographique 1885—1896 (1888, pag.
62; 1890, pp. 78et91. 1891, pag. 60; 1894, Nr. 8, pp. 29, 32,71, 74 et 95; 1895, pp. 20-38,
106
_ Moynier G La Fondation de l'Ktat [ndependani da Congo au point de vue
juridique [Paris 1887> - Banning, Le partage politique de I'Afrique (1888). — Du Fief,
Bulletin Soeiet.5 Beige de g<5ographie 1890, pp. 377-467. - Documents diplomatiques
S | 88 4 \,; \n Bulletin, Officiel, 1888, pag. 240; 1891, pag. 213; 1894, pag. 22.—
Berlin Act, 26th February 1886. Brussels Acl 2nd July 1890. - Wagner-Supan, Be-
volkerung der Erde, VIII. (Gotha 1892, pp. 173-178). - Le Congo illustrd, 1893 seqq. -
l.iwo jaune 189V - Revue des Deux Mondes, 1895, pp. 477. 953 - Drooymans H.,
Le Congo Bruxelles 1895). - Chapaux A., Le Congo bistorique, diplomatique, physique, poli-
tique etc. iBruxelles 1894). - Fredericks ./.. Manuel de gcSographie de PEtat Independani
du Congo (Bruxelles L895). — Wautets A.J. Bibliographic du Congo 1880-1895 (Bruxelles
1895 pp 21—36, 301—309. Petermann's Mittheilungen 1896, pag. 83. — Ilinde S.
1 ' lie Fall of the Congo Arabs (London 1897). -■ Hertslet E., The Map of Africa by
tj London 1896), 1. pp. -18-100. 191-246; III, pp. 1008-1015, 1017, 1021, 1022,
inn- 1047. 1059—1061.
British Islands in the Atlantic Ocean. Walfish Bay.
Colonial Office List Nr. 275 — Melliss, St. Helena a physical, historical and topo-
graphical description (London 1875). — Gill, Six month's residence on the island of Ascen-
sion (London 1878). — Brooke, History of St, Helena. — Deutscbes Angra Pequena-AVeiK-
buch, pag 45.
Niger Coast Protectorate.
London Gazette, 5th June 1885, 13th May 1893. — Deutscbes Weifibuch 1888, VII
pag 5i, _ Mockler-Ferryman A. F., Up the Niger, narrative of Major Claude Macdonald's
mission to the Niger and Benue etc. (London 1892). — Hertslet E., The Map of Africa
by Treaty (London 1896), I, pp. 439—479, 573, 574; II, pp. 658— 6G1 ; III, pp.^972— 975;
981—984. — Diplomatic and consular reports on trade and finance. Africa report for the
years 1S95— 1896 of the administration of the Niger Coast Protectorate (London 1897).
Niger Territories.
Report by Dr. Baikie on the geographical position of the countries in the neighbour-
hood of the Niger (London 1863). — Bolilfs G., Quer durch Afrika (Leipzig 1874, 2 Bde.).
— Thomson J., Sokoto (London 1886). — London Gazette, 13th July 1884, 26th August 1886
and 20th October 1887. — Richardson It., Story of the Niger (London 1838). — Bluebook,
i 5905. — Deutscbes Weifibuch 1889, 7. Th.— Monteil, De St. Louis a Tripolis (Paris 1895). —
Annual reports of the River Niger Company. — L'Afrique francaise, 1896, pag. 40. — Reyels-
peryer G.. La France et l'Angleterre sur le Niger. La liberte do la navigation du fleuve
is 1896). — Pillet A., La Liberte de Navigation du Niger. (Paris 1896.) — Hertslet E.,
The Map of Africa by Treaty (London 1896), I. pp. 439—479; II, pp. 658-661; III, pp.
972—975, 981—984, 1018, 1019.
Tshad Lake Countries.
Barih II.., Reisen und Entdeckungen in Nord- und Central-Afrika (Gotha, 1857 IV.
5 Bde.). — liohlfs G., Quer durch Afrika (Leipzig 1874, 2 Bde.). — Nachtiyal G., Sahara
und Sudan (Berlin 1879 If., 3 Ldc.). — Thomson J., Sokoto (London 1886). — Stau-
dinyer J.. Im Herzen der Ilaussa-Lander (Berlin 1889). — Monteil, De St. Louis a Tripolis
par le lac Tchad (Paris 1895). — Robinson Ch. 11., Baussaland (London 1897).
Portuguese West Africa (Guinea, Senegal, Angola).
Parliamentary Papers 1890— 1891, Nr. 2. 1894, Nr. 15. — Bluebook, C 5918, C 6212
and C C370. — Cordeiro L., Portugal and the Congo (London 1883). — Correspondence
107
relative to Negotiations between Great Britain and Portugal for conclusion of the Congo
Treaty 1882—1884 (London 1884). — Boletin da Sociedade de Geographia de Lisboa 1885
— 1886, 1887 Nr. 6 et 8, 1889 pag. 4G5. — La Gazette Geographique 1886, pag. 410. — Libr.
blanc. 1887. — Deutscher Reichsanzeiger, 30. December 1886 und 1. Juli 1887. —
Petermann's Mittheilungen 1888, pag. 248. — Bulletin Societe de Geographie commerciale
(Bordeaux 1888, Nr. 4). — Santos e Silra de J. E., Esboco historico do Congo e Loango nos
tempos modernos (Lisboa 1888). — Carvalho H. A. de, Expedicao Portugueza ao Muatianvua
(Lisboa 1889)- — Idem, Lubuco (Lisboa 1889). — Brosselard II., La Guinee portugaise et les
possessions francaises voisines (Lille 1890). — Carvalho II. A. de, Lunda on os Estados do Mua-
tianvua dominio da soberania de Portugal (Lisboa 1890). — London Gazette, 26 th August 1890. —
Weale J. P., The truth about the Portuguese in Africa (London 1891). — Diario do governo.
12. October 1891. — Deutsches Kolonialblatt, 15. Juli 1890, 1891 pag. 520. — London
Gazette, 15th May 1891. — Diario 22nd June 1892. — Mouvement geographique 1894, Nr. 8.
— Petermann's Mittheilungen 1896, pag. 89. — Van Iseghem A., Les iles portugaises de
l'Afrique (Bruxelles 1807). — Scottish Geographical Magazine, Vol. XII, Nr. 11. —
Hertblet E., The Map of Africa by Treaty (London 1896), II, pp. 683-692, 712—747:
III. pp. 1004-1015.
German South West Africa.
Angra PequeSa (London 1884). — Arrangement between Great Britain and Germany
relative to their respective Spheres in Africa (London 1885). — Deutsches Weifibuch, Angra
Pequena, 1885. — Deutscher Reichsanzeiger, 2. December 1885, 7. April 1886, 30. De-
cember 1886. — Mittheilungen aus den deutschen Schutzgebietcn, 1887 ff. — Deutsche
Kolonialzeitung von 1888 ab. — Deutsches Kolonialblatt, 1889 bis 15. Juli 1890. — SchinzlL.
Deutsch Sudwest-Afrika (Oldenburg und Leipzig 1891). — Wagner-Supan, Bevolkerung der
Erde, VIIL (Gotha 1892, pag. 186). — Petermann's Mittheilungen, 1894 pag. 194, 1896
pag. 88. — Dove K, Deutsch-Siidwest-Afrika (Berlin 1896). — Frangois H. von, Nama
und Damara (Magdeburg 1896). — Hertslet E , The Map of Africa by Treaty (London 1896),
I, pp.317— 319; II, pp. 608- 611. — Billow F.J. r on, Drei Jahre im Lande Hcndrik "Witboois
(Berlin 1895, 2. Auflage 1897).
Cape Colony.
London Gazette 18th January and 15th April 1806. - Chase J. C. and Wilmoth A..
History of the Colony of the Cape of Good Hope (London 1870). — Trollope A., South
Africa (London 1878, 2 Vols.). — The general directory and guidebook to the Cape of Good
Hope and its dependencies as well as the Free State, Transvaal and Natal. — Granville,
Guide to South Africa (7th edition, London 1881).— Statham F. 11., Blacks, Boers and British
(London 1882). — Cape Gazette. Extraordinary, 25th March 1885. — South African books
on native affairs 1885—1896 (Capetown), — The Cape of Good Hope Govrnment Gazette
1S85.— Parliamentary ,,Reports" in „The Times". — Colonial Office's listes 1885—1896. —
Noble, Official handbook History, productions and rcssources of the Capo of Good Hope.
(Capetown, 1886 seqq.). — Moodie D. C. F., The history of the battles of the British, the
Boers and the Zulus in Southern Africa (Capetown 1888, 2 Vols.). — Gibbs E. J., England
and South Africa (London 1889). — Journal Manchester Geographical Society 1889, page 201.
— Theul G. M., History of South Africa the republics and native territories from 1854 to
-1872 (London 1889). — Lelu I'.. L'Afrique du Sud. Histoiro de la colonic anglaise du Cap
de Bonne-Esperance et dc scs annexes (Paris 1890). — London Gazette, 10th October 1884
31st July 1887, 2nd August 1887, 20th December L889, 17th January 1890, 15th May 1891.
— Bluebook, C 4588, C 4194, C 426."-. C 1590, C 4643, C 5022, C 5143, C 5331, C 5624
C 5918, C 6217, C 7962 and „Rcports' . — Silver S. W. and Comp., Handbook to South
Africa (1st edition 1880, 4th edition London 1891). — Juta's Map of South Africa, 1 : 2,500.000
(London 1891). — Murray H. W '.. South Africa from Arab domination to British Rule
ION
(London L89J — Wagner- Supan, Bevolkerung der Erde, VIII. (Gotha 1892, pap-. 197.)
— Worsfold W. B., South Africa (London L895). — Noble ./., Handbook III. off. of the
Cape Sand outh Africa 'Capetown 1896). — Petermann's Mittheilungen 1896, pag. 88. —
//■ tslet I'. The Map of Africa bj Treatj (London 1896), [, pp. 841— 362 ; II pp. 072, 073.
Bechuanaland.
Holub /•'.. SiebenJahre in Sttd-Afrika (Wien 1880, 2 Bde.). — London Gazette, 30th
January 1885. — Mackenzie ■>.. Austral-Africa loosing- it or ruling' it (London 1887,
2 Vols.). — Bluebook, (' 4643, C 1432, C 4194, C 4588, C 6488, C 5918 und C 7902. —
Dentscher Reichsanzeiger, 9. Mai 1891. — Wagner-Supan, Bevolkerung der Erde, VIII.
Qotha 1892, pag. 195). — Hertslei E.,The Map of Africa byTreaty (London 1890), I, pp.
337 : 111. pp. '.".to. 991.
Rhodesia, British Zambesia.
Torres Campos R., Portugal o Inglaterra en el Africa Austral (Boletim da Socicdad de
jraphia (Madrid 1889, pag. 333). — London Gazette, 25th April 1888, 20th December 1889,
26th August 1890, 27th July 1894. — Bluebook, C 4643, C 5363, C 5524, C 5918, C 0212,
C 6370, (' GG99, C 7383, C 7037. — Waller H.. Nyassaland, Great Britain's case against
Portugal (London 1890). — Proceedings of the Royal Geographical Society (London 1890,
pp. 150, 049). — Mello C. de, Os Ingleses na Africa Austral (Lisboa 1890). — Silver S.
IT. and Comp., Handbook to South Africa (London 1891, pag. 382). — Paica de Andrade.
Manica (London 1891). — Mathers E. P., Zambesia (London 1891). — Wagner-Supan,
Bevolkerung der Erde, VIII. (Gotha 1892, pag. 183). — Knight E. F., Rhodesia of today
London 1895) — Macliado J., O Territorio de Manica etc. (Boletin Sociedade de Geographia
(Lisboa 1895, pag. 491). — Colquhoon A., Matabeleland (London). — Wilmot A., Monomo-
tapa (Rhodesia) (London 1890). — Selous F. C, Sunshine and storm in Rhodesia (London,
1896). — Eing J., Dr. Jameson's Raid. Its causes and conserpiences (London 1890). —
Baden-Powell R. S. S., The Matabele Campaign 1896 (London 1897). — Herts\et E., The Map
(if Africa l.y Treaty i London 1890, 3 Vols.) I, pp. 174 — 190. Ill, pp. 987—989, 1037 — 1040.
Hritish Central Africa and Protectorate (Nyassaland).
Bluebook, C 7504, C 7611. —Scott. Geographical Magazine 1888, Nr. 6, 1889 page
371. — Cordeiro L . La question du Zaire. Droits du Portugal (Lisbonne 1883.). —
Proceedings of the Koyal Geographical Society (London 1890, page 713). — Fort-
nightly Bevies 1890, page 140. — Markus Ferrao, La question souslevee entrc 1'An-
gleterre ct le Portugal (Lisboa 1890). — Mello C. de, A questao Inglesa (Lisboa 1 890). —
Idem, Os Ingleses na Africa Austral (Lisboa 1890). — Carvalho H. A. de, Os caes bri-
tannicos ou a Nyassaland do Review Horace Waller (Lisboa 1890). — Reis J. B., Os Portu-
gueses na rcgiao do Nyassa (Lisboa 1S90). — Barros Gomez II. de, A questao do Zumbo
(Lisboa 1890). — London Gazette, 15th -May 1891, 24th February 1893. — Rankin, D.J.,
11k Zambesi and Nyassaland (London and Edinburg 1833). — London Gazette, 22nd
February 1893. — Parliamentary Papers 1894, Nr. 6; 1895, Nr. 2. — British Central
African Gazette 1890. — Johnston II., British Central Africa (London 1*97). — llertslet E.,
The Map of Africa by Treaty (London 1896), III, pp. 1025—1028.
Orange Republic.
Vide Cape Colony and South African Republic — Bluebook, C 5238. — Jeppe^s,
Transvaal Almanac and Directory (Capetown). — Silver S. W. and Comp., Handbook to
South Africa (London 1891, pages 431 seqq.) — llertslet E., The Map of Africa by Treaty
(London 1896), II. pp. 813—819.
109
Basutolaiul, Natal, Zululand, Tongoland.
Vide Cape Colony. — Natal Bluebooks. — Natal Ordinances. — Natal Almanacs (Pieter-
maritzburg). — Peace W., Our Colony of Natal (London 1884). — Natal Official handbook
etc. (London 1886). — Chamber commercial journal (London 1888, page 59). — Silver S. W.
and Corny., Handbook to South Africa (London 1891, pages 427 seqq.). — Wagner-Supan,
Bevolkerung der Erde, VIII. (Gotha 1892, pag. 1G6). — London Gazette, 7th March 1898, 5th
November 1895. — Russel E., Natal the land and its story (Pietermaritzburg 1894). —
Precis of information concerning Zululand (London 1895). — Bluebook, C 4645, C 5143,
C 5143, C 5331, C 5522, C 6200, C 6201, C 7393, C 7395, C 7780, C 7878 and "Keports".
— Wagner-Supan, Bevolkerung der Erde, VIII., pag. 197. — London Gazette, 11th June
1895. — Colonial reports Nr. 186. — Petermann's Mittheilungen 1896, pag. 186. — Hertslet E..
The Map of Africa by Treaty (London 1896), I, pp. 329—332, 434—437, 529—536 ; III.
pp. 1067, 1068, 1075—1078.
South African Republic (Transvaal).
Bluebook, C 2695, C 3114, C 3841, C 3914, C 4214, C 4432, C 4644, C 4695,
C 4980, C 5331, C 5892, C 6200, C 6217, C 7611, C 8308. — Schets Kaart aantoonende
de grenslynen in Zuid Afrika etc. Scale 1:2,85 Mill. (Pretoria 1869). — Wagner-
Supan, Bevolkerung der Erde, VIII., pag. 190. — Silrer S. W., Handbook to the
Transvaal (London 1877, page 421). — Bluebook for Transvaal Province (Pretoria 1879). —
Transvaal Govrnment Gazette 1881 seqq. — Nixon J., The complete story of the Transvaal
from the "Great Trek" to the Convention of London (London 1885). — Theal G. M.,
History of the Boers in South Africa (London 1887). — Jeppe F., Transvaal Book Almanac
for 1887 (Maritzburg 1887). — Deutsches Kolonialblatt, 15. Juli 1890. — Fortnightly
Review 1890, page 283. — Blink H., De Zuid-Afrikaansche republiek en hare bewoners
(Amsterdam 1890). — Petermann's Mittheilungen 1892, pag. 129. — Wagner-Supan, Bevol-
kerung der Erde, VIII. (Gotha 1892, pag. 188). — Petermann's Mittheilungen 1896, pag. 88.
— L'Afrique Francaise 1896, pag. 361. — King J., Dr. Jameson's Raid. Its causes and
consequences (London 1896). — Mermeix, Le Transvaal et la Chartered (2 edition, Paris 1897).
— Hertslet E., The Map of Africa by Treaty (London 1896), II, pp. 704-712, 822—828,
839—879, 903; III, pp. 1029—1036.
Portuguese East Africa.
Parliamentary Papers, 1875, Nr. 1; 1890-1891, Nr. 2 — Bluebook, C6370. — Boletin
< Hticial 1885 seqq. — Boletin da Sociedade de Geographia de Lisboa 1885 — 1896, (1885,
pag. 495). — Documentos apresentados as Cortes na sessao legisl. de 1886 — 1896. (Ne-
gocios da Africa oriental e central.) — Dcutscher Reichsanzeiger, 30. December 1886. —
Correspondence respecting the Delagoy Bay Railway (London 1889). — Libr. blanc. 1887.
— Carta da provincia de Mozambique (Ministro de Marinha) Es. 1:3 Mill. (Lisboa 1889).
— Correspondence respecting Portuguese Claims in South Africa (London 1890). — London
Gazette, 26th August 1890. — Marcel G., Les Portugais dans 1'Afriquo australe (Paris 1890).
— Cazenare L. de, Divisions politiques de la province do Mozambique (Rccueil. consul.
I. XII. pag. 208). — Cup* Ho et Lens, Quelques notes sur lVtablisscmcnt et les travaux
des Portugais au Manomotapa (Lisboa 1890). — U Andrade A., Reconhecimento do
Terreno da fronteira do Transvaal (Lisboa 1891). —Carta das possessors Portuguezas da
Africa meridional sogundo as convcncocs celebradas en 1891, 1:6 Mill. (Lisboa 1891).
— Murray /!. W., South Africa etc. (I. P., London 1891). — Diario, 22 Jun. 1892
— Wagner-Supan, BevBlkerung dor Erde, VIII. (Gotha 1892, pag. 181). — Petcr-
Count Kinaky: "The Diplomatist's Handbook for Africa". 15
10
mann's Mittheilungen 1896, pag. 89. — Naronha E de, Lourenco Marques o as suas
relacoes com a Africa do Sol. (Lisboa 1896.) — Theal G. M.. The Portuguese in South
Africa London 1896). — Hellwig Paul, l>ie Delagoa-Bai und ihre Bedeutung Ciir den
Handel [Berlin 1897 , — Hertslei /■.'.. The Map of Africa bj Treaty (London L896), II, pp.
698—708, 70.".— 717.
Madagascar and Dependencies.
Ellis, History of Madagascar (London 1838, 2 Vols.). — Meats, The story of Mada-
gascar (New Xbrk 1873). Qrandidief A.. Histoire physique, naturelle et politique de
Madagascar (Paris 1876 Beqq.). — Treaty concluded between France and Madagascar, 8th August
istis |.,»ih1uh 18815 sec also Parlianientary Tapers 1883, Nr. 4. — Vassicre P.,llistoirc de
Madagascar Paris 1884). — Cremazy P., Notice bibliographique sur Madagascar (St. Denis
1884). — Shaw G. If, Madagascar and France (London 1885). — Saillens 11., Nos droits
but Madgascar etc. (Paris 1885). — The Antananarivo Annual and Madagascar Magazine
IV. Antananarivo and London 1885 seqq.). — Correspondence respecting treaty of 17th
December 1885 (London 188G) see also Parliamentary Papers 188(5, Nr. 2. — Livre Jaune
1880. — Guet J., Les origincs de Pile Bourbon et de la colonisation francaise a Mada-
ar (Paris 1838). — Le Chattier H. et Pellerin G., Madagascar depuis sa decouverte
jusqu'a nos jours (Paris 1888). — Les Colonies francaises (Paris 1800, Vol. 1). — Vignols
L., La France a Madagascar de 1(574 a 1750 (Eevue de geographic 1800, pp. 202, 360).
— Grandidier A., Histoire de la geographic de Madagascar (2 edition, Paris 1803). —
Martineau A.. Madagascar en 1894 (Paris 1894). — Piolet J. B., Madagascar et les Hovas
(Paris 1805). — Brunei L., La France a Madagascar 1815—1805 (Paris 1895). — Colin
K. it Si((i>i P., Madagascar et sa mission catholique (Paris 1895). — Livre jaune 1896.
— Renseignements coloniaux 1896, pag. 53. — L'Afrique Francaise 1896, pp. 183, 204,
245. — Hanotaux G., L'affaire de Madagascar (Paris 1896). — Knigih E., Madagascar in
War Time (London 1896). — Hertslet E., The Map of Africa by Treaty (London 1896),
II. pp. 571, ."»72. 788—800. — Le Journal Officiel de Madagascar 1897.
Mauritius and Dependencies.
Flemyng, Mauritius or the Isle of France (London 1862). — Bonaparte R., Le premier
Ktablissement des Neerlandais a Maurice (Paris 1890). — Leclercq «/., Au pays de Paul et
Virginie (Paris 1895). — The Mauritius Almanac 1885—1896. — Brauer A. Dr., Die
Seychellen (Ges. fur Erdkunde, Berlin, 16. Juni 1896). — The Geographical Journal, 1896,
October.
Reunion and Dependencies.
Drasche-Wartimberg, Die Insel Reunion (Wien 1877). — Guet J., Les origines de
l'ile Bourbon (Paris 1887). — Hue, La Reunion et Madagascar^ (Paris 1890).
The Comoro Islands.
Grerey, Essai sur les Comores (Pondichery 1870). — Genin'J., Madagascar, les lies
Comores. Mayotte etc. (Paris 1889). — Les Colonies francaises (Paris 1800, Vol. I). —
Arnnrres, Dr., Les lies Comores Paris 1890).
Zanzibar.
List of Orders in Council, 1866—1893. — New, Life, wanderings and labours in
Eastern Africa (London 1873). — Correspondences relating to Zanzibar (London 1886 seqq.).
— Deutscher Reichsanzeiger, 30. December 1886. — Schmidt K. W., Sansibar (Leipzig
1888). — Revue de geographic 1890, pag. 297. — London Gazette, 4th November 1890.
Ill
9th February 1892, "21st July 1893. — Baumaun 0., Die Insel Zanzibar (Leipzig 1897).
— Idem, Die Insel Pemba (Leipzig 1897). — Gazette for Zanzibar and East Africa
20th January 1897. — Mc Dermott, British East Africa. (London 1893), pp. 264, 268
B eqq. _ Parliamentary Papers 1894, Nr. 1. — Bluebook C 5578, C 5603. — Hertslet E.
The Map of Africa by Treaty (London 1896), II, pp. 547, 570, 605 -607, 615-622, 750—770,
925—966, 995 ; III, 992—994.
German East Africa.
Die Lage in Afrika unmittelbar vor und nach dem deutsch-englischen Vertrage vom
politischen Standpunkte aus betrachtet (Dresden 1870). — National-Zeitung 1884, pag. 3012.—
Denkschrift liber die deutschen Schutzgebiete 1884—1886 (II, pag. 44), und vom 2. December
1885 (III, pag. 201). — Arrangement between Great Britain and Germany relative to their
respective Spheres in Africa (London 1885). — WeiCbiicher 1885 ff., besonders Nr. 56, VIII,
XI, X, 1890 — 1891. — Deutscher Keichsanzeiger (1885—1896), besonders 3. Marz 1885;
30. November 1886; 21. Juli 1887; 22. October 1889; 10. Juli 1890. — Parliamentary Papers
1886, Nr. 1; 1887, Nr. 3; 1890, Nr. 2. — Petermann's Mittheilungen 1887, pp. 58 und 123. —
Kolonialpolitische (Jorrespondenz vom 26. Februar 1887. — Mittheilungen aus den deutschen
Schutzgebieten 1887 sctpj. — Deutsche Kolonialzeitung von 1888 ab. — Meinecke, Kolo-
niales Jahrbuch 1888, pag. 237. — Wagner, Deutsch-Ostafrika (Berlin 1888). — Idem, Die
deutsch-ostafrikanische Kolonie in ihrer Entstehungsgeschichte etc. (Berlin 1889). — Deutsches
Kolonialblatt 1889 ff., besonders 15. Juli 1890. — Correspondence respective Anglo-German
Agreement relating to Africa and Heligoland (London 1890). — Forster B., Deutsch-
Ostafrika (Leipzig 1890). — Petermann's Mittheilungen 1890, pag. 194. — Vohsen E., Zum
deutsch-englischen Vertrag (Berlin 1890). — Schroeder-Poggelow, Unsere Afrika-Politik in
den letzten zwei Jahren (Berlin 1890). — Wagner- Supan, Bevblkerung der Erde, VIII.
(Gotha 1892, pag. 179). — Beichard P., Deutsch-Ostafrika (Leipzig 1892). — Schmidt R.,
Geschichte des Araber-Aufstandes in Ostafrika (Frankfurt a. 0. 1892). — Mc Dermott P. L.,
British East Africa (London 1893), Appendices. — Peters K, Das deutsch-ostafrikanische
Schutzgebiet (Miinchen und Leipzig 1895). — Stuhlmann F., Mit Emin Pascha etc. (Berlin
1897 ). _ Hertslet E., The Map of Africa by Treaty (London 1896), I, pp. 303—316; II,
pp. 623—627, 630—657, 754-770; III, pp. 985, 1024.
British East Africa.
Diplomatic and consular reports on trade and finance 1894. — Wilson C. T. and
Felkin P. W., Uganda and the Egyptian Soudan (London 1882, 2 Vols.). — Deutscher
Keichsanzeiger, 30. December 1886. — London Gazette, 7th September 1888, 4th and 25th
November 1890, 22nd November 1890, 19th June 1894, 15th June 1895 and 1st September
1896. — The story of the Uganda Mission (London 1889). -- Bluebook, C 6555, C 7225,
Parliamentary Papers Africa Nr. 4(1892), Nr. 25(1894). — Deutsches Kolonialblatt, 15. Juli
!390. — Stock S., The story of Uganda and the Victoria Nyanza Mission (London 1892). —
British East Africa and Uganda (London 1892). — L'Ouganda et les agissements do la
compagnie anglaise "East Africa" (Paris 1892). — Bentleg E., Handbook to the Uganda
Question etc. (London 1892). — Mc Dermott P. L., British East Africa or Ibea. A history
of the formation and work of the Imperial British East Africa Company (London 1893),
pp. 263, 376. — Quaterly Kcviow 1893 (Uganda). — Lugard F. D., The Kiso of our
East African Impire (London 1893 2 Vols.). — Handbook of British East Africa, prepared in
Intelligence Division, War Oftice (London 1893). — L'Ouganda (Paris 1893.) — Ashe P.,
Chronicles of Uganda (London 1894). — Colville, Henry, Sir, The I. ami of the Nile Springs
being chiefly an account of how we fought Kabaroga. (Now York 1895). — L'Afrique
Franchise 1896, pag. 256. — Hertslet E., The Map of Africa by Treaty (London 1896),
I, pp. 107-172; II, pp. 754—770; III, pp. 995-997, 1016, 1017, 1069-1071.
16*
112
British Somaliland and Sokotra.
rransactions Bombay Geographical Society 1846, page 111; 1850, page 129. Robinson,
tra (London 1878). - Revoil <!.. Voyage an Cap dea Aromates (Paris 1880). — Idem,
La \alLc du Daror (Paris 1882). Paulitachke Ph., Gcographiselic Krforschung der Adal-
Lander etc. (Leipzig 1884 , Proceedings of the R. G. S. London, 1885, Octobor. —
Hunter F., Harar London 18>I — Petermann's Mittheilungen 1887, pag. 32. — Colonial
Office list. 1891, page 310 Parliamentary Papers 1894, Nr. 1, 17. — Report on the
reconnaissance of the Northern Somaliland (1891). — Swayne 11. G. C, 17 trips in Somaliland
(London 1895). — Hertslet A'.. The Map of Africa by Treatj London 1896), II, pp. 669,
111. pp. 976—980.
French Possessions of the Gulf of Aden.
Journal Officiel, 25 Decembre 1880. — Rivoyre D. de, Oboe (Paris 1883). —
Documents parlamentaires, Nbvembre 1885, pag. 1022. — Journal Officiel, 4 Mars 1886.
— Faurot, Oboe (Paris 1886). — Les Colonics francaises (Paris 1890, Vols. VI, pp. 241— 2*8).
— Salma L. de, Obock (Paris 1893). — Parliamentary Papers 1894, Nr. 1. — L'Afriquc
Francaise, 1896, pag. 188. — I. R. United Service I, pag. 41 (1897), 623-630: Obock
etc. - Vanderheym, Cinq tnois avec le Negous Menelic (Paris 1896). — Hertslet E., The
Map of Africa by Treaty (London 1896), I, pp. 269-275; III, pp. 976—980.
Italian Possessions in North East Africa.
Guillain M . Documents sur l'histoire, la gvographie et le commerce de l'Afrique orien-
tal (Paris 1856, 3- Vols.). — Provedimenti per la costituzione e Pordinamento di una colonia
italiana in Assab (Minist. d. a. ff. est. 1882, 1886). — Possessi o protettorati in Africa
(Annuario statistio italiano), 1885 seqq. — Atti parlamentari XVI., 1886. — Documenti diplo-
matici presentati al parlamento italiano (Libri verdi. XIV, XV, XVII, XVIII), 24. Aprile,
•_' Maggio e 9. Novembre 1888, 17. Dicembre 1880, 4. Marzo 1890, 17. Marzo 1891
16. Aprile 1891, 25. Luglio 1895 e 27. Aprile 1896. — Mc Dermott, P. L. British East Africa
(London 189.']). Appendices. — Africa Italiana (Journal). — Austria, 1889, pag. 506. —
Relatione annuale sulla Colonia Eritrea. — Parliamentary Papers 1894, Nr. 17. — Brucli-
hausen v., Die Italiener in Afrika (Beiheft zum Militarischen Wochenblatt 1895, pag. 317).
— L'Afrique Francaise, 1896, pag. 397. — Eritrea: La colonia italiana in Africa e Francesco
» rispi, il parlamento ed il paese (Roma 1896). — Hertslet E., The Map ol Africa by Treaty
(London 1896), II. pp. 66.J— 670, 772-776, 888, 889, 949—960; III, pp. 1072-1074.
Abyssinia.
Bruce J., Travels etc. (Edinburg 1790, 5 Vols.). — Salt H., Account etc. (London
1814). — Rochet d'Hericourt C. E. II., Voyage sur la cote orientalc de la Mcr Rouge (Paris
1841). — Harris W. C, The highlands of Aethiopia (London 1844, 3 Vols.). — Rochet d'Heri-
court C. 1.. H., Voyage sur la cote orientalc de la Mer Rouge (Paris 1818). — Bulletin
de la Socictc Khediviale de Gcographie 1876, pag. 351. — Rohlfs G., Mcine Mission etc.
Leipzig 1883). — PaulitschTce Ph., Geographische Erforschung der Adal-Liinder etc. (Leipzig
1884 . — Caix de Saint- Ay mour de, La France en Ethiopie etc. (Paris 1886). — Paulit-
schke PI'., Harar (Leipzig 1888). — Mantegazza I'.. Da Massaua a Saati (Milano 1888).
— Documenti diplomatici presentati al parlamento Italiano (Libri verdi), 1890, pp. 127,
128, -'70. 273, 376, 434; 2. ser. pag. 19; 1891, pag. 101. — Costi, Storia d'Etiopia (Milano
1890). — Bordli J.. Lthiopie meridionale (Paris 1890). — Sapeto G., Etiopia (Roma 1890).
— Bolletino della Societa Africana d'ltalia (Sez. Napolet.) 1890, pag. 136. — Constantin
de, L'Archimandritc PaTsi et P Ataman Achinoff. Uno expedition religieuse en Abyssinie
(Paris 1891). — Nerazzini, La conquista mussulmana dell' Etiopia nel secolo XVI. (Roma
113
1S01). — Fumagalli G., Bibliogratia etiopica (Milano 1893). — 1'aronclli F, Amba Alagi
e Makale (Como 189G). — Robecchi-Bricchetti L., Nell' Harrar (Milano 1896). — Hertslet F.,
The Map of Africa by Treaty (London 1896), I, pp. 1—18. — Vigneras S., Une mission
francaise en Abyssinie (Paris 1897). — D'Abbadie A. et Paulitschke Ph., Foutoukh el-
Habacha (Paris 1898).
General.
Berlin Act of 26th February 1885. — Rambaud, La Erance coloniale (Paris 1886
— Convention between the govrnments of Great Britain, Germany, Austria-Hungary.
France, Italy, Russia and Turkey relative to the finance of Egypt, signed at London.
18th March 1885 (London 1885). — Correspondence respecting the proposed international
convention for securing the free navigation of the Suez Canal (London 1888). — Petermann's
Mittheilungen, 1888, pp. 160 ff. — Actes de la conference de Bruxelles 1889—1890 et la
traite des esclaves en Afrique. (Bruxelles 1890, 3 Vols.). — Scarsez de Locqueneuille,
L'esclavage ses promoteurs et ses adversaires. Notes et documents etc. (Liege 1890). —
Vhilibert et Rollancl G., La France en Afrique et le Transsaharien (Paris 1890). — Corpo
di stato maggiore Italiano: Possedimenti e protettorati Europei in Africa 1890 (Roma 1890),
2. Edizione. — Rolland G., Le Transsaharien un an apres (Paris 1891). — Binger, Cap.,
Esclavage, islamisme et christianisme (Paris 1891). — Sabatier ft, Touat, Sahara et Soudan
(Paris 1891). — Foch A., Algerie, Sahara, Tchad etc. (Paris 1891). — Alls H., La conquete
du Tchad (Paris 1891). — Silva White A., On the comparative value of African Lands
(Scott. Geographical Magazine, 1891, page 191). — Idem, The development of Africa (London
1890). — Rawson R. W., The territorial partition of the coast of Africa (Proceedings R G. S.
London, 1884, pp. 615—632). — The Imperial Institute yearbook (London 1892 seqq.). -
Wagner-Supan, Die Bevolkerung der Erde, VIII. Supplement zu Petermann's Mittheilungen
Nr. 101 (Gotha 1892, pp. 139—202). — Scott Keltie J., The partition of Africa (London
1893). — Documents relatifs a, la repression de la traite des esclaves publics en execution
des articles LXXXI et suivant de l'acte general de Bruxelles 1892 (Bruxelles 1893). —
Sebillot A., Le Transafricain (Paris 1893). — Guenin E., Histoire de la colonisation
franchise, I. (Paris 1896). — Zimmermann Alfred, Die europaischen Kolonien. I. Band.
Die Kolonialpolitik Portugals und Spaniens in ihrer Entwickelung von den Anfiingen bis
zur Gegenwart (Berlin 1896). — Fitzner Rudolf, Deutsches Kolonialhandbuch. (Berlin
1896). — Chaudordu Cte. de, Considerations sur la politique exterieure et coloniale do la
France (Paris 1897). — Septans, Les expeditions anglaises en Afrique (Paris 1897). — Docu-
ments officiels. I. et II. Publication de l'Institut colonial international (Bruxelles. 2 serie.
Paris 1896 et 1897). — Meineclce G., Koloniales Jahrbuch. Beitrage und Mittheilungen aus
dcm Gebiet der Kolonialwissenschaft und Kolonialpolitik. 9. Jahrgang 1896 (Berlin 1897). —
Das Weifibuch. Thcil XVII. (Berlin 1897). — Lucas ft P., A historical Geography of the
British Colonics. Vols. 4: South and East Africa. Part 1: Historical, with maps; Part -J:
Geographical, with maps. (London 1897.) — Rouard de Card E., Les traites de protectnrat
conclus par la France en Afrique 1870—1895. (Paris 1897). — Brose Max, Die deutsche
Kolonialliteratur von 1884—1895 (Berlin 1897. Deutsche Kolonial-GesellschafU — Amman, de
Tannic coloniale de 1897 (Paris). — Institut colonial international: Les fonctionnains
coloniaux (Paris 1897). — Revue diplomatique et coloniale (Paris 1897). — De Clecq,
Collection of French Treaties. — Chalmers' Treaties. — Martens Recueil etc. — Janer
D. Flor., Tratatos de Espafia. — Hertslet' s Treaties. — Scott KelH^S, Statesman's Yearbook. —
Hertslet Ed. Sir, The Map of Africa by Treaty. 2nd edition 3 Vols. (London 1896.)
Maps.
Carte de l' Algerie (Service geographique do I'Arme'e) 1 : 50.000 (Paris lssi seqq.).
— Perrier, Carte de la Tunisie, 1 : 200.000 (Paris 1884—1886). — Monteil-Biiigrr, Carle
des fctabliBsements Francais du Senegal (Paris 1886). — Gaultier, Carte de V Algerie el de
11 1
la Tunisie Pari- 1887). Merensky, Original Map of South Africa, 1 : 2,500.000 (4th Edition,
Berlin 188 De Lannoy de Bissy R., Carlo do I'Afrique, 1 : 2,000.000 (Paris I8s«)
— Juta, Map of South Africa, l : 2,500.000 (London 1891). - Ravenstein /•:. G.,
A Map of Eastern Equatorial Africa, l : 1,000.000 (London 1882). — Habenicht H., Spcoial-
karte iron Afrika, 1 : 1,000.000 (3. Edition, Gotha 1892). — Kiepert B., Specialkarto von
Deutsch-Sudwestafrika, i 3,000.000 (Berlin 1893). Langhans P., Deutscher Kolonial-Atiaa
Gotha 1894 Chaurand de /.'. Carta dimostrativa della Etiopia, 1 : 1,000.000 (Roma
1894 — Debt s I '. Nouvelle carte de I'Egypte ft ses dependances, 1 : 3,000.000 (Berlin
i"-'.'">). — Binger, Carte du Haul Niger an golfe do Guine'c par lc pays do Kong et lo
Mossi, l : 1,000.000 (1'aris 1895). — Langhans P., Sudwestafrikanisches Schutzgcbiet,
I : 2,000.000 (Gotha 1896). Wauters A. J., Carte de I'Etat Indopondant du Congo,
Supplement Mouvement Gt ! ographique : J : -2.O00.000 (Bruxelles 1896). — Kiepert P., Karte
von Deutsch-Ostafrika, 1 : 300.000 (Berlin 1805 ff.). — Langhans Paul, Schutzgebieto
Kamerun and Togo in 1 Blattern mit 16 Nebenkarten, 1 : "2,000.000. — Idem, Ostafrikaniscbes
Schutzgehiet, 1 : 2,000.000 (Gotha 1897). — Hansen, Congo franeais, publie'e par le service
rraphique des colonies 1 : 1,500.000 (Paris 1895). — Wandkarte von Deutscli-Ostafrika.
Redigiert von Dr. Richard Kiepert. Blatter. 1 : 1,000.000 (Berlin). — Flotte de
Roquevaire P. de, Carte du Maroc ;i recbelle du l,000.000 e avec notice et index biblio-
graphique (Paris 1897). — Vuillot, P., Soudan francais et cote occidentale d'Afrique,
1 -1.000. oi H) (Paris 1897). — Bergltaus', Stieler's, Kiepert' s, Vidal de la Blache's, W. and
A. K. Johnston's Atlas.
Geographical Regi ster.
(The Figures refer to the number of the Page.)
A.
Abaj 97.
AbasuSn 89, 91.
Abba Garima 96.
'Abel el-Kury 90.
Abeoktitta 31, 35.
Abyssinia 93. 97.
Abome (Abomey) 35, 37.
Abu Klea 7.
Accra 30 f.
Adamawa (Adamaua) 40, 43.
Adda 30.
Addifuha 91.
Addis ababa 100.
Addo 35.
Adel 98.
Adeli 34.
Aden 90.
Adrar 19.
Adua 96.
Aegenni 37.
'Afar 91, 92.
Afrikijja 10.
Agaishe 36.
Agordat 7.
Ague 35 f.
Ain Salah 15.
Ajada 35.
Ajuda 35, 36.
Akim 30.
Akvvama 30.
Albert-Edward Lake 87.
Albert-Nyanza 50, 87.
Albreda 29.
Aldabra-Islands 82.
Alexandria 2.
Alfred County 70.
Algiers 12, 42.
Allmcemas 18.
Alina 17, 47.
Allada 35, 36.
Ama Kossa 61.
Amaoful 31.
Amatongo 72.
Ambabo 91.
Ambas Bay 45.
Amboella 55.
Amboland 50.
Ambriz 52, 54.
Amhara 97, 98.
Amirantes 80.
Anamaboe 30.
Aneho 34.
Angola 52, 54, 55, 65.
Ankori 87.
Annobon 45.
Antananarivo 79.
Antotto 99.
Appollonia 30.
Ardra 36.
Arguin 18, 21.
Aribinda 24.
Aroangva 65, 68.
Aroossi 97.
Arussi-Galla 94.
Asaba 41.
Ashanti 31.
Ascension 56.
Asdscher 7.
Asgar 7.
Asmara 96.
Assab 93, 94, 95.
Assinie 21, 26, 27.
Assinie' River 25.
Assumption 80, 82.
Astove 82.
Atbara 93.
Audsbila 8.
Aussa 94, 95.
Avon Lagoon 34.
Axim 30.
Azores 20.
B.
Bachunu 24.
Badagry 31.
Bating 23.
Baghirmi 8, 41.
Bahia del Oeste 18.
Bahr el-arab 6.
Bahr el-azraq 87.
Bahr el-ghasal 6, 53.
Bamaliti 61.
Bambara 24.
Bambuk 24.
Bangweolo Lake 50, 69.
Bardera 94.
Barka 8, 93.
Barolong 61.
Barotse 54, 55, 68.
Barraua (Barrawa) 21, 39.
Barua (Baruwa) 21, 39.
Bas de cote 25.
Bassam 24.
Bassas de India 79.
Basutoland 61, 62, 70.
Batanga 44.
Batete 22.
Bathurst 29.
B. C. A. 67.
Bechuanaland Protectorate
60, 61, 63.
Becquah 31.
Begemeder 97.
Beira 77.
Beled el-dsherid 10.
Bcled es-Sudan 5.
Beledugu 26.
Benadir 93, 96.
Bender Ziada 89, 94.
Benehasi 8.
116
Bengaella 5 i. 55.
Beni Amir 9 i. 95.
Ben! M tab I I.
Benin 35, .">T.
Benn8 39, i&
Berber i.
Berber)
Betsileos 78.
misarakas TS.
Biafara 43.
Biokab&ba i Bia Kaboba)
89, 91, 94.
Bismarckborg 34.
Bissagos 28.
Blanco, Cape 18.
Blantyre 69.
Bloemfontein 73.
Bodelg 8.
- territories 6.
Bogos 99.
Bojador Cape 18.
Bolama 28.
Borna 54.
Bon, Cape 10.
Bondu 24.
Boratsile 64.
Borgu 32, 40.
Borku 8.
Bornu 9, 39,41.
Brass River 37.
Brava 83, 84, 96.
British Bechuanaland 59.
British Central Africa 65.
British Central Africa Pro-
tectorate 69.
British East Africa 86.
British Kaffraria 62.
British Somaliland 89.
British South Africa Com-
pany 65.
Brothers Islands 90.
Bulam 28
Bulawayo 67.
Bumtu 21.
Buseima 8.
Bussang 40.
Cabinda 47, 54.
Cacheo 26. 27.
Cairo 2, 5.
Calabar i.s. i i
I ama 52,
Cameroon .".7. 13.
Campo River 13, 15
Canary Islands 19, 20.
I !ape Blanco 18.
( Jape ' oast Castle HO.
Cape Colony 59, 70.
(ape Corrientes 82.
(ape Delgado 76.
I !ape Frio 59.
I !ape Guardafui 94.
Cape Mount 29.
Cape Palmas 25, 32.
Cape of Good Hope 59.
Cape Verde Islands 20.
Capetown 61, 63.
Carabane 26.
< ;ugados 80.
Casamanza 25.
Cassini 27.
Catak 27.
Cayor 22 f.
Cerf 82.
Cette 52.
Ceuta 17, 18.
Chafarimas Islands l«s.
Chagos Islands 80.
Chinde 69.
Chiuta Lake 67.
Chiwanga 68.
Chor Gash 93.
Cidade de Praya 20.
Combia 27.
Combo 29.
Comores 81.
Compony 26, 27.
Conakry 27.
Congo 47, 51, 54.
Congo francais 46.
Congo State 49.
Constantine 12.
Coomassi 31.
Corisco 4").
Cosmoledo 80, 82.
Cote francaise des Somalis 91 .
Crepi 30.
Croboe 30.
Crocodile River 74.
Cross River 38.
Cubango 54, ~u.
Cunene 54. 57.
Cyrenaika 8.
D.
Dabu 26.
Dakhel 1.
Dagoinba 34.
Dahlak-Archipelago '.)4.
Dahomej 27, ;;;•, ::;,.
Dakar 21.
Damaraland 57, 58,
Bamerghu 13.
Damietta 2.
Danakil 91, 94, 95.
Bar Banda 6.
DAr es-salam 86.
Bar Fertit 6, 47.
Bar Fur 1, 3, 9, 42, 47. 87.
Bavali 89, 91.
Bebbeh 1.
Belta 2.
Benkera 30.
Besertas 20.
Biankolo River 21.
Biego Garcia 80.
Biego Suarez 79.
Bilolo-Lake 50.
Bixcove 30.
Bjimma 97, 98.
Bjogue 26.
Bogali 95, 99.
Bolbohanta 90.
Bongola 1, 5.
Braa 15.
Bshalo 8.
Bsharabub 1, 8.
Bshezirah 6.
Bshezira Soba 91.
Bshibuti 91.
Bshildessa 89, 91.
Dsholi 16.
Bshub-(Juba-)River 83, 94.
Bsitambo's Village 69.
Bullul 91.
Bumejra 91.
E.
Eagle Islands 80.
East Africa Protectorate 86.
East-Griqualand 60.
Ederi 7.
Egba 32.
Egypt 1.
Ejssa-Somali 90.
El Arish 2.
117
El Biban 7, 10.
El Gada 15.
El Gharb 14.
El Golea 12.
El Habasha 97.
El Obeid 4, 6.
El Sa'id 2.
El Teb 4, 6, 7.
Elephant Islands 29.
Elmina 30
Eloby 45.
Emin Pasha's Province 50.
87.
Ennedi 8.
Ennerea 98.
Erer 97.
Erg 7.
Eritrea 93. 96.
Essaman 31.
Eshowe 72.
Estado d'Africa Oriental 78.
Etembue 43.
Etbiope Rapids 43.
Ethiopia 97.
Europa 79.
F.
Faleme 21.
Falkat River 93.
Fanti 31.
Farafrah 1.
Farquhar 82
Fas (Fes) 15, 17.
Fellatah 40.
Fernando P6 45, 46
Fezzan 7, 9.
Fetishtown 44
Figig 15.
Forcados 37.
Fort Rosebery 69.
Foulepointe 78,
Frao River 39, 43.
Freetown 30.
French Congo 46.
French Guinea 25.
French Soudan 21, 23.
Friedrichsbnrg (Gross-) 34.
Fuladugu 24.
Fulbe (Fellatah), Dominion
of 39.
Funchal 20.
Futa Dshallon 22, 24.
Futa Toro 24.
G.
Gaboon 45, 47.
Gadaburssi 89, 94.
Galega 82.
Galla 87, 94, 97.
Gambia 21,29.
Gambia River 29.
Gana 37.
Gando 34, 39, 40.
Gangella 54, 55.
Gangomme 22.
Garayos 82.
Gasaland 76.
Geba 27.
Georgetown 29, 56.
German East Africa 84.
German South West Africa
57
Ghadames 7, 10, 12.
Ghat 7, 9.
Glehue 35.
Glorioso-Islands 78.
Godsham 97.
Gold Coast Colony 30.
Gold Coast 21, 25.
Goorage 97.
Goorma (Gurma) 24, 30, 34
Goosen 64.
Goree 21.
Gough's Island 56.
Grand Bassa 33.
Grand Bassam 25.
Grand Lahou 25.
Grand Popo 35, 36.
Great-Comoro 81.
Great Fish River 61.
Great-Windhoek 59.
Griqualand 60.
Gross Friedrichsburg 34.
Gubat 7.
Gubet Kharaib 91.
Gudru 97.
Guimbering 26.
Guinea Portuguese 21.
Guinee Francaise 25.
Gura 98.
Gurara 13.
Gurma 24, 30, 34.
Guro 13.
H.
Habab 94, 95.
Habr Audi 90.
Count Kinsky: "The Diplomatist's Handbook for Africa".
Habr Gerhadji 90.
Habr Toldshalej 90.
Hadu 94.
Handub 7.
Harar 3, 91, 97.
Haut Dbangi 42.
Ha wash 91.
Hawija 94.
Hickorytown 44.
Hombonu 36.
Hovas 78.
Humbe 54, 58.
Ibadan 32.
I. B. E. A. 86.
Ibo 76.
Ida 37.
Ifni 18.
Ilhas do Cabo Verde 20.
Imperial British East Africa
86.
Inaccessible 56.
Ingogo 74.
Inhambane 76.
Insalah (Ain Salah) 13, 15.
Iramba 85.
Isandula 62.
Isa-Somal (Siehe Ejssa.)
Iskobio 31,
Isle de Bourbon 80.
Isle de France 86.
Ismailia 2.
Isola do principe 46.
Itala 96.
Itjopja 97.
Ivory Coast 21, 25.
Jackville 25.
Jamestown 57.
Jatenga 24.
Jebu (Yebu) 32.
Johanna (Comores) 81.
Johannesburg 75.
Jola (Yola) 38, 43.
Jorubaland (Yorubai 35.
Juan de Nova 7'.).
Juba Factory 49, 54, 96.
Juba-(Dshub-)River 83.
Juby Cape 14, 15, 16.
16
lis
kaarta 2-1
kalu 26
Kabitai 26
Kabompo
KatVa 97.
Kaha
Kana 36, 37.
Kanem S. 41,
Kaokoland
Karagwe . s -~'
Karonga 84.
r Ras 1. 93.
Kashgil 4. 6.
K isongo 51.
Kassai 51, 52, 54.
Kassala 7. 93, 95.
Katanga 5 I, 51.
Katiraa-Falls -">8. 68.
Kawar 8.
Kawende 85.
Kawirondo 84, 87.
Kayes 21. 25.
Kazembe's Dominion 68.
Kebabo 8.
Kelmina 37.
Kemi 1.
Kenatsa 15.
Keven 95, 96.
Kerguelen 81.
Khartoum 4. 7.
Khatete 22.
Kibwezi 89.
Kilima Ndsharo 84.
Kihva Lake 67.
Kionga Bay 76. 87.
Kipini 83.
Kismayu 83.
Klein-Povo (Popo) 34.
Koba 27.
Kob.l 7.
Koki 87.
Konde 85.
Kong 24, 26.
Kordofan 1, 4, 6, 9, 87.
Kosi Bay 76.
Kosseir 2.
Kotonu 36. ?>~ .
Kribi 41.
Krikor 30.
Kuango 51.
Kufra 8.
Kuilu 46, i7, .~>l.
Kuka kukaua i 9, 39, I 1
ELumassi Cootnassi) 31.
Kuria Muria 90.
L.
la ( alle 10.
Lado 6, 50.
Laghuat 14.
Lagos 31, 32, 37.
Laing's Neck 74.
Lame 43.
Lama 83.
Laurenco Marquez 76, 77.
Lavadu 89
Lekke 31.
Les Freres 91.
Liberia 23, 24, 32 f.
Libreville 48.
Licona 52.
Likuala 47.
Limpopo 73.
Little Adra 36.
Little Povo (Popo) 34.
Loanda 54, 55.
Loango 48, 54.
Loangwa 65, 68.
Loge 52.
Logone 43.
Lokodja 41.
Lolodorf 44.
Lome 33, 35.
Los Islands 2o.
Lovadu 91.
Laapula 50, 69.
Liideritzland 58.
Lunda 53, 55.
Lunti 66.
M.
Mac Carthy-Island 29.
Madagascar 78.
Madeira 20.
Mafeking 61.
Mafia 84, 85.
Magdala 98.
Maghrib el-aqsa 14.
Mabdi, Dominion of 5.
Mahdijja 5.
Mahe 80.
Mahis 35.
Majo Keliu 43
Majuba 74.
Maklutji 66.
Manda 83, 88.
Mandinka 24, 32.
Manica-Plateau 66, 67, 77.
Manjanga 47.
Mao il.
Maputa River 71.
Maqdishu 83, 8i.
Marar 94.
Maivu 94, 95.
Mareb 93.
Marocco 97
Maryland 33.
Mashonaland 66, 75.
Maseru 70.
Massabi 47, 54.
Massai 87.
Massenja 42.
Massina 24.
Massowah 94, 95.
Matabeleland 63, 66, 75.
Matam 21.
Mauritius 80.
Mayo Kebbi 42, 44.
Mayotta 81.
Mazoe River 65.
Mbomu 47.
M'buzimi 85.
Melilla 18.
Melindi 88.
Mellacoree 26.
Mend if 44.
Mengo 89.
Merakesh 15.
Merawi 1, 5.
Merihan 94.
Merka 83, 84, 96.
Meru Lake 50, 69.
Mesurado 33.
Mfumbiro 84.
Midshurtin 94, 96.
Milmil 89.
Misahohe 34.
Misr 1.
Misr-el-bahri 2.
Mkusi 72.
Mogador 16, 18.
Mohilla 81.
Molopo 60, 63.
Mombasa 82, 87, 89.
Monrovia 33.
119
Morocco 14.
Mosilekatze 62.
Mossamedes 54, So.
Mossi (Musbi) 24, 30.
Mozambique 56, 76.
M'Pall 22.
Mpashi 54, 58
Mpororo 87.
Mrima 83.
M'Sinje 67.
Muata Jam wo (Yamwo) 55.
Muluja River 14, 15.
Muni 45.
Murzuq 9.
Musardu 33.
Musha Islands 91, 92.
Mushi (Mossi) 24, 30.
N.
Namaland 57.
Namaqualand 50.
Naronga 68.
Natal 62, 70
Ndara 54, 58.
N'Diandor 22.
Ndoruma's Capital 47.
New-Amsterdam 81.
New Republic (Zululand) 74.
Ngala 43.
Ngolgol 22.
Nguru 83.
Niam-Niam 47, 87.
Niari 46.
Niger Coast Protectorate 37
Niger-River 13, 38.
Niger Territories 38
Nightingale Islands 56.
Nile 50.
Nokki 51.
Nosob 60.
Nossi-Be 78, 7'.l
Nubia 1, 6.
Nun Cape 15.
Nun, Mouth of 37.
Nuilez River 25.
Nyassa 67, 68, 76.
Nyassaland 66, 69.
O.
•Obbi;. '.U. 96.
Obock 91. 92
Ogaden 91
Ogbomotsho (Obomotsho) 32,
35.
Ogowe 46, 47, 48, 52.
Oil Islands 80.
Oil river 37.
Okavango 58, 63.
Omdermiin (Omdurman) 7,9.
Oran 12.
Orango 28.
Orange-Republic 60, 70, 72,
Orange River 57, 65, 70, 71.
Oratsghi 37.
Ordashu 31.
Ossimi 23.
Ozi 83, 88.
Palachwe 64.
Pangani 88.
Pankoy 22.
Patta 83, 88.
Pemba 82, 86, 88.
Penon de Velez 18.
Pietermaritzburg 71.
Pondoland 60. 63, 70.
Ponta Delgada 20.
Port Alice 89.
Port Louis 80.
Port Sa'id 2.
Porto Novo 35, 36, 37.
Porto Santo 20.
Porto Seguro 36.
Portuguese East Africa 77.
Portuguese Guinea 27.
Portuguese Lower Guinea
54.°
Possession Island 57.
Povo grande 49.
Praslin 80.
Presidios 17.
Pretoria 74, 75.
Princes Island 46.
Providence 82.
Punta Barra 29.
Q.
Qasr es-Sa'id 11.
Quilimane 76.
Quitta 30.
K.
Rahanwin 94.
Etahal 93.
Raheita 91, 95.
Ramaquaban 66.
Ras 'Ali 91, 92.
Ras Dshibuti 91, 92, 93.
Ras Dumejra 91, 92.
Ras el-Kunais 8.
Ras Kasar 93.
Ras Tadjer.
Reunion 81.
R,hodesia 65, 77.
Rif 15.
Rio Cassini 27.
Rio del Rey 38, 43.
Rio d'oro 13, 15, 17.
Rio Nunez 26.
Rivieres du Sud 21, 23, 25,
86.
Robert's-Port 32.
Rode Valley 60.
Rodriguez 80.
Rosebery 69.
Rosetta 2.
Roux Cape 10.
Rovuma River 67, 76, 83.
Royal Niger Company 38.
Ruanda 85, 87.
Rudolf Lake 97.
Rufisque 21.
Ruo 68.
S.
Saadani 85.
Sabi 66.
Sagallo 91, 99.
Sahara 10, 12.
Sakalavas 78.
Sakota 97.
Salaga 34.
Saldanba Bay 61.
Saleh 16.
Salisbury 67, 77.
Salum 21.
Samory's Dominion 22.
Sanga River 42, 44, 47.
San Giacomo 29.
San Juan 45.
San Pietro River 26.
Sansane-Mangu 37.
Sansandig 21.
Santa Clara » lape 46.
Santa Cruz dc Mar Pequena
18.
Santa Cruz de Tenerife 19.
16*
1 20
Santa Lucia Bay 71.
Santa Maria 29.
Sao 1 on re in; o 78.
Sao Miguel 20.
Sa t . Paolo de Loanda 56
Sao Thiago 20
SaO Tliollli- 46.
Sa\i Xavier 36.
- 13,21,39.
Scarcies 25.
Secomdi 30.
Sedhiu 26
Sefui 30.
Segu Sikoro 21.
Sella 8.
Seinien 07.
Semio's Capital 47.
Semliki River 87, 88.
Semsen 93.
Senegal 21.
Senegambia 21.
Senna 76.
Sennaar 1, 6.
Seychelles 80.
Shari 42, 44.
Shashi-River 66.
Sherbro Island 29
Shire 68.
Sboa 91, 92, 94, 97, 98.
Shoshong 64.
Sbotts 12.
Shott el-dsherid 10.
Shott el-Gharbi 11.
Sidaraa 97, 98.
Sidshilmessa 15.
Sierra Leone 21, 29.
Sinai Peninsula 2.
Sinu 33.
Slave Coast 31.
Snussija 1.
Sofala 76.
Sukna 8.
Snkoto 23, 39.
Sokotra 89.
Solum 1.
Somali 2, 87, 89, 91.
Somalia Italiana 93.
South African Republic
73, 75.
St. Brandon 80,
St. Denis 81.
St. Helena 57.
71
SI Louis 21, 24
St Marie 78, 79.
si. Marj of Bathursi i".'.
St Paul si.
st Pierre 82.
St. Pietro River 25, 32.
Stefanie Lake 97.
Stellaland 64.
Sttakin 2
Soudan (Sudan) 1. 2, 5.
Sudan, Central 41.
Suez 2.
Suez Canal 2.
Sumbo 76.
Sus 15.
Swasiland 71, 74.
Sweet River 31.
Tadshura 91, 92.
Tafilelt 15.
Taiserbo 8.
Taka 1, 6.
Takale 6.
Tamaneb 6
Tamarida 91.
Tamatave 78, 79.
Tana River 83
Tanganyika 50, 68, 69.
Tangiers 16
Tarabulus 7.
Tati Gold District 66.
Tazzerult 15.
Tchertcher 97.
Tebessa 10.
Tegeri 8.
Tel el-kebir 4.
Tern an eb 7.
Tembuland 60.
Tete 76.
Tetuan 16.
Tibati's Dominion 44.
Tibesti 8.
Tidikelt 13.
Tieba's Dominion 24.
Tigre 95, 97.
Timbuctoo 23.
Todshie 34, 35.
Togo 34.
Togoland 33.
Tokar 7.
Tombo 27.
Tongoland 71.
Tongola River 71.
Transkei 60.
Transvaal 62, 67, 73.
Trarza 23.
Tripolis (Tripoli) 7.
Tristan da Cunha 56.
Tristao 27.
Trois Freres-Islands 80.
Tromelin 82.
Tshad Lake Countries 41.
Tshagos-Islands 80.
Tshambesi 69.
Tshantyoan 34.
Tshinde 69.
Tshiloango 47.
Tshobe-River 2, 58, 63. 65.
Tu 8.
Tuareg 7.
Tuat 13, 15.
Tugela 70.
Tuggurt 14.
Tunghi 63.
Tunis 10.
U.
Uano 92.
Ubangi 9, 47, 49, 52.
Uelle 52.
Uganda 86, 87, 88.
Uhehe 85.
Ukami 83.
Ukerewe 85.
Ulala 25, 51.
Uled Embarek 19, 24.
Ulundi 62.
Umba River 83, 88.
Umsalekaze 62.
Uniamwesi 85.
Unioro (Dnyoro) 87.
Upingtonia 50, 59.
Urua 25, 51.
Usagara 83, 85.
Usambara 85.
Useguha 83.
Usige 84.
Usoga 87.
Dsukuma 85.
Usutu River 71.
Dtshali 93.
121
v.
Yaal 62, 71.
Vassao 30.
Velez de la Gomera 18.
Victoria 'Cameroon) 45.
Victoria Xyanza 84, 85, 89.
Victoria Republic 71.
Volta 21, 30, 34. 35.
Vryheid 63. 74.
W.
Wadai 5, 8, 41.
Wadi Draa 15.
Wadi Nogal 89.
Wadi Suf 14.
Wadi Sus 15.
Wadis River 15.
Wad Ras 18.
Wagadugu 25, 31, 37.
Wahadu 89.
Walfish Bay 56, 59.
Wallamo 97.
Wanga 86.
Wanjanga 8.
Wargla 12, 14.
Warsheik 83, 84, 96.
War Singeli 90.
Webi Shebeli 97.
Wesan 17.
West African Colonies 28
West African Settlements 28
West Griqualand 60, 62
Wbydah (Weyda, Uida)35, 36
Windhoek 59.
Winnebac 30.
Witu 83, 86
Wizard 82.
Wurno 40.
X
Xavier (Savi) 36.
Xesibe 60.
Yetzoo 91.
Tola fJola) 38, 43.
Yoruba (Joruba) 31, 35.
Z.
Zambesi 52, 58. 63, 69.
Zambesia 65.
Zanzibar 82
Zejla (Zeyla) 89, 92.
Ziquincior 27.
Zomba 69.
Zululand 70, 71, 74.
Zumbo 65.
&
rra
t a corn
ge:
'g-:
Line :
Erratum
Bead :
(VII]
) 14th, 28th, 31st (11th) Portugese
Portuguese.
6
27th
Bogo
Bogos.
31
18th
1873
1872—1874.
32
nth
1862, March
3rd
1861, August 6th.
34
17th
15th
5th.
40
6th
Adamua
Adamawa
57
2nd
since 1879
12th March 1878.
60
Kith
1871
22nd February 1878
74
20th
February
January.
77
5th
1878
1875, 24th July.
82
9th
24
21.
85
Uth
1st
25th.
88
24th
Kumayu
Kismayu.
88
last
June 19th
August 27th
91
3rd
September
October.
98
28th
Theodoro
Theodoros.
Oriental Catalogue No. X.
OF
NEW & SECOND-HAND BOOKS
ON SALE BY
KEGAN PAUL, TRENCH, TRUBNER & CO,
LIMITED,
Publishers and Booksellers to the India Office, British Museum,
the Indian Government, etc.,
PATERNOSTER HOUSE, CHARING CROSS ROAD,
Lo^riDonsr.
->* Contents. #*■
BOOKS ON
AFRICAN PHILOLOGY,
VIZ. :
polyglotts, comparative philology, and general works on
African Linguistic . . ...
Dictionaries, Grammars, Reading Books for the Principal
African Languages, viz. : Aduma, Affar, Agau, Agni, Akra,
Amharic, Arabic (Algerian, Egyptian, Morocco, Tunisian, and
Zanzibar dialects), Ashanti, Bambara, Barea, Bari, Bechuana,
Bedauye, Beidawi, Benguela, Berber, Bilin, Bishari, Bornu,
Bubi, Bullom, Bunda, Cape Dutch, Dahomey, Denka, Dualla,
Efik, Ewe, Falasha, Fan, Ferdinandian, Fiote, Fulah, Galla,
Ghat, Giryama, Grebo, Harari, Hausa, Herero, Ibo, Idzo,
Igbira, Kabail, Kaffa, Kaguru, Kamba, Kavirondo, Kibangi,
Kilolo, Kiniassa, Kisukuma, Kiteke, Kitikn, Ki-Pokomo, Kongo,
Kunama, Kwafi, Libyan, Luba, Luganda, Makna, Malagasy,
Maude, Masai, Mashona, Matabele, Mauritius, Musuk, Mwamba,
Nagoe, Nauiaqua, Ngoni, Niam-Niam, Nika, Nubian, Nupe,
Nyamwezi, Nyanja, Oshikuanjania, Pongvve, Quara, Ronga,
Sagara, Saho, Shambala, Somali, Soso, Swahili, Taita, Temne,
Teneriffe, Tigre, Tumbuka, Umbundu, Vai, Wolof, Xosa, Yao,
Yoruba, and Zulu-Kafir . . ...
and
A SELECT STOCK OF BOOKS ON AFRICA—
History, Industry, Travels, etc. . . ...
1-3
3-20
21-22
1^- All Books sent post-free without extra charge, if cash is sent with
the order. Librarians who prefer to send their orders through their Book-
seller or London Agent, instead of to us, are kindly requested to forward
duplicate orders direct to us.
I
Books on A fyica.
(.Continued from page 29.)
PAULITSCHKE (P ). Beitrage zur Ethnographic und Anthropologic der
Somal, Galla, and Baravi, 105 pp. text, with 40 photo-lithographic plates
and a map, folio. 1S88. £1 5s.
Ethnographic Novdost- Afrika's. I lie nialcricllc Cultur der Danakil,
Galla, and Somal. 33S pp. with 76 illustrations on 25 plates, and a
map. Large 8vo. cloth. 1893. £1 3s.
PETHERICK (J., F.R.G.S.). Egypt, the Soudan, and Central Africa, with
explorations from Khartoum on the White Nile to the regions of the
Equator, being sketches from Sixteen Years' Travel. With map. xii. and
482 pp. cloth.' 1861. (Pud. 16s.) 7s. 6d.
PFEFFER (G.). Die Fische Ost-Afriea's. 726 pp. with plates, large 8vo.
1897. 7s. 6</.
REINDORF (C. C). History of the Gold Coast and Asante, based on tradi-
tions and historical facts, comprising a period of more than three centuries,
from about 1500 to 1860. 356 pp. 8vo. cloth. 1895. 9s. net.
ROWLEY (Rev. H.). The Story of the Universities Mission to Central Africa,
from its commencement, under Bishop Mackenzie, to its withdrawal from
the Zambesi. With portraits, maps, and illustrations, xii. and 493 pp.
large 8vo. cloth. 1866. (Pub. £1 Is.). 5s.
SARTORIUS (E.). Three months in the Soudan, x. and 259 pp. with
plates, large 8vo. cloth. 1885. (Pub. 14s.) 7s.
SPENCER (H.). Descriptive Sociology; or, Groups of Sociological Facts
classified and arranged.
Vol. IV. African races, compiled and abstracted by Prof. D. Duncan.
29 tables and 47 pp. text, folio. 1875. 16s.
TRANSACTIONS of the Chemical and Metallurgical Society in Johannesburg
(S.A.R.). Vol. I. in the Press. — Orders booked.
TRANSACTIONS of the Geological Society of South Africa in Johannesburg
(S.A.R.). 8vo.
Vol. I. (1896). 6s.
Vol. II. in ten parts (1896). 15s.
Contains a number of technical papers on the Geology and Mining in South
Africa, written by practical experts. — The continuation can be supplied
to order.
WAUTERS (A. J.) and BUYL (Ad.). Bibliographic du Congo, 1880-95.
Catalogue Method ique de 3800 ouvrages, brochures et cartes. 356 pp. 8vo.
1895. 7s. 6d.
WELWITSCH (Fr.). Catalogue of the African Plants (especially from
Angola) collected by him in 1853-61. Edited by W. P. Hiern.
Vol. I. containing the Dicotyledons, and 336 pp. 8vo. 1896. 7s. 6d.
w All Catalogues sent post-free and gratis to our regular Customers.
All others are requested to send 6d. in stamps with demand for each
Catalogue, which amount will be deducted from the first Order.
Kegan Paul, Trench, Triibner and Co., Limited, Paternoster House,
Charing Cross Road, London : Oriental Catalogue No. X,
September, 1897.
AFRICAN LANGUAGES.
POLYGLOTTS, COMPARATIVE PHILOLOGY, &c.
BARTH (H.). Collection of Vocabularies of Central-African Languages, in
English and German. First Part. — Larger Vocabularies of the Kaniiri-,
Tedii-, Hausa-, Fulfiilde-, Sonjai-, Logone-, Wandala-, Bagrimma-, and
Maba-Languages. Introductory Remarks, Chap. 1-6. Pronouns. Particles.
Numerals. Verbs. Second Part. — Introductory Remarks, Chap. 7-12.
Analysis of the Fulfiilde-, Sonjai-, Logone-, Wandala-, Bagrimma-, and
Maba-Languages. Third Part. — Nouns, pp. cccxxxiv. and 295. Royal
8vo. 1862-66. (Pub. £1 10s.) £1.
BLEEK (W. H. T., PH.D.). A Comparative Grammar of South African
Languages. 2 parts in one volume, pp. xxii. and 322. Post 8vo. cloth.
1862-69. (Pub. £2 2s.) 15s.
Part I., Phonology ; Part II., The Concord. Section I., The Noun. All that
is published.
CECCHI (A.). Da Zeila alle frontiere del Cafl'a. Vol. III. 636 pp. 8vo.
1887. 15s.
Contents. — pp. 1-100, E. Viterbo, Grammatica della lingua Oromonica ; pp.
101-398, E. Viterbo, Vocabulario Oromonica-Italiano e Italiano-Oromonica ;
pp. 399-456, A. Cecchi, Apunti grammatical i e vocaboli della lingua
Kaffeccio ; pp. 457-461, A. Cecchi, Vocaboli della lingua Giangero ; pp.
462-468, A. Cecchi, Vocaboli della lingua Adija ; pp. 469-484, A. Cecchi,
Note grammatical! e vocaboli della lingua Ciaha ; pp. 485-490, A. Cecchi,
Vocaboli e modi di dire della lingua Afar ; pp. 491-501, A. Cecchi, Novelle
raccolte in lingua Italiana.
CLARKE (J. ). Specimens of Dialects. Short Vocabularies of [246] Languages
and Notes of Countries and Customs in Africa. 8vo. pp. v. and 104.
1849, 3s.
CUST (R. N.). Les langues de lAfrique, traduit de l'anglais par L. de
Milloue. pp. 126, small 8vo. paper covers. " Bibliotheque elzuvirienne."
1885. 2s. U.
A Sketch of the Modern Languages of Africa, accompanied by a
Language Map, by E. E. Ravenstein. 2 vols. Post 8vo. cloth, pp.
xvi. and 288, and viii. and 278, with 31 autotype portraits of African
missionaries and scholars. 1883. Out of print. £1 Is. net.
Forms a volume of Trubner's Oriental Series.
Essay on the Progress of African Philology up to the year 1893.
48 pp. 8vo. 1893. Is. M.
FAIDHERBE, Langues seni'galaises : wolof, arabe, hassania, soninko, serere :
notions granimaticales, vocabulaires et phrases. 226 pp. 12mo. cloth.
1887. 7s. M.
Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner and Co., Limited, Paternoster House,
Charing Cross Road, London : Oriental Catalogue No. X.
2 African Languages.
FREY (Col. . L'Annamite, mere dea langues, Communaute d'origine, des
raoea Celtiques, Seniitiques, Sotidanaises ot de L'Indo-Chine. With 3 maps.
Bvo. 1892. 5s. .
III. Origine dea Mande, Peulho, Fellahs, Berberes, Maures, de Galoix, etc.
VII. Similitudes de mots annamites et de mots des dialectes de la cote des
Esclaves. VIII. Id. des dialectes de I'Afrique centrale.
GHEYN (J. van den). La langue rongalaise et les idiomes bantous d'aprea le
recent ouvrage du pore Torrend. 29 pp. 8vo. 1892. Is. Qd.
GREGORIO (G. de). Cenni di glottologia Bantu (Sud-Africana). pp. 152,
8vo. 1882. 4s.
A second-hand copy with numerous MSS. notes, 3s.
GUIRAUDON (Th. Gr. de). Notes de linguistique AMcaine: Lcs Puis.
f>;"> pp. 8yo. Vienne, 1887. 2s.
JACOTTET (E.). Etudes sur lcs langues du Haute -Zambeze, Testes
originaux recueiUis et traduits en francais et precedes d'une esquisae
grammaticale.
Vol.1. Grammaire soubiya et louye. xxxvii. and 133 pp. 8vo. 1896. 6s.
JOHNSON (H.) and CHRISTALLER (J.). Vocabularies of the Niger and
Gold Coast, West Africa. 34 pp. 12mo. limp cloth. 1886. Is. M.
Includes Yoruba, Nupi, Kakanda, Igbira, Igara, Ibo, Ga and Obutu.
KOELLE (S. W.). Polyglotta Africana ; or, Comparative Vocabulary of
marly three hundred words and phrases in more than one hundred distinct
African Languages. Folio, cloth, pp. 24 and 188. 1854. £1 Is.
KOLBE (F. W.). A Language Study based on Bantu; or, an inquiry into
the laws of root-formation, the original plural, the sexual dual, and the
principles of word -comparison. With tables illustrating the primitive
pronominal system restored in the African Bantu family of speech.
pp. viii. and 97, with 4 tables. Post 8vo. cloth. 1888. 6s.
KRAPF (J. L.). Vocabulary of Six East -African Languages (Kienaheli,
Kinika, Kikamba, Kipokomo, Kihian, Kigalla). pp. x. and 64. 4 to.
cloth. 1850. 5s.
LAST (J. T.). Polyglotta Africana Orientalis ; or, a Comparative Collection
of 250 Voids and Sentences in 48 Languages and Dialects spoken south of
the Equator, and Additional Words in 19 Languages, with Linguistic Map.
8vo. cloth, pp. xii. and 239. 1885. 4s.
LEMAIRE (Ch.). Vocabulaire pratique francais-anglais, zanzibarite (swahili),
tiote, kibangi-irebou, niongo, bangalas. 48 pp. 8vo. 1894. 2s. 6d,
LORD'S PRAYER (The) in three hundred languages, comprising the leading
languages and their principal dialects throughout the world, with the places
where spoken. With a preface, by the late Dr. R. Rost. Second edition.
100 pp. 4to. cloth. 1891. 10s. 6d.
MASQUER AY (E.). Comparison d'un vocabulaire du dialecte des Zenaga
du Senegal avec les vocabulaires eorrespondants des dialectes des Chawia et
des Beni Mzab. 61 pp. 8vo. 1879. 3s.
MULLER (Ft.). Linguistischer Theil der Reise der Osterreichischen Fregatte
Novara urn die Erde in 1857-59. 357 pp. 4to. cloth. 1867. 12s. U.
pp. 1-71 contain the Africanische Sprachen, Hottentotisch, Bantu und
Hamitische Sprachen.
Die Sprachen Basa, Grebo und Kru im westlichen Afrika. 20 pp.
8vo. 1877. Is.
Die aequatoriale Sprachfamilie in Central-Afrika. 2 parts, 22 pp.
8vo. 1889. Is. M.
Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner and Co., Limited, Paternoster House,
Charing Cross Road, London: Oriental Catalogue No. X.
African Languages— Aduma, A far, Agau, Agni, Akra. 3
OUTLINE of a Vocabulary of a few of the Principal Languages of Western
and Central Africa, compiled for the use of the Niger Expedition. Square
8vo. (oblong), cloth, pp. vii. and 213. 1841. Out of print. Scarce. 7s. 6d.
This vocabulary comprises the Mandingo, Bambarra, Fanti, and Ashanti and
Wolof languages.
SCHLEICHER (A. W.). Afrikanische Petrefacten. Ein Versuch die gram-
matischen Bildungen und Formwurzeln der Afrikanischen Sprachen durch
Sprachvergleichung festzustellen. 93 pp. 8vo. 1891. 3s.
SEIDEL (A.). Praktische Grammatiken der Hauptsprachen Deutsch-
Siidwestafrikas : Nama, Otyiherero und Oshindonga. In one volume.
180 pp. 12mo. cloth. No date (1892). 2s. Gd.
Each grammar contains elementary rules for beginners, reading matter, and a
vocabulary.
SHAW (A. Downes). A Pocket Vocabulary of the Ki-Swahili, Ki-Nyika,
Ki-Taita, and Ki-Kamba Languages. Also a Brief Vocabulary of the
Kibwyo Dialect. Collected by Archdeacon Farler. Small 8vo. cloth,
pp. v. 204. 1885. 6s.
STEERE (E., ll.d.). Short Specimens of the Vocabularies of three Unpub-
lished African Languages (Gindo, Zaramo, and Angazidja). Small 8vo.
sewed, pp. 21. 1869. Is.
TORREND (J.). Comparative Grammar of the South-African Bantu lan-
guages, comprising those of Zanzibar, Mozambique, the Zambesi, Kafirland,
Benguela, Angola, the Congo, the Ogowe, the Cameroons, the Lake Region,
&c. 336 pp. royal 8vo. cloth. 1891. £1 5s.
Detailed prospectus sent post-free on demand.
WATSON (C. M.). Comparative A r ocabularies of the Languages spoken at
Suakin : Arabic, Hadendoa, Beni-Amer. 16 pp. 4to. 1888. 2s. 6d.
ADUMA.
DAHIN. Vocabulaire adouma - francais et francais-adounia. 72 pp. 8vo.
1895. 6s.
AFFAR or ADALI (An Abyssinian Dialect).
COLIZZA (Giov.). Lingua Afar. Nel Nord-Est dell' Africa. Grammatica,
testi e Vocabolario. pp. xii. and 153, 8vo. 1886. 6s.
REINISCH (L.). Die Afar-Sprache mit Gesprachen und WSrterbuch. 3 parts,
112, 124, and 82 pp. 8vo. 1885-87. 5s. Gd.
AGAU (Jewish Dialect in Abyssinia).
HALEVY (J). Essai sur la langue Agau ; le dialecte des Falachas (Juifs
dAbyssinie). 33 pp. 8vo. 1873. 2s. Gd.
WALDMEIER (Th.). Wortersammlung aus der Agausprache. 29 pp. 8vo.
1868. 2s. Gd.
AGNI.
JEAND'HEUR (F.). Vocabulaire francais-agni. 61 pp. 8vo. 1893.
AKRA or GA (Gold Coast).
CHRISTALLER (J. G.) and SCHOPF (J.). Primer in the Ga or Akra
Language. (New edition.) 8vo. viii. and 48 pp. 1892. Is. 6d.
Kegan Paul, Trench, Tridmer and Co., Limited, Paternoster House,
Charing Cross Road, London: Oriental Catalogue No. A.
i African Languages -Amharic, Arabic
CHRISTALLER [J. G.), LOCHER (Ch. W.), and ZIMMERMANN (T.).
A Dictionary of English, Tshi (Asante), Akra, Tshi (Cbwee), comprising,
as Dialects, Ak.in (Asante, Akein. Akuapt'm), and Kantt' ; Akra (Accra),
connected with Adangme, &c. 8vo. pp. xxiv. and 'lib. 1874. Out of
print. 7s. Sd.
CHRISTALLER (J; G.) and BOHNER (II ). Ubungen in dor Akra oder
G i Spraohe. 108 pp. 8vo. 1890. 2s. •'„/.
Contents. — I. Knrze Sprachlehre. II. Satze aus der Umgangssprache des
tiiglichen Lebens.
ZIMMERMANN (J.). A Grammatical Sketch of tin- Akra or Ga Language,
with a Vocabulary and an Appendix on the Adannic Dialect. 2 vols. 8vo.
boards, pp xvi. and 203, and vii. and 461. 1858. 10s. 6d.
AMHARIC (Abyssinia).
D'ABBADIE (A.). Dictionnaire dc la langue Amarinna. xlvii. and 1336 pp.
Svo. 1881. £2 2s.
GUiDI (Ig.). Grammatica elementare della lingua Amarina. 2nd Edition,
63 pp. Svo. 1892. 5s.
Sulle coniugazioni del verbo Aniarico. 18 pp. 8vo. 1893. Is. 6d.
ISENBERG (Ch. W.). Grammar of the Amharic Language, pp. 184, royal
8vo. cloth. 1842. 12s.
MONDON-VIDAILHET (C). Manuel pratique de langue Abyssine (Am-
harique). 201 pp. post Svo. 1891. 8s.
PIANO (F.). Raccolta delle frasi pin usuali tradotte dall' Italiano in Amarico.
2nd Edition, revised and corrected. 125 pp. 12mo. 1887. 2s.
PRAETOR I US (F.). Die Amharische Sprache. In two parts. 523 pp. 4to.
1S78-79. £1 10s.
ARABIC (Algerian Dialect).
BELKASSEM (Ben Sedira). Cours pratique de langue arabe. 3rd Edition.
1888. 3s. Gd.
Dictionnaire francais-arabe et arabe -f ran cais de la langue parlee en
Algerie. 4th Edition.' 12mo. pp. lxiv. and 928, cloth. 1882-86. 5s.
each volume.
Manuel epistolaire de langue arabe. 8vo. 1894. 5s.
Contents. — Lettres et mss. divers avec transcription, notes et vocabulaire.
Petit dictionnaire arabe-fran9ais (dialect algerien). xii. and 608 pp.
12mo. cloth. 1882. 5s.
Dialogues frangais-arabes, recueil des phrases les plus usuelles
de la langue parlee en Algerie. 3rd Edition. 32mo. pp. vii. and 370.
1889. 3s.
Cours de literature arabe, recueil de versions litteraires tirees du
Mostatref, des Mille et une nuits, des fables de Bidpai, des prairies d'or, &c,
munies de voyelles. 2nd Edition. 368, 364, and xiv. pp. 8vo. cloth.
1891. 10s.
Added are towards 500 verses and an Arabic-French vocabulary of all words
contained in the volume.
Kerjan Paul, Trench, Triibner and Co., Limited, Paternoster House,
Charing Cross Road, London : Oriental Catalogue No. X.
African Languages — Arabic. 5
BRESNIER. Chrestomathic arabe : Lettres, actes et pieces diverses avec la
traduction franchise en regard, accompagnee de notes et d' observations suivie
d'une notice sur les successions nmsulmanes et d'une concordance incdite
des calendriers gregorien et niusuhnan. 2nd Edition. 8vo. 12s.
BRESNIER. Anthologie arabe elementaire, choix de maximes et de textes
varies, la plupart inedits, accompagncs d'un vocabulaire arabe-francais.
Small 8vo. 5s.
BUSSY (R. de). Dictionnaire francais-arabe de la langue parlee en Algerie.
3rd Edition. 12mo. 1894. 3s. M.
DELAPORTE (J. H.). Guide de la conversation arabe-francaise, avec le mot
a mot et la prononciation interlineaire figuree en caracteres francais. 3rd
Edition. Oblong Svo. 7s.
DELAPORTE. Cours de versions arabes (idiome d' Alger) contenaut
les fables de Lokman et les fables choisies d'Esope. 3rd Edition.
8vo. 5s.
DUCRET (E.). Arabic Copy-books. A series of 8 progressive parts on ruled
writing paper, with models at the top of each page. 4to. 2s. 6d.
They show only the Algerian handwriting.
DUMONT (M. X.). Guide de la lecture des manuscrits arabes. 107 pp.
royal 8vo. 1842. 5s.
A collection of autographed Arabic private and business letters, contracts,
invoices, prayers, stories, etc., with French translation.
EIDENSCHENK. Mots usuels de la langue arabe. 296 pp. 8vo. 1897. 4s.
HOUDAS et DELPHIN. Recueil de lettres arabes manuscrites. 4to. 5s.
LAUNE. Manuel francais-arabe ou recueil d' actes administratifs, judiciaires
et sous seigns prives. Arabic text with French translation. Small 8vo.
7s. M.
MACHUEL (L.). Une premiere annee d'arabe. 2nd Edition. 136 pp. 8vo.
boards. 1892. 2s.
Methode pour l't-tude de l'arabe parle (idiome algerien). 4th Edition.
18mo. pp. xvi. and 456. 1888. 5s.
Manuel de l'arabisant ou recueil de pieces arabes.
Part I. Lettres administratives, judiciaires, politiques, etc. Small 8vo.
boards. 6s.
Part II. Actes divers pourvus de toutes les voyelles. Small 8vo.
boards. 6s.
MOULIERAS (A.). Manuel algerien. Grammaire, chrestomathie et lexique.
Svo. cloth, pp. viii. and 288. 1888. 5s.
ARABIC (Egyptian Dialect).
BERNARD (H.). Vocabulaire francais-egyptien. 3rd Edition. 12mo. 1877.
3s. 6d.
In Roman characters only.
CAMERON (D. A.). Arabic - English Vocabulary (Egyptian vernacular
dialect). 319 pp. 8vo. cloth. 1892. 12s.
The pronunciation of the Arabic words is given in Roman characters.
GAD (J.). Dictionnaire francais-arabe des termes judiciaires administratives
et commerciaux. 1590 pp. 2 vols. 4to. 1894. £2.
Kegan Paul, Trench, Triibner and Co., Limited, Paternoster House,
Charing Cross Iload, London : Oriental Catalogue No. -\ ,
6 African Languages Arabic.
GREEN (A. 0.). A Practical Arabic dan, mar.
Pari I. 3rd Edition. Contains the whole accidence and a short syntax.
Ever; lesson contains reading exercises, with interlinear pronunciation in
Roman characters, conversations, English and Arabic exercises, vocabulary,
&o. 198 pp. post 8vo. cloth. 1893. 7s. bV.
Part II. 3rd Edition, enlarged and revised. Forms a key to Pari I. The
English exercises arc rendered into colloquial Egyptian- Arabic, and the
Stories into a more literary style, with the word points and diacritical
marks ad. led ; a collection of newspaper extracts and telegrams, letters and
manuscripts; and an English -Arabic vocabulary of 3000 words and an
Arabic -English vocabulary of lf>00 words; anil a comparative table of
classical and modern Arabic forms anil expressions for the use of advanced
^ students. 2'.i0 pp. post 8vo. cloth. 1893. 10s. 6d.
The first two editions of this second pari were printed by the British Govern-
ment and never sold to the public.
HABEICHE (J. J.). Dictionnaire francais-arabe, pour le dialecto egyptien.
2nd Edition. 9t>0 pp. 8vo. boards. 1896. £1 Is.
The Arabic words arc given in Arabic characters only.
HARFOUCHE (J.). Le drogman arabe ou guide pratique de l'arabe parlc
en caracteres romains pour la Syrie, l'Egypte et la Palestine. 354 pp.
12mo. cloth. 1894. 5s.
L'ouvrage contient un abrege de grammaire, un vocabulaire, des dialogues
varies, des arabismes ct des proverbes.
HARTMANN (M.). Arabischer Sprachfuhrer fur Reisende. 2nd Edition,
revised, 16mo. limp roan. 1895. 5s.
Arabic in the Syrian and Egyptian dialects (in English characters).
It forms a volume of the "Meyer's Sprachfuehrer " Series.
KASSAB and HAM MAM. Arabic-English Dictionary. 803 pp. post 8vo.
cloth. 1888. 10s. ^ l
Contains words of the Egyptian and Syriac spoken dialects, as well as those
of the written classical language.
LANSING (T. G.). Arabic Manual. 2nd Edition, xv. and 194 pp. royal
Svo. cloth. 1891. 12s.
The work is divided in four parts, viz., the Orthography, Etymology,
Paradigms, and a Chrestomathy [containing some parts of the Genesis and
Ko»an in Arabic, with a transliteration, translation, and a vocabulary].
MANTELL (A. M.). Arabic-English Dictionary of Military Terms. 72 pp.
royal Svo. 1886. 3s.
The English-Arabic part is out of print.
MARCEL (J. J.). Dictionnaire francais-arabe des dialectes vulgaires d'Alger,
d'Egypte, de Tunis et du Maroc. 5th Edition, revised and corrected,
pp. xv. and 584. 1885. 7s. 6d.
NAKHLAH (Yakoub). New Manual of English and Arabic conversation.
217 pp. small 8vo. 1874. 4s.
In Arabic and Roman characters.
PALMER (The late E. H.). Arabic Manual, comprising a condensed Grammar
of both the classical and modern Arabic, reading lessons and exercises with
analyses, and an English-Arabic vocabulary of useful words. 3rd Edition.
315 pp. 12mo. bound. 1891. 7s. 6d.
PIZZI (T.) Piccolo manuale dell' arabo vulgare d'Egitto con tend da tradurse
dall'arabo i Italiano e dall'Italiano i arabo con vocabulario del terni. pp.
192, 16mo. 1886. 2s. M.
Kegan Paul, Trench, Triibner and Co., Limited, Paternoster House,
Charing Cross Road, London: Oriental Catalogue No. X.
African Languages — Arahv-. 7
PLUNKETT (G. T. ). English-Arabic Vocabulary, compiled for the use of
English residents and travellers in Egypt. 108 pp. 12rao. 1886. 2s. 6d.
It contains 3650 words, including many technical terms required by military
men, engineers, builders, travellers on the Nile, &c. In Roman characters
only.
PROBST (F.). Aegyptischer Sprachfuhrer im aegyptischen Dialect (Gram-
matik, arab-deutsch und deutsch-arab Vocabular, Gesprache). 280 pp.
post 8vo. bound. 1894. 5s.
SEIDEL (A.). Praktisches Handbuch.der arabischen Umgangssprache aegypt-
ischen Dialectes mit zahlreichen Ubungsstiicken und einem ausfuhrlichen
* arobo-deutschem Worterbuch. 310 pp. 8vo. 1894. (New issue of 1896.)
10s. 6d.
Printed in Roman characters only.
SPIRO (S.). Arabic-English Vocabulary of the colloquial Arabic of Egypt,
containing the vernacular idioms and expressions, slang phrases, &c. , used
by the native Egyptians. 661 pp. 8vo. cloth. 1895. 25s.
All Arabic words are printed in Arabic and Roman characters.
SPITTA-BEY. Grammatik des Vulgaer-Dialectes iEgyptens. xxxi. and
519 pp. royal 8vo. cloth. 1880. £1 6s.
STACE (E. V.). English-Arabic Vocabulary for the use of Students for the
Colloquial. 218 pp. 8vo. cloth. 1893. 12s.
Forms the counterpart to "Cameron's Arabic -English Vocabulary." The
Arabic words are printed in Arabic characters.
THIMM (C. A.). Egyptian Arabic self-taught, for the practical use of
travellers, a.o. 70 pp. 8vo. cloth. 1897. 2s. 6d.
TIEN (A.). Manual of Colloquial Arabic, comprising practical rules for
learning the language, vocabulary, dialogue, letters, and idioms, &c, in
English and Arabic. New and revised edition. 419 pp. 12mo. 1891.
7s. 6d.
All Arabic words are printed in Arabic types, with their pronunciation in
Roman characters.
Egyptian, Syrian, and North African Handbook. 176 pp. 12mo.
1882. 4s.
A simple phrasebook in English and Arabic for the use of the British forces,
civilians, and residents in Egypt. [In Roman characters only.]
VOLLERS (Dr. K.). Lehrbuch der fegypto-arabischen Umgangssprache mit
Uebungen und einem Glossar. xi. and 231 pp. post 8vo. 1890. Cloth,
7s. 6d. In wrapper, 6s. 6'/.
Grammar of the modern Egyptian Arabic, with exercises, reading
lessons, and glossaries. Translated into English by F. C. Burkitt. 276 pp.
8vo. cloth. 1895. 10s. M.
WORTABET (J.) and PORTER (H.). English-Arabic and Arabic-English
Dictionary, for the use of schools. 368 and 366 pp. 2 vols, bound in one,
small 8vo. half-calf. 1894. 17s 6d.
WORTABET (AV. T.). Arabic- English Dictionary, compiled with the assist-
ance of Rev. Dr. J. Wortabet and Prof. Harvey Porter. 2nd Edition,
revised, 803 and 14 pp. 8vo. half-bound. 1893. £1 Is.
To the classical words are added many modern words. A supplement contains
words used especially in Egypt, and a list of military and technical terms
employed by the Government Departments. The past and present future
forms of the verb and the noun of action or noun of triliterals in full
are given.
Kegan Paul, Trench, Triibner and Co., Limited, Paternoster House,
Charing Cross Road, London : Oriental Catalogue No. X.
8 African Languages Arabic, Asante.
ARABIC (Morocco Dialect).
AYUSO 1>. 1'. G.). Gramdtica-arabe, mdtodo tedrico practice. 2nd Edition,
corrected and enlarged. 146 pp. 8vo. 1S83. 6s.
BALDWIN (C. W.). Dialogas espanoles y arabigos. 12mo. cloth. 1893.
7-. '
English -Arabic Dialogues, for the use of students in Morocco.
Revised and edited by W. Mackintosh. 115 pp. 12mo. cloth. 1893.
7s.
All Arabic words arc printed in the Arabic character.
LERCHUNDI (Fr. Josd). Rudimentos del drabe vulgar que se habla en el
imperio de Marruecos. 2nd Edition, enlarged and revised, xvi., 463, and
pp. Svo. 1889. 15s.
Contents.— I. Nocidnes preliminares, pp. 1-26; II. Del articulo, nomhre y
pronombre, pp. 27- 171 : III. Del verbo y del participio, pp. 175-330, &c.
Vocabulario espanol-arabigo (Morocco dialect). 863 pp. 8vo. 1892.
£1 Is.
LERCHUNDI Y SIMONET. Crestomatia arabigo-espaiiola, 6 coleccion de
fragmentos, hist6ric6s, geographicos y literarios relatios a, la Espafia arabe
seguida de un vocabulario de todos los terminos contenidos en dichos
fragmentos. 2 vols. Svo. 1881-82. 18s. U.
MEAKIN (J. G. B.). Morocco Arabic Series.
Vol. I. Morocco Arabic [Maghribin Arabic] Vocabulary and Grammar Notes.
256 pp. 12mo. cloth. 1891. 6s.
Contents. — Introductory note and practical hints, pp. 1-16 ; Grammatical
notes, pp. 17-39 ; English-Arabic vocabulary [in Roman characters only]
classified according to subjects, and alphabetical English index to it,
pp. 40-256.
Vol. II. English-Arabic Dialogues. See under " Baldwin. "
SOCIN (A.). Zuiu arabischen Dialect von Marokko. 8vo. 1893. 3s.
ARABIC (Tunisian Dialect).
BEAUSSIER (M.). Dictionnaire pratique arabe-francais, contenant tous les
mots dans l'arabe parle en Algerie et en Tunisie, ainsi que dans le style
epistolaire, les pieces usuelles et actes judiciaires. 764 and 8 pp. 4to. cloth.
1887. £2.
STUM ME (H.). Grammatik des tunisischen Arabisch nebst Glossar. 183 pp.
8vo. 1896. 9s.
ARABIC (Zanzibar Dialect).
MORITZ (B.). Sammlung arabischer Schriftstuecke mit einem Glossar.
136 pp. Arabic text and 22 Arabic photographed facsimile plates, xxxiv.
and 112 pp. in German. 8vo. cloth. 1892. 16s.
Forms Vol. IX. of the " Lehrlmecher des Seminars fuer orientalische Sprachen
zu Berlin," and refers to the dialects of Zanzibar and of German East
Africa.
ASANTE or ASHANTI, FANTE, TSHI, OJI or OTSHI
(Guinea Coast, West Africa).
CHRISTALLER (J. G.). A Grammar of the Asante or Fante Language called
Tshi (Chwee, Twi), based on the Akuapem Dialect, with Reference to the
other (Akan and Fante) Dialects, pp. xxiv. and 203, 8vo. cloth. 1875.
10s. U.
Kegan Paul, Trench, Trilbner and Co., Limited, Paternoster House,
Charing Cross Road, London: Oriental Catalogue No. X.
African Languages — Bambara, Barea, Bari, Bechuana. 9
CHRISTALLER (J. G.). A Dictionary of the Asante or Fante Language
called Tshi (Chwee, Twi). With a Grammatical Introduction and
Appendices on the Geography of the Gold Coast, pp. xxviii. and 671,
8vo. cloth. 1881. £1.
RMS (H. N.). Grammatical Outline of the Oji Language, with espeaial
Reference to the Akwapim Dialect, and an Akwapim-English and English-
Akwapim Vocabulary, together with a Collection of Proverbs ol the
Natives. 8vo. cloth, pp. viii. and 276. 1854. (Pub. 10s.) 6s.
Elemente des Akwapim Dialects der Odshi-Sprache, enthaltend
"rammatische Gnmdziige und AVortersammlung, nebst einer Sammlung
von Spruchwortern der Eingebornen. pp. xviii. and 322, 8vo. cloth.
1853. 8s.
BAMBARA (Upper Niger).
BINGER (G.). Essai sur la langue baiubara, parlee dans le Kaarta et dans le
Beledougou, suivi d'un vocabulaire, avec une carte indiquant les contrees ou
separlecette langue. 12mo. pp. 133, cloth. 1886. 4s.
BAREA
(Negro Dialect on the Nubian and Abyssinian Frontier).
REINISCH (L.). Die Barea Sprache. Grammatik, Text, und Worterbuch,
nach den handschriftlichen Materialien von W. Munzinger. 186 pp.
8vo. 1874. 6s.
BARI (UrPER Nile Basin).
MITTERRUTZNER (J. C). Sprache der Bari. Grammatik, Text, und
Worterbuch. 8vo. sewed, pp. xxv. and 261. 1867. 5s. Added is a
small vocabulary of the Ngyang-Bara language, by Morlang.
MULLER (F.). Die Sprache der Bari. Ein Beitrag zur Afrikanischen
Linguistik. 8vo. boards, pp. 84, interleaved. 1864. Is. 6d.
Contents.— Grammatik, Lesestucke, deutsch-bari und bari-deutsches Glossar.
BECHUANA, or SECHUANA, or SOTHO, or SESUTO
(A Kaffir Dialect).
ARCHBELL (J.). Grammar of the Bechuana Lauguage. 8vo. boards. Very
scarce. 1837. 15s.
CRISP (W.). Notes towards a Secoana Grammar. Second Edition. 8vo.
pp. 104. 1886. 2s. U.
ENDEMANN (K.). Versuch einer Grammatik des Sotho. 201 pp. 8vo.
1876. 6s.
JACOTTET (E.). Elementary sketch of the Se-Suto grammar. 71 pp. 8vo.
1892. 5s.
KRUGER (F. II.). Steps to learn the Sesuto language, comprising an elementary
grammar, graduate exercises, and a short vocabulary. 2nd Edition. 98 pp.
8vo. limp cloth. 1883. 5s.
MABILLE (A.). Se-Suto-English and English-Se-Suto Vocabulary; and E.
Jacottet, Elementary Sketch of the Se-Suto Grammar. Two works bound
in one volume. 487 pp. 8vo. cloth. 1893. 10s. M.
Kenan Paul, Trench, Triibner and Co., Limited, Paternoster House,
Charimj Cross Road, London : Oriented Catalogue No. A .
10 African Languages — Bedauye, Beidawi, Benguela, Berber, Bilin.
BEDAUYE (North-East Africa).
REINISCH (L.). Bedauye Sprache in Nordost-Africa. 3 parts, 74, 80, and
•204 pp large 8vo. 1893 94. 6s.
Worterbuoh der Bedauye Spraohe. 365 pp. 8vo. 1895. 16s.
BEIDAWI (Tuibks OK the Nortii-Kastkun Soudan).
HAIG (F. T.). Tentative grammar of the Beidawi language, spoken by the
tribes of the North-Eastern Soudan, with short vocabularies and sentences.
7;> pp. post 8vo. 1895. 3s.
BENGUELA, or BENGA (West Africa).
SALVADO Y COS (Rdo. P. F.). Coleccion de Apuntcs Preliminares sobre la
Lengua Benga 6 sea Intvoduccion a una Granuitiea de Este Idioma que se
habla en la Isla de Corisco, Pueblos de Su Bahi'a e Islas Adyacentes. pp.
148, 31. Svo. cloth. 1891. 7s. 6d. ,
SCHUCHARDT (H.). Ueber die Benguela-sprache. Royal 8vo. pp. 14.
1883. Is. 6d.
BERBER (North Africa).
BASSET (K.). Notes de lexicographie berbere. 4 parts. 62, 111, 88, and
100 pp. 8vo. 1883-88. 15s.
Le dialecte de Syouah : Grammaire et glossaire. viii. and 98 pp. 8vo.
1890. 4s.
Loqman Berbere : texte berbere et transcription avec glossaire et une
etude sur la legende de Loqman. 409 pp. 8vo. 1890. 10s.
Etudes sur les dialectes berberes. xiv. and 165 pp. 8vo. 1894. 7s.
Etude sur la zenatia du Mzab, de Ouarsla et de l'Oued-Rir. xv. and
274 pp. 8vo. 1892. 10s. 6d.
FAIDHERBE (Le General). Le Zenaga des tribus senegalaises. Contribution
a lV-tude de la langue berbere. Large 8vo. sewed, pp. 95. 1877. 4s. 6d.
GABELENTZ (G. von der). Verwandtschaft des Baskisehen mit den Berber -
sprachen Nord-Afrikas herausgegeben nach den hinterlassenen Manuscripten
durch A. C. Graf von der Schulenburg. 286 pp. text, with 4 tables. 8vo.
1894. 12s.
MERCIER (G.). Le Chaouia de l'Aures (dialecte de l'Ahmar-Khaddou) Etude
grammatical^ Texte en dialecte chaouia. 8vo. 1897. 3s. 6d.
RINN (L.). Les origines berberes : etudes linguistiques et ethnologiques. 8vo.
1889. 10s.
SIERAKOWSKI (A. Graf). Das Schaui. Ein Beitrag zur berberischen
Sprachen und Yoelkerkunde. 138 pp. 8vo. 1871. 4s.
VENTURE DE PARADIS. Grammaire et dictionnaire abreges de la langue
berbere, revus par. P. Am. Jaubert. pp. 235, 4to. 1844. 12s. 6(7.
BILIN, or BOGOS (North-East Africa).
REINISCH (L.). Die Bilinsprache in Nordost-Africa mit einer Ubersichts-
tabelle der Verbformen. 138 pp. 8vo. 1882. 2s. 6d.
Die Bilin-Sprache.
Vol. I. Texte der Bilin-Sprache. Royal Svo. pp. viii. and 322. 1883. 10s.
Vol. II. Wbrterbuch der Bilin-Sprache. Royal 8vo. pp. vi. and 426.
1887. £1.
Kegan Paul, Trench, Triibner and Co., Limited, Paternoster House,
Charing Cross Road, London : Oriental Catalogue No. X.
African Languages — Bishari, Bornu, Bubi, Bullom, Bunda. 1 1
BISHARI (Nubia).
ALMKVIST (H.). Die Bischari-Sprache Tu-Bedawie in Nordost-Afrika.
2 vols. 4to. sewed, pp. v. and 302 and vi. and 113. 1881-85. £1 10s.
Contents : Vol. I. Grammatik.
Vol. II. Bischari-deutsch und deutsch-bischari Wbrterbuch.
BORNU, or KANURI (Central Africa).
KOELLE (S. W.). Grammar of the Bornu or Kanuri Language. 8vo. cloth,
pp. xix. and 326. 1854. 7s. M.
African Native Literature or Proverbs, Tales, Fables, and Historical
Fragments in the Kanuri or Bornu Language, to which are added a Trans-
lation of the above and a Kanuri- English Vocabulary. Royal 8vo. cloth,
pp. xiv. and 434. 1854. 7s. Gd.
NORRIS (E.). Grammar of the Bornu or Kanuri Language. With Dialogues,
Translations, and Vocabulary. 8vo. pp. 101. (Out of print and scarce.)
1853. 6s.
BUBI (Spoken on Island of Fernando Po).
JUANOLA (J.). Primer paso a la lengua Bubi 6 sea ensayo a una gramatica
de este idioma seguido de tres apendices. 189 pp. 8vo. 1890. 6s.
BULLOM
(Dialect of Mandigo vernacular, near Sierra Leone, West Africa).
NYLANDER (Rev. G. R.). Grammar and Vocabulary of the Bullom Language,
pp. 159, small 8vo. cloth. 181 4. 4s.
BUNDA, KIMBUNDA, or ANGOLESE
(Loanda, West Africa).
CANNECATTIM (F. B. M. de). Colleccao de observacoes grammaticaes
sobre a lingua Bunda, ou Angolense. 4to. half-bound, pp. xx. and 218.
1805. 10s. U.
The same. Second Edition, xviii. and 174 pp. 8vo. 1859. 7s. 6d.
Diccionario da lingua Bunda, ou Angolense, explicada na Portugueza,
e Latina. pp. ix. 720, 8vo. 1804. Bound up in one volume with
F. B. M. de Cannecattim, Colleccao de observac5es grammaticaes sobre a
lingua Bunda ou Angolense e diccionario abreviado da lingua Congueza.
Second Edition. 174 pp. 8vo. 1859. £2 2s.
CASTAGNA (N.). Di alcuni vocaboli e modi del vernacolo angolano col
riscontro italiano o toscano. 32 pp. 12mo. 1891. Is. 6d.
CHATELAIN (H.). Grammatica elemental- do Kimbundu ou lingua de
Angola, xxiv. and 172 pp. 8vo. 1889. Out of print. 7s. 6<i
CORDEIRO DA MATT A. Ensaio de diccionario kimbundu -portuguez.
174 pp. 8vo. 1893. 4s.
WOODWAR D (W. H. ). Collections for a Handbook of the Boondei Language.
8vo. cloth. 1882. 4s. .
Contains grammatical notes and a Boondei-English and Enghsh-Boonclei
vocabulary.
Kegan Paul, 'Trench, Trubner and Co., Limited, Paternoster House,
Charing Cross Road, London; Oriental Catalogue No, X.
12 African Languages — Cape Dutch, Chamir, Dahomey, Denka,
CAPE DUTCH.
MANSFELT (N.). Proeve van mi Kaapsch-Hollandsch idioticon met toclicht
on opmerk, 8vo. 1884. 6a.
VILJOEN (W.J.)- Beitrage zui Gesohiohte der Cap Hollandisohen Sprache.
59 pp. Svo. 1S96. 2s.
CHAMIR (Abyssinia).
REINISCH (L.). Die Chamirspraolie in Abessinien. 2 parts, 127 and 136 pp.
with tWO laige tables, Svo. 1S84. 5s.
DAHOMEY (Guinea Coast).
BONNAVENTURE (A.). Elements do grammaire dc la langue fon on
dahomienne, suivis d'un vocabulaire et d'nn recueil de conversation.
74 pp. Svo. 1895. 2s. 6d.
COURDIOUX Dictionnaire de la langue Tog-be ou dahomeenne. 8vo.
\"ol. I. Franeais-dahonieen. 1879. 4s. 6d.
DELAFOSSE (M.). Manuel dahomeen cont. une grammaire, chrcstomathie,
et un dictionnaire francais-dahonieen et dahomeen-francais. 436 pp. 8vo.
1894. 10s.
DENKA, or DINKA (Kordopan).
BELTRAME (0. ). Grammatica della lingua denka. 159 pp. 8vo. 1870. 5s.
MITTERRUTZNER (J. C). Die Dinka-Sprache in Central Afrika ; kurze
Grannnatik, Text, und Dinkaisch-Deutsch-Italienisches Worterbuch. 8vo.
pp. 308. 1866. 7s.
DUALLA (At Fernando Po, West Coast).
CHRISTALLER (J. G.). Handbuch der Dualla-Sprache. 216 pp. 8vo. cloth.
1S92. 4s. 6d.
SEIDEL (A.). Luitfaden zur Erlernung der Dualla-sprache in Kamerun mit
Lesestuecken und einem deutseh-dualla und dualla-deutschem Woerterbuche.
83 pp. large 8vo. 1892. 3s.
EFIK (Old Calabar).
(Chief Language on the estuary of the Cross river).
GOLD IE (H.). Principles of Efik grammar, with specimen of the language.
105 pp. 12mo. cloth. 1868. 3s. M.
Dictionary of the Efik-English and English-Efik Language. 643
and 42 pp. 8vo. bound. N.D. £1 5s.
EWE
(Western Part of the Slave Coast, East of the River Volta).
EWE-LESEFIBEL. 64 pp. 8vo. boards. 1892. 2s.
EWE XECHLE-AGBALE. Ewe Reading Book (Part II.) for the upper
classes of the elementary schools of the North German Missionary Society.
160 pp. small 8vo. 1886.
Kegan Paul, Trench, Triibner and Co., Limited, Paternoster House,
Charing Cross Road, London; Oriental Catalogue No. X,
African Languages— Falasha, Fan, Fernandian, Fiote, Fulah. 13
HENRICI (E.). Lehrbuch der Eplic [Ewe] Sprache, Anlo-, Anecho-, und
Dahome-Mundart, mit Glossar und einer Karte der Sklavenkuste. xxi. and
270 pp. 8vo. cloth. 1891. 16s. .
Forms Vol. VI. of the "Lehrbiicher des Seminars fur onentahsche Spracnen
zu Berlin."
KNUESLI (A.). Deutsch-Ewe Woerterbuch. 413 pp. lithographed 4to. cloth.
1892. £2.
KNUESLI (J.). Ewe-German-English Dictionary. 1084 pp. lithographed
small 4to. cloth. 1891. £2.
SCHLEGEL (J B.). Schliissel zur Ewe-Sprache. Dargeboten in den gram-
matischen Grundziigen des Anlo-Dialekts derselben mit Woertersammlung,
&c. 8vo. pp. xxiv. and 328. 1857. 5s.
FALASHA (an Agau Dialect, spoken by Jews in Abyssinia).
FLAD (M J ) Elements and Vocabulary of the Falasha language [spoken in
Abyssinia]. Ed. by Dr. L. Krapff. 92 pp. 12mo. 1866. Is. U.
FAN (Western Africa, South of the Equator).
ZABALA (A. 0.). Vocabulary of the Fan language in Western Africa, with
Spanish interpretations prepared on the spot. vi. and 34 pp. small 8vo.
1887. 2s.
FERNANDIAN (Island of Fernando Po).
CLARKE (J.). Introduction to the Fernandian Tongue. Part I. Second
Edition, pp. viii. and 56. 8vo. cloth. 1848. 12s. M.
Contains a comparative table of ten primitive words in 232 African Dialects.
Very scarce.
FIOTE (French Congo).
CARRIE. Grammaire de la langue fiote, dialecte du Kakongo. 198 pp.
small 8vo. 1890.
USSEL. Petite grammaire de la langue fiote, dialecte du Loango. 88 pp.
small 8vo. 1888. 2s.
VISSEQ (A.). Grammaire fiote (langue du Congo). 64 pp. small 8vo. cloth.
1889. 2s. 6d.
Dictionnaire francais-fiote (langue du Congo). 156 pp. small 8vo.
cloth. 1889. 3s.
Dictionnaire francais-fiote (dialecte du Kakongo). 145 pp. small 8vo.
cloth. 1890. 3s.
Dictionnaire fiot-francais. 211 pp. small 8vo. cloth. 1890. 4s. 6d.
FULAH or PULO, FULFULDE, FULDE, FOULE, POULE
(South of Lower Senegal).
FAIDHERBE. Grammaire et vocabulaire de la langue poul a l'usage de
voyageurs dans le Soudan. Second Edition. 165 pp. 12mo. cloth. 1882. ^ 4s.
GUIRAUDON (T. G. de). Manuel de la langue foule, parlee dans la Sene-
gamble et le Soudan (containing a Grammar, Text, and a French-Foule
Vocabulary). 144 pp. post 8vo. cloth. 1894. 6s.
Keqan Paul, Trench, Triibner and Co., Limited, Paternoster House,
Charing Cross Road, London: Oriental Catalogue Ao. -*.
14 African Lwignages—Gcdla, Chit, Oiryama, Grebo, Harari.
KRAUSE (G. A.)- Beitrag but Kenntniss der Fulischcn Spraohe in Afrika.
10S pp. with language map, 8vo. 1884. 4s.
Forms Part I. of the "Mittheilungen der Biebeck'sohen Niger Expedition.
REICHARDT [C .1.). Primer oftheFulde Language. 8vo. cloth. 1859. \s.6d.
REICHARDT (Ch. A. L). Grammar of the Fulde Language, with an
Appendix of some original Traditions and Portions of Scripture translated
into Fulde, together with S chapters of the Book of Genesis. Translated
by Dr. Baikie. 8vo. cloth, pp. xxiii. and 339. 1876. 12s. 6d.
REICHARDT (C. .T.). Vocabulary of the Fnlde Language, Fvdde-English
and English-Fulde. 357 pp. Svo. cloth. 1878. 10s. 6d.
Three original Fullah pieces in Arabic and Roman characters, with
English translation, 02 pp. Svo. 1859. Is. 6d.
GALL A, or OROMONA, or OROMONICA (East Africa.)
KRAPF (L.). Vocabnlary of the Galla Language. 43 pp. small Svo. cloth,
1S42. Is. 6d.
PRAETORIUS (F.). Zur Gramniatik der Gallasprache. viii. and 310 pp.
Svo. 1893. £1 2s. 6d.
SCOLART (L.). Grammatica oromona ossia della lingua parlata nel paese dei
Gallas e nell' Abessinia. 63 pp. 8vo. 1885. 3s.
. Frasario e vocaboli in lingua Amarica-Oromona-Araba-Inglese con le
preghiere in Etiopico. 71 pp. lithographed, 12mo. 1888. 2s. 6d.
VITERBO (E.). Grannnatica e dizionario della lingua Oromonica (Galla).
2 vols. 150 and 105 pp. small 8vo. cloth. 1892. 5s.
Vol. I. Galla- Italiano ; vol. II. Italiano-Galla.
GHAT (A Bantu language spoken North of Mombasa).
KRAUSE (G. A.). Proben der Spraclie von Ghat in Sahara. Mit Haussan-
ischer und Deutscher Uebersetzung. Mit einer Kartenskizze und facsimiles,
pp. 82 Svo. 1884. 4s. .
Forms Part II. of the " Mittheilungen der Riebeck'schen Niger Expedition.
GIRYAMA.
TAYLOR (W. E.). Giryama Vocabulary and collections, xxvii. and 140 pp.
small 8vo. cloth. 1891. 6s. M.
GREBO (Ivory Coast).
PAYNE (J.). Dictionary of the Grebo language. 153 pp. small 8vo. 1867.
Very scarce. 16s.
HARARI
(A Semitic Language in the North-East of Africa).
MULLER (Fr.). Ueber die Harari-Sprache im oestlichen Afrika. 15 pp. 8vo.
1864. Is. 6d.
HAUSA (East of the Niger).
DIRR (A.). Manuel pratique de la langue haoussa, langue commerciale du
Soudan, avec exercices gradues, une chrestomathie et vocabulaire et une
preface 'par le commandant Monteil. 140 pp. 12mo. 1895. 5s.
Kegan Paul, Trench, Trilbner and Co., Limited, Paternoster House,
Charing Cross Road, London: Oriental Catalogue No. X.
African Languages — Herero, Ibo, Idzo. 15
LE ROUX (J. M.). Essai de dietionnaire francais-haoussa et kaoussa-francais,
" precede d'un essai de grammaire de la langue haoussa (parlee par les negres
du Soudan). With a large map of North Africa, xlv. and 330 pp. large
8vo. 1886. 16s.
MAGANA HAUSA. Native Literature : or, Proverbs, Tales, Fables, Historical
Fragments in the Hausa Language, with a translation in English. By
J. F. Schoen. 12mo. cloth, pp. xx. and 288. 1885. 4s.
ROBINSON (C. H.). Specimens of Hausa literature ; Hausa text (in Roman
characters) with English translation, facsimile of the Hausa text and notes.
xix. 112 pp. and facsimile plates, large 8vo. cloth. 1896. 10s. 6d.
Edition without the text in facsimile, 5s.
Hausa grammar, with exercises, readings, and a vocabulary, 123 pp.,
with a facsimile specimen of Hausa MS. in Arabic characters. 8vo. cloth.
1897. 5s. Forms a volume of Trubner's Collection of Simplified Grammars.
Hausa dictionary in preparation.
SCHOEN (J. F.). Farawa Letafin Magana Hausa, a Primer and Vocabulary in
the Haussa Language. 2 parts. 8vo. cloth, pp. 53 and 46. 1857. 2s. 6d.
Grammar of the Hausa Language. 8vo. cloth, pp. xiv. and 234.
1862. 5s.
Vocabulary of the Haussa Language. Part I. English and Haussa.
Part II Haussa and English ; and Phrases and Specimens of Translations,
to which are prefixed the grammatical elements of the Haussa language,
pp. vi. and 220, 8vo. 1843. 5s.
Appendix to the Dictionary of the Hausa Language (published 1876),
Hausa-English Part, with additions of Hausa Literature. Post 8vo. cloth,
pp. iv. and 206. 1888. 5s. Printed in Roman characters only, the
dictionary, which was published in 1876, is out of print.
Hausa Reading Book, with the rudiments of grammar and vocabularies,
and travellers' vade mecum. 8vo. 1877. 2s. 6d.
HERERO (South- West Africa).
BRINCKER (H.). Worterbuch und kurzgefasste Grammatik des Otji-herero
mit Beifiigung verwaudter Ausdriicke und Formen des Oshi-ndonga-Otjambo,
herausgegeben von C. G. Biittner. 351 and 31 pp. 8vo. cloth. 1886. 25s.
HAHN (C H.). Grundziige einer Grammatik des Herero (im Westhchen
Afrika), nebst einem Worterbuche, with grammatical tables. 8vo. pp. xi.
and 197. 1857. 6s.
KOLBE (F W.) An English-Herero Dictionary, with an introduction to the
study of Herero and Bantu in general. Post 8vo. cloth, pp. Iv. and 569.
1883. 15s.
IBO, or IOBO (North-East op the Niger Delta).
CROWTHER (BishopS.). Vocabulary of the Ibo language. 2 vols. 5s.
Part I. Ibo-English. viii. and 109 pp. small 8vo. 1882.
Part II. English-Ibo, by J. F. Schoen. 90 pp. post 8vo. 1883.
Single volumes are sold separately at 3s. each.
SCHOEN (J. F.). Grammatical Elements of the Ibo language. 12mo. cloth,
pp. 94. 1861. 2s.
IDZO, or IDSO (Niger Delta).
CAREW (W. E. L.). Primer in the Ubani dialect of the Idso language. 27 pp.
8vo. limp cloth. Is. 6d.
Kegan Paul, Trench^Triibner and Co., Limited, Paternoster House,
Charing Cross Rood, London: Oriental Catalogue No. A.
16 African Languages — Kabdil, Kaffa, Kaguru, Kamba, Kavirdndo.
KABAIL
(Hamitic Language, Norte Coast op Africa).
AHMED BEN KHOUAS. Notions succintes de granunaire kabyle. 86 pp.
12mo. 1881. 2s.
BASSET (R.). Manuel de langue kabyle (dialecte Zouaoua), eontenant gram-
maire, bibliographic, chrestomathie et lexique. Svo. cloth. 1887. 7s. 6d.
BELKASSEM BEN SEDIRA. Coins de langue kabyle (dialecte Zouaoua),
grammaire, versions, contes, tables, &c. 248 and 430 pp. 12mo. cloth.
1887. 8s. 6tf.
CREUSAT. Essai de dictionnaire francais-kabyle (Zouaoua) precede des
elements de eette langue. 12mo. 5s.
HANOTEAU (A.). Essai de grammaire kabyle renfermant les principes du
langage park' 1 par les populations du versant nord du Jurjura, et speciale-
iiunt par les Igaouaouen on Zouaoua, suivi de notes et d'une notice sur
quelques inscriptions en caracteres dits Tifinar' et en langue Tamacher't.
Large Svo. sewed, pp. xxiv. and 393. Out of print. 1858. 15s.
NEWMAN (F. W.) Kabail Vocabulary. Supplemented by Aid of a New
Source, pp. 124, crown 8vo. clotli. 1887. 5s.
OLIVIER. Dictionnaire francais-kabyle. 316 pp. 12mo. cloth. 1878. 6s.
KAFFA (A Dialect of Gonga, S.-W. Abyssinia).
REINISCH (L.). Die Kafa-sprache in Nordost Africa. 2 parts. 93 and 138
pp. 8vo. 1888. 4s.
KAGURU.
LAST (J. T. ). Grammar of the Kaguru language Eastern Equatorial Africa.
147 pp. 12mo. clotli. 1886. 2s.
KAMBA
(Eastern Bantu Language in Eastern Equatorial Africa).
LAST (J. T. ). Grammar of the Kamba Language (Eastern Equatorial Africa).
8vo. cloth, pp. 40. 1885. 2s.
KAVIRONDO (East of Victoria Nyanza).
WAKEFIELD (M.). Vocabulary of the Kavirondo Language. 8vo. pp. 7.
1887. Is.
KIBANGI (Upper Kongo).
SIMS (A.). Vocabulary of Kibangi as spoken by the Babangi (commonly
called Bayansi) on the Upper Kongo from Kwa Mouth (Kasai) to Liboko
(Bangala). Ill pp. 8vo. 1886. 3s. 6d.
KILOLO or LUNKUNDU (Upper Kongo).
EDDIE (J. B.). Vocabulary of Kilolo as spoken by the Bankundu, a section
of the Balolo tribe at Ikengo, with a few introductory notes on the grammar.
203 pp. small 8vo. 1887. 8s.
McKITTRICH (J. and F. T.). Guide to the Lunkundu language. 230 pp.
8vo. 1893. 4s. 6d.
[HAILES (L. M.).] Kilolo- English vocabulary. 159 pp. Svo. cloth. 1891.
2s. 6d.
Kegan Paul, Trench, Triibner and Co., Limited, Paternoster House,
Charing Cross Road, London: Oriental Catalogue No. X.
African Languages — Kiniassa, Kisukuma, Kiteke, Ki-Tikuu. 17
KINIASSA (Lake Nyassa).
REBMAN (J.). Dictionary of the Kiniassa Language. Edited by L. Krapf.
8vo. cloth, pp. viii. and 182. 1877. 5s.
KISUKUMA (on Victoria Nyanza).
SEIDEL (A.). Das Kisukuma. Grammatische Skizze niit kisukunia-deutsch
und deutsch-kisukunia Worterbuche. 18 pp. 8vo. 1894. Is. 6d.
KITEKE (Spoken by the Batekes on the Upper Congo).
SIMS (A.). English-Kiteke Vocabulary. 190 pp. small 8vo. boards. 1886. 4s.
KI-TIKUU and KI-POKOMO (Swahili Dialects).
WURTZ (F.) and SEIDEL (A.). Worterbuch der Ki-Tikuu und der Ki-
Pokomo Sprachen in Ost Africa. 63 pp. large 8vo. 1895. 6s.
KONGO. (See also under "Fiote.")
A. M. D. G. Elements de la langue congolai.se, suivie d'un choix de phrases et
de deux vocabulaires. 95 pp. small 8vo. cloth. 1895. 2s. 6d.
BARFIELD (J.). The Concords of the Congo Language as spoken at Palaballa,
being a contribution to the Syntax of the Congo Tongue, with illustrative
sentences. 160 pp. 8vo. half calf. 1884. 4s.
BENT LEY (W. PL). Dictionary and Grammar of the Congo Language, as
spoken at San Salvador, the ancient capital of the old Congo Empire, West
Africa, xxiv. and 718 pp. 8vo. 1887. £1 Is.
Appendix to it, forming pp. 719-1052 of the entire work. 8vo. cloth.
1895. 10s. 6d.
BRUSCIOTTO. Grammar of the Congo Language as spoken 200 years ago,
translated from the Latin by H. Grattan Guinness, pp. xii. and 112, 8vo.
cloth. 1882. 8s.
CAMBIER. Essai sur la langue congolaise. 124 pp. interleaved, small 8vo.
1891. 4s.
CRAVEN (H.) and BARFIELD (J.). English-Congo and Congo-English
Dictionary, with Appendix containing useful sentences, pp. xii. 284 and
xix. 8vo. half bound. 1883. 6s.
GUINNESS (H. G.). Grammar of the Congo Language as spoken in the cataract
region below Stanley Pool. 267 pp. small 8vo. cloth. 1882. Scarce. 10s. 6d.
KUNAMA (Abyssinia).
REINISCH (L.). Die Kunama-Sprache in Nordost-Afrika. In 4 parts. 90,
96, 112, and 136 pp. 8vo. 1881-91. 8s.
KWAFI, or WAKUAFI (East Africa).
KRAPF (Rev. Dr. J. L.). Vocabulary of the Engiituk Eloikob, or the
Language of the Wakuafi-Nation in the Interior of Equatorial Africa. 8vo.
cloth, pp. 144. 1854. 3s. 6d.
LIBYAN.
NEWMAN (F. W.). Libyan Vocabulary, an essay towards reproducing the
ancient Numidian language out of four modern tongues. 204 pp. 8vo. cloth.
1882. 10s. 6d.
K&jan Paul, Trench, Triibner and Co., Limit?'/, Paternoster House,
Charing Cross Road, London: Oriental Catalogue No. A'.
18 African Languages— Luba, Luganda^ Makua, Malagasy.
LUBA (Central Africa).
About 5° North Lot., 30° East of Greenwich.
SWAN (C. A A Notes on the grammatical construction of Chiluba as spoken
in Garenganze (Central Africa), with brief Vocabularies in Luba-English and
Knglish-Luha, and six chapters in Chiluba from the (lospel of St. John.
63 pp. posl 8vo. cloth. 1892. 3s.
LUGANDA, RUGANDA, or GANDA
(Spoken in the Uganda Country on the Victoria Nyanza).
MANUEL DE LANGUE LUGANDA comprenant la grammaire et un reeueil de
contes et de legendes. Second edition. 28f5 pp. small 8vo. 1894. 10s. 6d.
O'FLAHERTY (Ph.). Collection for a Luganda-English and English-Luganda
Lexicon. 41 pp. Svo. cloth. No date (1894). 2s.
PILKINGTON (G. L.). Handbook of Luganda. 93 pp. 12mo. cloth. 1892. 2s.
PRI M ER. Lettersand Syllables, and the Commandments in the Luganda Language
[Ekitabo ekyo kusoka]. Fcap. 8vo. boards, pp. 14. London, 1887. Is. 6d.
WILSON (C. T.). An Outline Grammar of the Luganda Language, with an
English-Luganda and Luganda-English Vocabulary. Fcap. Svo. cloth.
1883. 3s.
LUNDA (Language of Central Africa South of Equator).
CARVALHO (H. A. Dias de). Metodo pratico para fallar a lingua da Lunda.
xxii. and 391 pp. 8vo. 1890. 16s.
Contains a grammar, chrestomathy, dictionary, &c.
MAKUA (Mozambique).
AYRES DE CARVALHO (Soveral). Breve estudo sobre a ilha de Mocam-
bique acompanhado d'um pequeno vocabulario Portuguez-Macua. 31 pp.
8vo. 1887. 2s.
MAPLES (C). Collections for a Handbook of the Makua Language. 100 pp. '
small 8vo. cloth. No date (1879). 2s. Qd.
RANKIN (D. J.). Arab Tales. Translated from the Swahili Language into
the Tiigulu Dialect of the Makua Language, as spoken in the immediate
vicinity of Mozambique. Together with comparative vocabularies of five
Dialects of the Makua Language. Cr. 8vo. boards, pp. xv. and 46. 1887.
3s. 6d.
MALAGASY.
ABINAL et MALZAC. Dictionnaire malgache-francais. 815 pp. 8vo. half
calf. 1888. £1 5s.
COUSINS (W. E.). A concise Introduction to the study of the Malagasy
Language, as spoken in Imerina. Third edition, enlarged, pp. iv. and 80,
8vo. cloth. 1894. 5s.
DALMOND. Yocabulaire et grammaire pour les langues malgaches, sakalave
et betsimitsara. 142 pp. small 4to. 1842. 16s.
Vocabulaire franc. -malgache, suivi d'uue petite grammaire et de traductions
litterales malgache-frane.
ENGLISH and Malagasy Vocabulary, with sentences in both languages illus-
trating the words used in the Vocabulary. Compiled by three native
officials. 476 pp. Svo half calf. 1863. 10s. U.
Kegan Paul, Trench, Triibner and Co., Limited, Paternoster House,
Charing Cross Road, London: Oriental Catalogue No. X.
African Languages — Mande, Masai, Mashona, Matabele. 19
KESSLER (J.). Introduction to the Language and Literature of Madagascar,
with hints to travellers, and a map. 90 pp. small 8vo. cloth. 1870. 4s. 6c?.
MAR RE (A.). Grammaire malgache suivie de nombreux exercices. Second
edition. 155 and xxiv. pp. small 8vo. boards. 1894. 5s.
Yocabulaire francais-malgache. 391 pp. 8vo. boards. 1895. 8s.
PARKER (G. W.)> Concise Grammar of the Malagasy Language, pp. 66,
with an Appendix, crown 8vo. cloth. 1883. 5s.
Forms a volume of "Triibner's Collection of Simplified Grammars."
RAHIDY (B. ). Cours pratique de langue malgache. In 3 vols, small 8vo. cloth.
Vol. I. Grammaire. 103 pp. 1895. 3s. 6d.
Vol. II. Dialogues usuels et vocabulaire francais-malgache. 291 pp.
1895. 4s.
Vol. III. Exercices et vocabulaire malgache-francais. 142 pp. 1895. 4s.
RICHARDSON (J.). Malagasy for Beginners : a series of Graduated Lessons
and Exercises in Malagasy, as spoken by the Hovas. 120 pp. 8vo. cloth.
1884. 4s.
RICHARDSON (Rev. J.). New Malagasy-English Dictionary. Edited and
re-arranged, lix. and 832 pp. half bound, 8vo. 1885. £1.
SARDA (P.). Petit dictionnaire malgache-francais, precede des principes de
grammaire hova et suivi des phrases et expressions usuelles. 32 and 150 pp.
small 8vo. 1896. 2s. 6d.
SEWELL (J. S.). English-Malagasy Dictionary. 380 pp. 8vo. cloth. 1875.
12s. 66?.
VOCABULAIRE francais-malgache redige par les Missionaires Catholiques a
l'usage de leurs eleves qui apprennent le francais. pp. 418, 8vo. cloth.
1880. 10s.
New edition of 1894, 8vo. cloth. £1 5s.
MANDE (Soudan).
RAMBAUD (J. B.). Dictionnaire francais-mande. 131 pp. 8vo. 1896. 5s.
Avec une introduction sur la langue mande et les caraeteres distinctifs de cette
langue et de ses divers dialectes et avec un abrege de grammaire mande.
STEINTHAL (H.). Die Mande-Neger-Sprachen psychologisch und phonetisch
betrachtet. pp. xxiv. and 344, royal 8vo. 1867. 6s.
MASAI.
ERHARDT (Rev. J.). Vocabulary of the Euguduk Iloigob, as spoken by the
Masai Tribes in East Africa, pp. 110, 8vo. cloth. 1857. 2s. 6d.
MASHONA, or SHUNA (South-East Africa).
HARTMANN (Rev. A. M.). Outline of a grammar of the Mashona language.
vii. and 69 pp. post 8vo. cloth. 1893. 5s.
English-Mashona Dictionary, with appendix of some phrases. 78 pp.
12mo. cloth. 1894. 6s.
MATABELE and MAKALAKA (South-East Africa).
ELLIOTT (W. A.). Dictionary of the Tebele and Slnina languages, xxxiii. and
441 pp. 8vo. cloth. 1897. 10s. 6d.
WEALE (M. E.). Matabele and Makalaka vocabulary, intended for the use of
prospectors and farmers in Mashonaland. 32 pp. 12mo. cloth. 1893. 5s.
Kegan Paul, Trench, Triibner and Co., Limited, Paternoster House,
Charing Cross Road, London: Oriental Catalogue No. X.
20 African Languages — Mauritius, Musuk, Mivamba, Nagoe.
MAURITIUS.
BAISSAC (C). Etude sur le patois oreole maurioien. '233 pp. small 8vo.
1880. 6s.
MUSUK (Spoken South of the Tshad Lake).
MULLER , F. ). Die Musukaprache in Central Africa nach den Aufzeichnungen
von (;. A. Krause herausgegeben, mitdem Musuk-deutachem Vocabular und
einerKarte. 70 pp. 8vo. 1886. 2s. M.
MWAMBA (Xorth of Lake Nvassa).
BAIN (J. A.). Collections of the Mwamba language spoken at the north end
of Lake Nyassa. 82 pp. 12mo. 1891. 2s.'
NAGOE (Sub-Dialect of Daiiomy).
BOUCHE (P.). Etude sur la langue Nago (Yoruba). 51 pp. 8vo. 1880.
2s. 6d.
NAMAQUA, or NAMA
(Hottentots of the South-West Coast).
CH ARENCEY (H. de). Elements de la grammaire hottentote (dialecte Nama).
20 pp. Svo. 1864. 2s.
HAHN (Th.). Die Sprache der Nama. 52 pp. 8vo. 1870. 2s. U.
KRCENLEIN (J. G.). Wortschatz der Khoi-Khoin (Namaqua-Hottentotten).
Roy. Svo. pp. vi. and 350. 1889. £1 5s.
OLPP (J.). Nama-Deutsches Woerterbuch. 118 pp. 8vo. cloth. 1888. 3s.
SCHILS (G. H.). Grammaire complete de la langue des Namas. xxi. and
94 pp. large 4to. 1891. 15s.
Dictionnaire etymologique de la langue des Namas. 106 pp. 4to.
1895. £1 Is.
WALLMANN (J. C). Formenlehre der Namaqua-Spraehe. 95 pp. 8vo.
1857. 3s.
NGONI (South Bank of the Zambesi).
ELMSLIE (W. A.). Introductory grammar of the Ngoni (Zulu) language, as
spoken in Mombera's country. 51 pp. 8vo. cloth. 1891. 5s.
Table of Concords and Paradigm of Verb of the Ngoni language, as
spoken in Mombera's country. Large folio, folded in book form. 1891. 6s.
NIAM-NIAM
(Identic with Nyanja, for which see).
COLOMBAROLI (A.). Premiers Elements de Langue A-Sandeh (vulgaire-
ment appelee Niam-Niam. 99 pp. 8vo. 1895. 4s.
NIKA, or MA-NIKA, or NYIKA
(East Coast of Africa, Two Degrees South of Pokomo Kiver).
KRAPF (L.)and REBMANN (J.). A Nika- English Dictionary. Edited by
T. H. Sparshott. pp. viii. and 391, 8vo. cloth. 1887. 10s. 6d.
Regan Paul, Trench, Triibner and Co., Limited, Paternoster House,
Charing Cross Road, London .- Oriental Catalogue No. X.
African Languages — Nubian, Nupe, Nyamwezi, Nyanja. 21
NUBIAN
(Nile -Valley from the Tropic of Cancer to the Frontier
of Abyssinia).
LEPSIUS (R.). Nubische Grammatik. Mit Einleitung iiber die Volker und
Spraclien Afrika's. 8vo. clotb, pp. cxxvi. and 506. 1880. (Pub. £1 6s.) £1 Is.
REINISCH (L.). Die Nuba Sprache.
Vol. I. Grammatik und Texte. 308 pp. 8vo. 1879. 7s. 6d.
Vol. II. Nubiscb-deutsches und deutscb-nubiscbes Woerterbuch. 240 pp.
8vo. 1879. 7s. M,
NUPE (Basin of the Quorra).
CROWTHER (S.). Primer of the Nupe Language, pp. 22. small 8vo. limp
cloth. 1860. Is. 6d.
Elements of a Grammar and Vocabulary of the Nupe Language.
208 pp. 8vo. cloth. 1864. 6s.
J[OHNSON]-(H.). Nupe Reading Book for the use of schools. 48 pp. 8vo.
1882. Is 6d.
NYAMWEZI.
STEER E (Ed.). Collections for a Handbook of the Nyamwezi Language as
spoken at Unyanyembe. 99 pp. small 8vo. cloth. (No date.) Is. 6d.
NYANJA, CHINYANJA, or MANGANJA
(Bantu Language spoken S. and S.-W. of Lake JNyassa).
CALDWELL (R). Chi-Nyanja Simplified. Second Edition. 88 and 46 pp.
12mo. cloth. 1897. 2s. 6d.
HENRY (G. ). Grammar of the Chinyanja [spoken near the shores of Lake
Nyassa]. 232 pp. post 8vo. 1891. 9s.
LAWS (R.). Table of Concords and Paradigm of verbs of the Chinyanja
language (Lake Nyassa). Large folio, folded in book form. 1885. 5s.
English-Nyanja Dictionary, with a table of Concords of the Chinyanja
language. 231 pp. post 8vo. cloth. 1894. 7s. M.
RIDDEL (A.). A Grammar of the Chinyanja language as spoken at Lake
Nyassa, with Chinyanja-English and English-Chinyanja Vocabularies.
150 pp. small 8vo. 1880. Out of print. 6s.
SCOTT (Rev. D. C). Cyclopaedic Dictionary of the Mang'anja language
(usually called Nyanja), spoken in British Central Africa [Manganja-
English and English-Mang'anja]. 737 pp. 8vo. cloth. 1892. 12s. 6(/.
[F. A. R.] Vocabulary of English-Chinyanja and Chinyanja-English, as spoken
at Likoma, Lake Nyasa. 2nd edition. 88 pp. with table of Concords,
small 8vo. limp cloth. 1895. Is. 6d.
OSHIKUANJAMA (German South-West Africa).
BRINCKER (P. H.). Lehrbuch des Oshikuanjama [Bantu-Sprache in Deutsch
Sued west- Afrika].
Vol. I. Grammatik des Oshikuanjama in Verbindung mit Oshindonga und
mit Verglcichungdes Otjiherero. 118 pp.
Vol. II. Woerterbuch des Oshikuanjama mit Vergleichung des Oshindonga
und Otjiherero in zwei Theilen sachlich-geordnet. 136 pp.
Two vols, bound in one. 8vo. cloth. 1891. 16s.
Forms Vol. VIII. of the " Lehrbuecher des Seminars fuer orientalischc
Sprachen zu Berlin."
Kegan Paul, Trench, Triibner and Co., Limited, Paternoster House,
Charing Cross Load, London : Oriental Catalogue No. X.
i'i' African Languages — Pongwe, Quara, ttonga t Sagdra } Saho.
PONGWE, or MPONGWE
(French Western Africa, between the Senegal and Gambia).
GRAMMAR of the Mpongwe Language, with Vocabularies. By the Missionaries
of the A.B.C.F.M. Gaboon Mission, Western Africa, pp. 94, 8vo. Scarce.
1817. 10s. 6d.
DELORME (A.). Dictionnaire francais-pongoue par les missionnaires de la
Congregation <iu St. Esprit 854 pp. 8vo. 1877. 10s.
GACHON. Dictionnaire pongoue-francais, precede des principes de la langue
pongouie par les missionnaires de la Congregation du St. Esprit, xxxix. and
288 pp. 8vo. 1SS1. 8s.
LE BERRE. Gramniaire de la langue pongouee (parlee au Gabon et au
Senegal), pp. 223, 8vo. 1873. 6s.
LEJEUNE (Pere). Dictionnaire francais-fangou pahouin precede de quelques
principes grammaticaux sur cette nieme langue. 347 pp. 8vo. half calf.
1892. 10s.
QUARA (Abyssinia).
REINISCH (L). Die Quara-sprache in Abessinien. 3parts,8vo. 1885-87. 7s. Qd.
RONGA, or SHIRONGA, the language of the Shangani.
(Delagoa Bay).
JUNOD (H. A.). Abeeedaire et livre de lecture en dialect ronga (Baie de
Delagoa). 94 pp. 12mo. cloth. 1894. 2s.
Gramniaire ronga, suivie d'un mauuel de conversation et d'un vocabu-
laire ronga-portugais-francais-anglais. 308 pp. large 8vo. 1896. 5s.
SMITH-DELACOUR (E. W.). A Shironga vocabulary: or word-book on the
language of the natives in the district of Delagoa Bay. 31 pp. 8vo.
1893. 4s.
SAGARA, or MEGI, or KGURU (Bantu Language, North
of Lufiji Biver, East Equatorial Africa).
LAST (J. T. ). Grammar of the Kaguru Language (Eastern Equatorial Africa).
Small 8vo. cloth, pp. 147. 1886. 2s.
SAHO.
REINISCH (L. ). Die Sprache der Irob-Saho in Abessinien. 56 pp. 8vo.
1878. Is. 6<>.
REINISCH (L.). Saho-Sprache.
Vol. I. — Texte der Saho Sprache nut deutscher Uebersetzung. 315 pp. 8vo.
1889. 8s.
Vol. II.— Saho-Deutsches Woerterbucb. 492 pp. 8vo. 1890. £1 4s.
SHAMBAA, or SHAMBALA (German East Africa).
SEIDEL (A.). Handbuch der Shambala Sprache in Usambara. With texts
in Shambala, and a German-Shambala and Shanibala-German vocabulary.
140 pp. 8vo. 1895. 5s.
WOHLRAB and JOHANSEN. Shambaa Lesefibel. 48 pp. small 8vo.
1892. Is. Sd.
Kegan Paul, Trench, Triibner and Co., Limited, Paternoster House,
Charing Cross Road, London: Oriental Catalogue No. X.
African Languages — Somali, Susoo, Swahili. 23
SOMALI
(From the Straits of Bar el Mandal, Round ry Cape
Guardafui, Down to the 4° Southern Latitude).
LIGHT (R. H ). English-Somali Sentences and Idioms for the use of sportsmen
and visitors in Somaliland. 23 pp. small 8vo. 1896. 2s.
Printed in Roman characters only.
LARAJASSE (de). Somali -English and English-Somali Dictionary. 301 pp.
8vo. cloth. 1897. 12s.
and CYPRIEN DE SAM PONT. Practical Somali Grammar, with
a manual of sentences. 265 pp. 8vo. cloth. 1897. 12s.
Both works are printed in Roman characters only.
SCHLEICHER (A. W.). Die Somali Sprache, I. Text, Lautlehre, For-
menlehre und Syntax, xvi. and 159 pp. 8vo. 1892. 6s.
Part II. will never be published, as the author died in Africa.
SUSOO, or SOSO (Mandingo Dialect of Senegambia).
DOUG LIN (Rev. P. H.). A Reading Book in the Soso Language, pp. viii.
and 120, small 8vo. cloth. 1887. 2s. 6d.
DUPORT (J. H.). Outlines of a Grammar of the Susu Language (West
Africa), pp. 28, 8vo. No date (1882). Is. M.
ENDEMANN (K.). Versuch einer Grammatik des Sotho. 201 pp. 8vo.
1876. 6s.
Printed in Roman characters only.
OUTLINES of a Grammar in the Susu Language. 8vo. sewed. Is. 6d.
RAIMBAULT. Dictionnaire francais-soso et soso-francais. pp. x. and 165,
small 8vo. cloth. 1885. 7 s. 6d.
SWAHILI, or KISUAHILI.
BUETTNER (C. G.). Suaheli-deutsch und deutsch-suaheli Woerterbuch. ix.
and 269 pp. 8vo. cloth. 1890. 13s. 6d.
Forms Vol. III. of the " Lehrbiicher des Seminars fur orientalische Sprachen
zu Berlin."
Suaheli-Schriftstiicke, in Arabic and Roman characters, -with German
translation and notes, xi. and 206 and 73 pp. and 11 lithographic plates,
8vo. 1892. £1 2s. 6d.
Forms Vol. X. of the "Lehrbiicher des Seminars fur orientalische Sprachen zu
Berlin."
Lieder und Geschichten der Suaheli [in German, being the second vol.
of the "Suaheli Anthologie," by the same author]. 202 pp. 8vo. 1894. 4s.
Anthologie aus der Suaheli-Litteratur (Gedichte und Geschichten).
Vol. I. Swahili text in Roman characters. Vol. II. German translation.
188 and 202 pp. in one vol. 8vo. 1894. 18s.
DAULL. Grammaire kisouahili. 125 pp. 12mo. bound. 1879. 2s. 6d.
DELAUNAY. Grammaire kiswahili. 173 pp. small 8vo. boards. 1885. 6s.
KRAPF (L.). Outline for the Elements of the Kisuaheli Language, with
special reference to the Kinika dialect. 142 pp. 8vo. cloth. 1850. 7s. 6c?.
Dictionary of the Suahili Language. With Introduction containing
an outline of a Suahili Grammar, pp. xl. and 433, roy. 8vo. cloth. 1882.
(Pub. £1 10s.) 10s. 6d.
M ADAN (A. C. ). English-Swahili Vocabulary, compiled from the Works of the
late Bishop Steere and from other sources, pp. 56, 8vo. cloth. 1885. 2s.
Kegan Paul, Trench, Triibner and Co., Limited, Paternoster House,
Charing Cross Road, London: Oriental Catalogue No. X.
■2\ African Languages- Tail a.
MADAN (A. C). English -Swahili Dictionary, compiled for the use of the
Universities Mission to Central Africa, vi. and 415 p)>. 8vo. cloth. 1894.
U. M.
NETTELBLADT (F. v.). Suaheli Dragoman, xii. and 256 pp. 8vo. 1891. 5s.
CoNTENTa Gesprache, Worterbuct and praktische Anleitungen zura Verkehr
niit den Eingeborenen in Deutsch Ost-Afrika, mit Vorwort von L. von
Gfavenrouth.
RADDATZ (H.). Die Suahili-Sprache mit eihem Anhange: Sndan-Arabisch
and Emftthrung indie Bantusprachen. xiv. and 170 pp. 8vo. 1892. 3.s\ 6'/.
SACLEUX (Oh.). Dictionnaire francais-swahili. 989 and 40 pp post 8vo.
half calf. 1891. £1 Is.
Added is : Catalogue des plantes de Zanzibar, Pemba, Mombassa, Ainou, &c.
SAINT PAUL ILLAIRE (W.). Suaheli Handbuch. 202 pp. 8vo. cloth.
1890. 10s. 6d.
Forms Vol. II. of the " Lehrblicher des Seminars fur orientalische Sprachen."
Swahili Sprachfiihrer. 575 pp. 8vo. cloth. 1896. 10s.
SEIDEL (A.). Praktische Grammatik der Sualieli-Sprache, mit Uebungs-
stuecken, einem Lesebuche und einem deutsch -kisuaheli Woerterbuche.
182 pp. 12mo. cloth. No date (1896). 2s. 6d.
Forms Yol. XXXII. of the " Kmist der Polyglottie. "
STEERE (E. ). Handbook of the Swahili Language, as spoken at Zanzibar.
Fourth edition. Revised and enlarged by A. C. Madan. 8vo. pp. xxii. and
458. 1894. (Pub. at 6s.) 4s.
Swahili Exercises, pp viii. and 118. 8vo. boards. 1886. 2s. 6d.
Swahili Tales as told by natives of Zanzibar, Swahili text with trans-
literation in Roman characters, an English translation, and notes, xvi.
and 501 pp. post 8vo. N.D. (1889). 5s.
SYLLABAIRE swahili. 64 pp. 12mo. 1893. 2s.
TAYLOR (W. E.). African Aphorisms ; or, Saws from Swahililand collected,
translated, and annotated. 8vo. cloth. 3s.
TAITA
(1° South of the Pokomo River, in Eastern Equatorial Africa).
WRAY (J. A.). Elementary Introduction to the Taita Language [Eastern
Equatorial Africa]. 128 pp. 12mo. cloth. 1894. 2s.
TAMASHEK, or TUWARIK (Nomadic Tribes, Western Sahara).
FREEMAN (H. S.). Grammatical Sketch of the Temahuq or Towarek
Language. 47 pp. 8vo. cloth, out of print. 1862. 5s.
HANOTEAU (A.). Essai de grammaire de la langue Tamachek (Touareq)
2ieme edition, renfermant les principes du langage parle par les Imouchar
on Touareg, des conversations en Tamashek, des facsimile d'ecriture en
caracteres Tifnar et une carte indiquant les parties de l'Algerie on la langue
bi rbere est encore en usage. 31, 299 pp. 8vo. 1896. 15s.
KAOUI (S. Cid.). Dictionnaire francais-tamaheq (langue des Touaregs). 894 pp.
4to. lithographed. 1894. £2 2s.
MASQUE RAY (E. ). Dictionnaire francais-touareg (dialecte des Taitoq)
suivi d'observations grammaticales. Parts 1 to 3 (as far as published),
pp. 1-362. 8vo. 1893-95. 6s. each part.
Regan Paul, Trench, Trilbner and Co., Limited, Paternoster House,
Charing Cross lioad, London: Oriental Catalogue No. X.
African Languages — Temne, Teneriffe, Tigre. 25
MASQUER AY (E.). Observations grammaticales sur la grammaire Touareg
et textes de la Tamahaq des Taitoq, publies par R. Basset et Gaudefroy-
Demombynes. Part I. 96 pp. 8vo. 1896. 5s.
TEMNE (Sierra Leone, "West Africa).
ELBA (A. A.) and COLE (E. T.). Temne Reading Book. 32 pp. 12mo. limp
cloth. 1892. Is. Gel.
KNOEDLER (C). A Temne Primer for the use of Temne Schools in West
Africa. 20 pp. 12mo. 1865. Is. Gel.
SCHLENKER (Rev. C. F.). Grammar of the Temne Language. 8vo. cloth.
1864. 7s. Gel.
An English-Temne Dictionary, pp. viii. and 403, 8vo. cloth. 1880.
10s. Gel.
A Collection of Temne Traditions, Fables, and Proverbs, with an
English Translation, as also some Specimens of the Author's own Temne
Compositions and Translations. To which is appended a Temne-English
Vocabulary, pp. xxii. and 298, 8vo. cloth. 1861. 6s.
TENERIFFE.
BUTE (Marquess of). On the Ancient Language of the Natives of Teneriffe.
8vo. 1891. 2s.
TIGRE
(Semitic Language North of the River Takazze, in Abyssinia).
BEURMANN (M. von). Vocabulary of the Tigre Language, with a gram-
matical sketch by A. Merx. viii. and 78 pp. 8vo. cloth. 1868. 2s. Gd.
CAMPERIO (M.). Manuale tigre-italiano con due diziouarietti italiano-tigre
and tigre-italiano e cartina dimostrativa degli idiomi parlati in Eritrea. 177
pp. 12mo. cloth. 1894. 3s.
MUNZINGER (W.). Vocabulaire de la langue tigre [Tigre-French]. 8vo.
pp. x. and 93. 1865. 3s.
The Tigre words are written in Ethiopian characters, with Roman trans-
literation.
PERINI (R.). Manuale teorico - pratico della lingua tigre. 122 pp. 8vo.
1893. 3s. Gd.
PRAETORIUS (F.). Grammatik der Tigrina Sprache in Abessinien, haupt-
saechlich in der Gegend von Aksum und Adoa. Two parts. 367 pp. 8vo.
1871-72. (Pub. at 13s. Gd.) 10s.
All Tigrina words are printed in Ethiopian characters.
SCHREIBER (J.). Manuel de la langue tigrai. Parlee an centre et dans le
nord de l'Abyssinie.
Vol I. pp. iv. and 93, 8vo. 1887. Gs.
Vol. II. Contents. — Tigrai texts with French translation, notes, and a Tigrai-
French vocabulary, pp. 94-227, 8vo. 1893. 8s.
VITO (L. de). Grammatica elementare della lingua tigrigna. 87 pp. 8vo.
1895. 5s.
The Tigrigna words are printed in the Amharic character, with Roman
transliteration.
— Vocabulario della lingua tigrigna con introduzionc e indice italiano-
tigrigna del Conti Rossini Carlo. 166 pp. large 8vo. cloth. 1896. 9s.
Esercizi di lettura in lingua tigrigna. 69 pp. 8vo. cloth. 1894. 5s.
fiegan Paul, Trench, Triibner and Co., Limited, Paternoster House,
Charing Cross Road, London: Oriental Catalogue No. A'.
•_\; African Languages— Tumbuka, Vmlnuidu, Vai, Wotof, Xosa.
TUMBUKA
(Language of the People Living in Subjection to the Ngoni,
on the West Side op the Lake Nyassa).
ELMSLIE (W. A.). Table of Concords and paradigm of verbs of the Tumbuka
Language (as spoken in Mombera's country). Large folio, folded in book
form. 1891. 6s.
UMBUNDU
(Tin: Language of the Inhabitants of Bailundu and Bihe, and
other Countries of West Central Africa).
SANDERS (W. HA Umbundu-Englisb and EngUsh-Umbundu Vocabulary,
containing a list of 3000 words. 76 pp. 12mo. boards. 1885. 7s. Qd.
STOVER (W. M.). Observations upon the grammatical structure and use of
the Umbundu. 83 pp. 12mo. boards. 1885. 7s. 6d.
VAI, or VEI
(Spoken on the Banks of the Gallina River, and at Cape Mount,
in the llberian republic).
KOELLE (S. W.). Outlines of a Grammar of the Vei Language, together
with a Vei-English Vocabulary. With Appendix: an Account of the
Discovery and Nature of the Vei Mode of Syllabic Writing. 8vo. cloth,
pp. 256. Out of print. Scarce. 1854. 10s. Qd.
WOLOF (Senegambia, West Africa).
BOILAT. Grammaire de la langue woloffe. 430 pp. roy. 8vo. 1858. 15s.
DARD (J.). Grammaire wolofe ; ou, methode pour etudier la langue des
noirs qui habitent les royaumes de Bourba-Yolof, de Walo, de Darnel, de
Bour-Sine, de Saloume, de Baole, en Senegambie ; suivie d'un appendice,
ou sont etablies les particularity les plus essentielles des principales langues
de l'Afrique Septentrionale. pp. x. xxii. and 214. 8vo. cloth. 1826. 6s.
Dictionnaire francais-wolof et francais-bambara, suivi du dictionnaire
wolof-francais. xxxii. and 300 pp. 8vo. 1825. 5s.
KOBES (A.). Grammaire de la langue volofe. vi. and 360 pp. 8vo. St.
Joseph de Ngasobil, 1869. Scarce. £1 Is.
ROGER (de). Recherches philosophiques sur la langue ouolofe suivies d'un
vocabulaire abrege fran9ais-ouolofF. pp. 173, 8vo. 1829. 2s. Qd.
XOSA, or K FIR.
BONATZ (T. A.). Anleitung zur Erlernung der Kaffer-Sprache nach T. W.
Appleyard's Grammatik. pp. xii. and 292, 8vo. 1862. 6s.
CRAWSHAW (J.). First Kafir course. Second Edition. 133 pp. 8vo. boards.
1894. 5s.
McLAREN (J.). Introductory Kafir Grammar with progressive exercises.
112 pp. post 8vo. cloth. 1886. 5s.
NAGEL (E.). Prakt. Hulfsbuch der Kafern-Sprache. Zur leichteren Ver-
staendigung mit den eingeborenen Kaffern Sud-Africas. 8vo. pp. 43.
1887. Is. 6d.
Kegan Paul, Trench, Triibner and Co., Limited, Paternoster House,
Charing Cross Road, London: Oriental Catalogue No. X.
African Languages — Yao, Yoruba, Zulu-Kafir. 27
YAO
(South and East of the Lake Nyassa, as fab as the Coast).
HYNDE (R. S.). Second Yao-English primer. 104 pp. 12mo. cloth. 1894.
Is. U.
MAPLES (Ch. ). Yao-English Vocabulary, compiled from various sources.
114 pp. small 8vo. 1888. 5s.
STEERE (E.). Collections for a Handbook of the Yao Language. 105 pp.
8vo. cloth. 1871. 2s.
YORUBA (Eastern Half of the Slave Coast).
BOWEN (T. J.). Grammar and Dictionary of the Yoruba Language, with an
Introductory Description of the Country and People of Yoruba. 4to pp.
228, with a map. 1858. Out of print. £1 5s.
CROWTHER (S.). English- Yoruba and Yoruba-English vocabulary, vii. and
48 and 196 pp. 8vo. half calf. 1843. 6s.
No titlepage to this edition was ever printed.
Grammar of the Yoruba Language. 52 pp. 8vo. cloth. 1852. 2s.
Grammar of the Yoruba Language and Yoruba-English vocabulary,
together with introductory remarks by 0. E. Vidal. v. 38, vii. 52, and
291 pp. 8vo. cloth. 1852. 7s. 6d.
Vocabulary of the Yoruba Language (Yoruba-English only), together
with introductory remarks, by the Right Rev. 0. E. Vidal. 8vo. cloth,
pp. viii. and 38 and 292. 1852. 6s.
RABAN (J.). The Eyo Vocabulary (Dialect of Yoruba). Part II. Contents.—
Alphabet, Verbs, Nouns, Phrases. Sentences, and English-Eyo Vocabulary.
36 pp. 12mo. Scarce. 1832. 2s. 6d.
WOOD (J. B.). Notes on construction of the Yoruba language. 48 pp. 8vo.
1879. Is. U.
ZULU-KAFIR. (See also under "Ngonl")
AMBROSIUS. Grammatik der Zulu-Kafhrischen Sprache. 210 pp. 8vo.
1890. 10s.
BOYCE (W. B.). Grammar of the Kafir Language. 54 pp. 4to. 1834. Yen-
scarce. 15s.
The same. Second Edition, augmented and improved by vocabulary
and exercises by W. J. Davis. 228 pp. 8vo. 1844. 9s.
COLENSO (J. W.). First Steps in Zulu: being an elementary grammar
of the Zulu language. Fourth Edition. 161 pp. small 8vo. 1890.
7s. 6d.
Zulu-English Dictionary. 552 pp. 8vo. half calf. 1861. 6s.
Zulu-English Dictionary. Second Edition, revised and enlarged.
673 pp. small 8vo. cloth. 1884. 12s.
DOHNE (T. L. ). Zulu -Kafir Dictionary, etymologically explained, with
copious illustrations and examples, preceded by an introduction on the
Zulu-Kafir language, pp. xlii. and 418, royal 8vo. Out of print. 1857.
£1 Is.
GIBBS (S.). Easy Zulu Vocabulary and Phrase-book, with grammatical
notes. 53 pp. small 8vo. 1890. 3s. 6rf.
Kegan Paul, Trench, Triibner and Co., Limited, Paternoster House,
Charing Cross Road, London ; Oriental Catalogue No. X,
28 African Languages— 'Zulu-Kafir.
GROUT (L.). The Isi.ulu: a grammar of the Zulu language, with a historical
introduction. New Edition, revised. 313 pp. large 8vo. cloth. 1893. 16s.
The same. First Edition. 432 pp. 8vo. 1859. (Puh. £1 1«.) 6s.
Observations on the Prepositions, Conjunctions, and other Particles of
the Isi.'.ulu and its cognate languages. 12 pp. 8vo. 1859. Is. 6i(.
MATE (Ph.). Kleines deutsoh-kaffirisohes Worterhuch. 173 pp, small 8vo.
bound. 1891. 3s.
NG'UNEMO, Isigania, i.e., English-Kafir Vocabulary. 219 pp. 8vo. cloth.
No dale. 3s. fid.
NG'UNEMO, Igrama Lesingisi, i.e., English Grammar for Kafirs. 449 pp. 8vo.
cloth. No date. 5s.
PERRIN'S English-Zulu Dictionary. Fourth Edition, revised and enlarged.
334 pp. 12ino. cloth. 1890. 4s.
ROBERTS (Oh.). English-Zulu Dictionary, with the principles of pronun-
ciation and classification fully explained. Second Edition, with Supplement.
267 pp. 12mo. cloth. 1895. 5s.
The Zulu-Kafir Language Simplified for Beginners. Third edition,
enlarged. 177 pp. 8vo. cloth 1895. 6s.
pp. 123 to end contain an English-Zulu and Zulu-English Vocabulary.
The South -African Traveller's Handbook, containing a brief outline
of the Zulu-Kafir grammar and a large number of English words, sentences,
and dialogues rendered in Zulu-Kafir, Xosa-Kafir, and Dutch. 172 pp.
12mo. cloth. 1879. Out of print. 6s.
SCHREUDER (H. P. S.). Grammatik der Zulu-Sproget. Fortale og anmaerk-
ninger af C. A. Holmboe. 88 pp. 8vo. 1850. 5s.
BOOKS ON AFRICA.
AFRICA AND THE AMERICAN NEGRO. Addresses and Proceedings of
the Congress on Africa, held in Atalanta, U.S.A., in December, 1895.
242 pp. text, with numerous illustrations, 8vo. 1896. 7s. 6d.
BIRD (J.). Annals of Natal. 1495 to 1845. 2 vols. 732 and 484 pp. royal
8vo. cloth. 1888. £2.
The author had access to the archives of the Cape Government and to the
Record Office in London, and has copied numerous official documents with
permission of the Secretary of State.
BURTON (R. F. ). Abeokuta and the Cameroons Mountains: an Exploration.
2 vols. With folded map. Fine half calf. 1863. Scarce. 25s.
CAPE OF GOOD HOPE ARCHIVES. Precis, edited by H. C. V. Leibbrandt.
8vo. Viz. :
Letters received from 1695 to 1708. 474 pp. 1896. 6s.
Letters dispatched from 1695 to 1708. 397 pp. 1896. 6s.
Journal from 1699 to 1732. 341 pp. 1896. 6s.
Defence of AV. Adriaan van der Stel. 198 pp. 1897. 5s.
DAUMAS (E. ). Les chevaux dn Sahara et les mceurs du desert. New
Edition, revised and enlarged by Emir Abdel Kader. viii. and 541 pp.
large 8 vo. 1862. (Pub. 8s.) 4s.
Kegan Paul, Trench, Triibner and Co., Limited, Paternoster House
Charing Cross Road, London : Oriental Catalogue No. X,
Boohs on Africa. 29
DRURY. The Adventures of Robert Drury during Fifteen Years' Captivity
on the Island of Madagascar. Containing a description of that island,
to which is added a vocabulary of the Madagascar language. Written by
himself, and now carefully revised and corrected from the original copy,
xii. and 459 pp. large 8vo. 1807. 4s.
ELLIS (A. B.). The Tshi-speaking Peoples of the Gold Coast of West Africa,
their religion, manners, customs, laws, language, etc. vii. and 343 pp.
with map, large 8vo. cloth. 1887. (Pub. 10s. 6d.) 5s.
The Ewe-speaking Peoples of the Slave Coast of West Africa, their
religion, manners, customs, laws, languages, etc. viii. and 331 pp. with a
map, large 8vo. cloth. 1890. (Pub. 10s. 6d.) 5s.
A History of the Gold Coast of West Africa, xi. and 400 pp. with
map, cloth, large 8 vo. 1893. (Pub. 10s. 6d.) 5s.
The Yoruba- speaking Peoples of the Slave Coast of West Africa, their
religion, manners, customs, laws, language, etc., with an appendix con-
taining a comparison of the Tshi, Ga, Ewe, and Yoruba languages. 402 pp.
8vo. cloth. 1S94. (Pub. 10s. 6d.) 5s.
EMIN PASHA IN CENTRAL AFRICA: being a collection of his letters and
journals. Edited and annotated by G. Schweinfurth, F. Ratzel, R. Y\ .
Felkin, and G. Hartlaub. Translated by Mrs. R. W. Felkin. With two
portraits, a map, and notes, xviii. and 547 pp. large 8vo. cloth. 1888.
(Pub. £1 Is.) 10s. M.
FELKIN fR. W.). Geographical Distribution of Tropical Diseases in Africa,
with an appendix on a new method of illustrating the geographical distri-
bution of disease 79 pp. with table and map, 8vo. cloth. 1895. 5s.
HUTTON (W.). A Voyage to Africa, including a Narrative of an Embassy
to one of the interior Kingdoms, in. the year 1820. Illustrated with maps
and plates, x, and 488 pf. large 8vo. half calf. 1821. 5s.
KAUFMANN (YV\). The Egyptian State Debt and its relation to Inter-
national Law, translated into English, with an historical retrospect since
1841, and numerous statistics by H. Wallach. 308 pp. 8vo. cloth. 1892. 8s.
KINSKY (Count K.). The Diplomatist's Handbook for Africa. 106 pp. With
a Political Map. Roy. 8vo. cloth. 1897. •
Contains an historical and statistical abstract of all states m Africa and an
enumeration of their treaties with European powers.
KOELLE (S. W.). African Native Literature; or Proverbs, Tales, Fables,
and Historical Fragments in the Kanuri or Bornu Language, Kanuri Text,
with English Translation and a Kanuri-English Vocabulary. 434 pp. 8vo.
1854. 7s. 6d.
KRAPF (Rev. Dr. T. L.). Travels, Researches, and Missionary Labours
during an Eighteen Years' Residence in Eastern Africa. With portrait,
maps,°and illustrations of scenery and costume, li. and 566 pp. large 8vo.
cloth. 1860. (Pub. £1 Is.) 10s. U.
MACDONALD (Rev. Duff). Africans ; or, The Heart of Heathen Africa.
2 vols, large 8vo. cloth. 1882. (Pub. £1 Is.) 10s. 6d.
Contents.— Vol. I. Native Customs and Beliefs, xvi. and 301 pp.
II. Mission Life. ix. and 371 pp.
MULLER (Hendrik P. N.). Industrie des Cafres 'lu Sud-Est do l'AMque.
Collection recueillie sur lea lieux et notice ethnographique avec description
• des objets representee par Job. F. Snelleman. 48 pp. text with 27 plates
(some coloured), and music of Zambesi songs. Small folio. 1893. £1 10s.
PAULITSCHKE (P.). . Die Africa Litteratur in der Zeit von 1500 bis 1750 n.
Chr. Ein Beitrag zur geographischen Quellenkunde. 123 pp. large 8vo.
1882. 4s. (Continued on page 2 of cove r.)
Kenan Paul, Trench, Triibner and Co., Limited, Paternoster House,
Charing Cross Road, London: Oriental Catalogue No. X.
KEGAN PAUL, TRENCH, TRUBNER & CO.
LIMITED,
PATERNOSTER HOUSE, CHARING CROSS ROAD, LONDON.
BOOKSELLING DEPARTMENT.
On; extensive
Easl enables u
to order. A lar
is always kept
time to time.
We have
Literature to
connection in all important towns of British India and the Far
s to supply Oriental Hooks, Periodicals, and Newspapers rapidly
uv Stuck of Modern and Old Oriental Books, especially on Philology,
w. 11 assorted. Systematically arranged Catalogues are issued from
likewise special facilities to supply English and Continental
Public Libraries and Residents in the East direct on the most
advantageous conditions, and quicker than through other channels.
PUBLISHING DEPARTMENT.
We beg to call the special attention of Authors and Learned Societies to this
Branch of our Business, as we can command, thanks to our connection with
Oriental Scholars, University and other Public Libraries and Institutions, a
satisfactory sale of Books on Eastern topics, without having to incur heavy
expenses for advertising.
|^~ Copyrights of Books bought outright, or Books published on half
share with Author, or on their account for a fixed commission, according
to previous arrangement.
Oriental Catalogue No. VIII.
OF
NEW & SECOND-HAND BOOKS
Comparative, General, and
Miscellaneous Works •.
Buddhism and Lamaism
Confucianism and Taoism
Egyptian Religion
ON
rHE
EIENTAL RELIGIONS.
CONTENTS.
PAQE
) PAGE
Hinduism and Brahmanism
20-28
1-7
M.OHAMEDANISM .
28-31
7-16
Parsiism
31-33
16-18
Shintoism . . .
33-34
18-20
Theosophy
34
ADDED IS A COMPLETE LIST OF
Trubner's English and Foreign Philosophical Library,
AND A SELECTION OF BOOKS ON THE
CHRISTIAN AND JEWISH RELIGIONS,
Which are published by ourselves.
Oriental Catalogue No. IX.
CONTAINING BOOKS ON THE
Natural History and Medical Scienee of the East,
AND ON THE
Agriculture and Industries of the Tropics.
°v
o
't
I NIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY
Los Angeles
i his book is i>i i <>m the last dale stamped below.
% *w mm
!EC'D C.L SEP 2 . '98
Form L9-Series 4939
ummS
11Inmff£1&Wt^"<KL*a
L 007 766 T> ™
UC SOUTHERN
REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY
AA 000 7735160
PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE
THIS BOOK CARDS
^•LIBRARY/
Ls
^/OJIIVDJO^
University Research Library
n
>
r
=T
00
m
<
o
r
t;
H
o
o
■o
tr-
in
r— '•
>
c
-1
X
o
X
i — > 1
'-••'.' 1
1
"< 1
— 1
"O 1
1
35- 1
__i 1
»•— > 1
{,;■•■» 1
,V'.> 1
i
*T" 1
T- 1
